PF 3111 .B38 1910 Copy 1 Glass. Book. J2&2_ Ibeatb's flDo&ern language Series A GERMAN GRAMMAR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES BY FRANCIS KINGSLEY BALL, Ph.D. INSTRUCTOR IN GREEK AND GERMAN IN THE PHILLIPS EXETER ACADEMY AUTHOR OF "A GERMAN DRILL BOOK," ETC., ETC. BOSTON, U.S.A. D. C. HEATH & CO., PUBLISHERS 1910 Copyright, 1906 and 1907, By D. C. Heath & Co. TO GEORGE ANTHONY HILL WITH GRATITUDE AND REGARD iii PREFACE THE author's German Drill Book has been so kindly received and so kindly spoken of both here and in England that he feels warranted in hoping the present book will be welcomed and prove of real service. Its predecessor, the Drill Book, which is intended as a companion to this or to any other German grammar, has served as a framework, or background. The grammar has had the advantage also of being tested in the classroom, the proof sheets having been used in the Academy in five different classes. The author believes that students should learn their grammar from one book, with the contents of which they should become thoroughly familiar. This means that the book must be simple enough for the beginner and complete enough for the advanced student. The grammar here offered aims to meet these require- ments. And while it has only 256 pages, it contains more exer- cises and in some respects more information than many larger grammars. The arrangement of the matter is topical, that the important facts about each subject may be had in one place. Each section (with the exception of the first) occupies but two pages, and constitutes a day's lesson for the average class of beginners in the high school or the academy. Each section contains but a single topic, to keep the attention of the student focussed for that day upon but one point of grammar, so that in this way he may feel he is learning each day some part of a definite whole. At the same time, each section is so numbered that for more elementary classes it may easily be divided into two or three parts, or the exercises from English into German may be omitted VI A GERMAN GRAMMAR until the book is taken up in review, although it is the opinion of the author that progress in gaining a real knowledge of the language will in general be more rapid and more satisfactory by taking the English exercises along with the German exercises. For the benefit of those students who begin the study of German without proper or sufficient training in English grammar, ten pages of the supplement are devoted to some of the more im- portant facts of English and German grammar, treated side by side, which may profitably be studied before the regular exercises of the book are begun. The exercises of each section have sufficient continuity to furnish materials for conversational use if that is thought desir- able. Practice in the order of words is begun at the very first and continued through the book. Nouns are not introduced by classes until section XVI. Weak verbs are introduced at the start. Strong verbs appear in section X; and while they occur frequently thereafter, they are repeated in sections LIII — LVIII, arranged by classes. The classification is not always historically correct, but made according to the forms of the verbs as we now find them, as this seems more profitable in a book of this kind. For example, bclfcn ( like other verbs with i in the second person singular of the present indicative) was once ()ilfert (like birifcert, Class III), but it is more easily learned with verbs that have similar vowel change (192, 193). Class VII includes forms too irregular to be grouped easily elsewhere. Prepositions and conjunctions are introduced in the earliest sections, but they are all treated systematically and in detail toward the end of the book. Sections LXII — LXIV furnish reviews on the syntax of the cases, and the last three sections embrace peculiar construc- tions, the suffixes, and compound words. In reviewing the book, or in using it in the second or the third year work, the exercises can be varied by changing singu- lars to plurals, plurals to singulars, questions to statements, statements to questions, direct to indirect discourse, etc. PREFACE Vll The supplement contains tables of the inflections and classi- fied lists of nouns. Each vocabulary will be found complete in itself, without the necessity of looking up forms elsewhere. The inflection of the nouns is indicated and the principal parts of all the verbs are given, whether strong or weak, inseparable or sep- arable. The long vowels are marked long and the accent of doubtful words is indicated. The index is made full, to afford easy access to the contents of the book. The references through- out the book are to page and section, or to page and footnote, and should be so read. For example, 49, 3, should be read "forty-nine, three"; and 49 1 should be read "forty-nine, footnote one." This system of reference will be found convenient and a great saver of time, for page and section are found far more quickly than sections numbered consecutively. The author takes pleasure in acknowledging his indebtedness to Dr. Maurice W. Mather, of Cambridge, Mass., and Miss Helen Cilley, of Exeter, for reading pages 1-137 in manuscript. Mr. Arthur F. Hertell, of the Academy, has rendered valuable assist- ance in reading both the manuscript and the proofs. For other suggestions the author thanks Dr. D. F. Wells, of Exeter, and Miss Elizabeth O'Leary, of Lawrence, Mass. Again he wishes to record his obligation to his friend Mr. G. A. Hill, of Cam- bridge, Mass., to whom this book is dedicated, for his constant encouragement, advice, and assistance. FRANCIS KINGSLEY BALL. Exeter, N. H., April, 1907. This (the third) edition has been revised throughout. The author thanks all who have assisted him. For the revision of the German exercises he is indebted to several skilful native German scholars, particularly to Mr. Otto Meierfeldt, Prussian Exchange Instructor at the Academy. F. K. B. Exeter, March, 1909. CONTENTS CHAPTER PAGE I. Introduction: The Germans and Their Language; The Alphabet; The Vowels and Diphthongs ; The Consonants; Exercise I, Pronunciation . . . 1-5 II. The Present and the Past Indicative of ©em . . 6, 7 III. Siefer, fetter, Seber, and 23eld)ev 8,9 IV. The Definite Article 10, 1 1 V. The Present Indicative of Weak Verbs . . . 12, 13 VI. The Past Indicative of Weak Verbs . . . 14,15 VII. The Personal and Intensive Pronouns . . . 16,17 VIII. The Reflexive Pronouns and Reflexive Verbs . . 18, 19 IX. ®em, (Sin, and the Possessive Adjectives . . . 20, 21 X. The Present and the Past Indicative of Strong Verbs 22, 23 XI. The Present and the Past Indicative of SSerben . . 24, 25 XII. The Perfect and the Pluperfect Indicative of Weak Verbs 26, 27 XIII. The Perfect and the Pluperfect Indicative of Strong Verbs 28, 29 XIV. The Perfect and the Pluperfect Indicative of Verbs inflected with (Seitt 30, 31 XV. The Future and the Future Perfect Indicative . . 32, 33 XVI. Nouns: Class I, Strong 34,35 XVII. Nouns: Class II, Strong . . ._ . .36,37 XVIII. Nouns: Class III, Strong. ..... 38, 39 XIX. Nouns: Class IV, Weak 40,41 XX. Nouns: Class V, Mixed 42,43 XXI. Nouns: Proper Names 44> 45 XXII. Adjectives: Class I, Strong 46, 47 XXIII. Adjectives: Class II, Weak 48, 49 XXIV. Adjectives: Class III, Mixed 50, 51 XXV. Adjectives: Comparison . . . „ . 5-j 53 XXVI. Adjectives: Irregular Comparison . . . 54, 55 A GERMAN GRAMMAR CHAPTER XXVII. Adverbs .... XXVIII. The Cardinal Numbers . XXIX. The Ordinal Numbers XXX. The Possessive Pronouns . XXXI. The Demonstrative Pronouns XXXII. The Relative and Interrogative Pronouns XXXIII. The Indefinite Pronouns. Part I XXXIV. The Indefinite Pronouns, Part II XXXV. The Present Indicative of Peculiar Verbs XXXVI. The Imperative Mood XXXVII. The Conditional Mood XXXVIII. The Mood Auxiliaries, Part I . XXXIX. The Mood Auxiliaries, Part II. XI.. Irregular Weak Verbs XL I. The Prepositions with the Genitive . XLII. The Prepositions with the Dative XLIII. The Prepositions with the Accusative XLIV. The Prepositions with the Dative or the Ac- cusative . XLV. The Separable Prefixes XLVI. The Inseparable Prefixes XLVII. The Doubtful Pr< XLVI 1 1. The Subjunctive Mood XLIX. The Coordinating Conjunctions L. The Subordinating Conjunctions, Part I LI. The Subordinating Conjunctions, Part II LI I. The Passive Voice . LI II. The Strong Verbs, Class I LIV. The Strong Verbs, Class II LV. The Strong Verbs, Class III LVL The Strong Verbs, Class IV LVII. The Strong Verbs, Classes V and VI LVIII. The Strong Verbs, Class VII LIX. The Normal Order . LX. The Inverted Order . LXI. The Transposed Order LXII. The Genitive Case . CONTENTS xi CHAPTER PAGE LXIII. The Dative Case .... . 128, 129 LXIV. The Accusative Case. • 13°, l 3 l LXV. Peculiar Constructions • 132, 133 LXVI. •The Suffixes ..... • 134, 135 LXVII. Compound Words .... • I3 6 > 137 LXVIII. The German Script .... . 138-140 Some Essentials of English and German Grammar . 141-151 Nouns, or Names 141 Adjectives 141 Pronouns 142 Verbs 143-148 Sentences, Conjunctions, Adverbs, and Prepositions . 149 English Conditional Sentences ..... 150 German Conditional Sentences . . . . . 151 The Inflection of Nouns 152-163 The Classes of Nouns . . . . . . 152 The Gender of Nouns according to their Meanings. . 152 The Gender of Nouns according to their Classes . 153 How to determine the Class of a Noun .... 154 Class I, Strong 155 Class II, Strong 156, 157 Class III, Strong 158, 159 Class IV, Weak 160, 161 Class V, Mixed 162 Proper Names ........ 163 The Inflection of Adjectives . ..... 164-167 Class I, Strong 164 Class II, Weak 164, 165 Class III, Mixed 165 The Numerals 166, 167 The Predicate Superlative, etc 167 The Inflection of Pronouns, etc 168-171 The Personal and Intensive Pronouns . . . . 168, 169 The Possessive Pronouns 169 The Demonstrative Pronouns ..... 170 A GERMAN GRAMMAR The Relative and Interrogative Pronouns . The Indefinite Pronouns .... The Definite Article; Punctuation The Inflection of Verbs .... Verb Stem, Principal Parts, Weak and Strong Verbs The Endings The Tense Auxiliaries: fja&cn, have^ [eilt, be. The Tense, Mood, and Voice Auxiliary: tterbett, become Weak Verbs: ffigeit, say; fotgen, follow Strong Verbs: [ingert, sing; finfen, sink The Passive Voice: lichen, love . Reflexive Verbs: fid) f vouch, rejoice The Mood Auxiliaries: Milieu, may; fouueu, can; mo $tn,ntay; mimeii, must; foDen, shall;* unMlcn, will Separable Verbs: roie'berffigen, say again Inseparable Verbs: entffi'gen, renounce Weak Verbs with Peculiarities in Inflection. Strong Verbs with Peculiarities in Inflection Irregular Weak Verbs The Strong Verbs classified according to their Vowel Changes ....... An Alphabetical List of the Strong and Irregular Verbs The Mood Auxiliaries and fiaffen. The Prepositions in Verse .... Grimm's Law German -English Vocabulary English-German Vocabulary Index PAGE I70 I70 171 172 -202 172 173 174 175 176, 177 178 *79 ISO 181 132 183 I84 185 186, 187 188 189 190 190 191 192, 193 194-199 200-202 203 204 205-226 227-236 237-244 A GERMAN GRAMMAR I. INTRODUCTION The Germans and their Language GERMAN, English, and nearly all the other languages of Europe and southwestern Asia are related, and belong to what is called the Indo-European, Indo-Germanic, or Aryan family; for our ancient forefathers lived in the same commu- nity, just where is unknown, and spoke the same language. When our ancestors spread over Europe, climate and other conditions changed their habits and their language : growing farther and farther apart, they grouped themselves into differ- ent communities, and to-day are represented by distinct nations with distinct languages. To the Germanic branch of the family belong the Gothic, the Scandinavian, the Low German, and the High German dialects, the Gothic being an elder sister of the others. Low German, which is most closely related to Anglo-Saxon, is spoken in the lowlands of northern Germany ; High German, in the uplands of central and southern Germany. High German has three periods : Old High German, ex- tending from the sixth century to the time of the Crusades ; Middle High German, beginning with the Crusades, and ex- tending about to the time of Luther ; New High German, from Luther's to our own time. Chiefly through Luther's translation of the Bible (1522-15 34), High German became known among all classes. In four centuries it has undergone many changes, but it remains throughout Germany the lan- guage of the educated, and has a large and varied literature. A GERMAN GRAMMAR German Form Roman Form Name Sound Example % a 21 a A a ah Grana'da Sat'jftcfie 23 6 58 b B b bay bishop beliebt' IS c a c C c tsay kits Ga fe, 6a' jar $ b 2) b D d day debt benf'enb g e © e E e ay they redden fjcr'jeriben 8 f 5 f F f ef for ^atl © 9 © 8 G g g a y go, d) ftiftig £ $ * » H h hah Hannah l)in'a,eficn 3 > 3 i I i ee machinist 2Bi'bertoffle 3 1 3 i J J yot you Jung fl f S t K k kah key fait 2 i 2 1 L 1 el lid lang aw m 3H m M m em met SKufff 92 n 92 n N n €)l no ink etu'tnnfen D o C o oh chrd'mfl bdr/ffltmnett % P * P P P pay pay %\\\ Q q Q q Q q koo qu ==kv q u i cf 32 V 92 r R r er \ ray attttfl 3 [3 3 [S S s this is she auo biefet Stfibe a t I t T t toy toy Ifil it u it n U u 00 fruitful ttr/fprftng S b 8 u V V faw* for Skater S3 m SB to w w vay vain SBaffet X i 3E S X X !X box ••ocre 9 i) g | Y y ipsilon German ii, i ^ij'rif, Jrjrann' 3 5 3 5 z z tset mits ^erj (S has two forms for the small letter : § # used at the end of a syllable, except before p or t not in compound words ; elsewhere, f : as. 53ismarrf, Man*, MaiiC'tuv (= §au§j £5* ; but, SSefpe, Stftronomie / ) ; lefen, ftefoen, ^an'- bclSftabt The double consonants are di, cf (Ut when divided, 4, 21, ft, £. In the Roman type (137), s is used for 3 or f ; ss for jf ; B for ft (but, in capitals, SZ). For the script, see 138 ; for the capitals, 141, 1. 1 As in "ere," but with the "r" trilled. 2 As in "fowl." THE VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS 3 The Vowels and Diphthongs As a rule, vowels are long before silent h, or when accented i before single consonants, or when doubled. Otherwise they are short. If long, they remain long before suffixes : Long a = Grana'da: as, tfifim, ffi'gen, §aar ; fag'bar. Short a = Grana'da: as, SDMnn. Long c = they: as, geht, le'ben, £>eer ; (eb'io§. Short c = red : as, SBctt. Obscure final e = redden : as, ret' ten, ret'te, fjamflie. rSin'dien Long i (generally written ie) = machinist : as, tbm, fit'na, Ue'6en ; Short i = machinist : as, trtnf'en. Long o = chro'mo : as, roofi'nen, 9KB'nat, S3oot ; trjofin'6ai\ Short o = chro'mb : as, ©dtt. Long u = fruitful: as, £ufin, rit'fen; rwfft. Short u = fruitful : as, Mt'ter. Long t) = generally German U (3, 2) : l as, Stj'riL Short tj = generally German t : as, ©Jjmna'fiunu a, 0, u often have modification (Umlaut), shown by two dots 2 over the letter, a, o f ii ; da becomes a, and 00 becomes ii: 2 Long a = there : as, ^Sfi'ne, $f)'re, ©S'le (from ©oat) ; ^ttfin'lein. Short a = red : as, s Mn'ner. Long ij = nearly fern : as, ©ofr/ne, 6' fen ; S36'te (from 33oot) ; ©Bhn' chert. Short = nearly her : as, Bffnen. Long it = French une: 1 as, fttbt, U'6ung, Ubft. Short it = French tu : x as, SKut'ter. ax, at), et, et) = aisle (except in words of French origin at = S : as, £ Satfon') : as, Wax, Satj'er, fret, Sftety'er. att ■= our (in words of French origin = 9) : as, brcmn ; but, QfiauffeT. ait, eu = oil : as, Xvau'mt, ttett* 1 Hold the lips rounded as if to whistle, and try to say ee. 2 The two dots represent an original e, which in proper names is sometimes written after the letter to be modified : as, ©oet&e. A GERMAN GRAMMAR The Consonants lb pronounced with the preceding vowel = p : as, f)ctfot, Iefi'(o§. c before e, i, i), a, o = ts (in words of French origin = ss : as, Sau'ce) ; elsewhere = k: as, GS'jar; (Safe. 1^= d) (after a, o f u, roughen h in hard ; elsewhere, in he) : as, •madden, bredj'en. eft in words of French origin = sh : as, (Sftara'be. In most words of Greek origin eft = k: as, (Xftro'mf, Creftejt'er ; but sometimes before c or i = eft : as, Gftemie'. d)3 f when the § is a part of the root of the word, = ks : as, £d)3. b at the end of a syllable = t : as, .foonb, cub' lid). A at the end of a syllable = d) : as, 93crg, log, tag' ltd). But see ttg. g before c in words of French origin = azure: as, (ioind'gc. gn in words of French origin — companion : as, (Fhampagn'eVj I) beginning a word or a suffix = ha ; elsewhere = ah and shows that the preceding vowel is long : as, gauS, (iiu'l)cit ; a,ef)cn. But see d). j = you (in words of French origin = azure): as, \a ; but, journal'. II in words of French origin = billion : as, billet' (bill-yet 7 ). ng = singer: as. filiflcn, Atngcv. n! == ink : as, tristten. qu = kv (in words of French origin = ki : as, Quelle; but, 93ouqiie't / . g at the end of a syllable = ss : elsewhere = z : as, au3'a,el)en; 3ot)n, fd) = sh: as, Aifd), rrijuic. [unfer. fp at the beginning of a syllable = shp : as, Spriugen, aui'fpringen. ft at the beginning of a syllable = sht : as, Sturm, auf'ftehcii. £ is written for ff after a long vowel or a diphthong, before t, at the end of a syllable, or when a following c is dropped : as, friij?e3, fliefeen ; muj?ten : gujj, ?slu\i ; auv'odajniev (for auS'gelaffener) : but, SfymffeT ( French). t in the terminations rial' and tion' = ts : as, martial', 9?att5n'. tfy = t: as. XI)ca'tcv, Ideologic'. to (written for g§) = ts : as, .oific, 3ifc. tj = f (initial or medial in words of French or of Latin origin = v; : as, SJatet ; but, SHclfnc, 2*emV (pronounced Vesuf ). In dividing words, consonants are put at the beginning of syllables when easily so pronounced ; but ft is not divided, and compounds are di- vided according to their parts; d when divided is written t-t : as, 9(p'|el, 23ikt)cr, arHdjer, £ttt*je, $htoi=pc. |m=gen, Bo^t'e, StaMe, Strode, SSaMer , but, be=ne : &ien&tag, §m^m'*cptyn ; Srufsfe (Sriirfc). THE ALPHABET 5 Exercise i, Pronunciation Tit Warn, bte banner, bfi§ §Beib, bie SKetber, bie gran, bte granen, bfiS granletn, bte granletn, bte Sttagb, bte -Iftagbe, bag SftSb* Jen, ber SSater, bte SSater, bte Gutter, bte TOtter, ber Sofjn, bte gfifjne, bte Xodjter, bte Iod)tcr, ber 33ruber, bte 23rUber, bie 2d)ir>e^ fter, bte Sd)ir>eftern, ber Dttfel, ber Sfteffe. Tcr 2lrm, bte tone, bte ganb, bte ganbe, ber ginger, bie ginger, fe Singe, bie 2(ngen, bag §aar, ber gitft, bie gUJ3e, ber t ? were you there, Mrs. Smith/ Vocabulary bcr, the, masculine ; bie, the, femi- bcr 3ommcr, the summer nine ; bfi3, the, neuter bcr ^rfibcr, the brother (ylt'fnbctn, Elizabeth bic Jyrnn, the woman ftrtcbrtcf), Frederic(k)\ Jyritt, Fred bcr (Garten, the garden b&3 £>au*, the house bcr s ?3iamt, the man Wane or $)iartc', Marie' , Mary bic Gutter, the mother bic ccfitDcftcr, the sister bcr 3of)tt, the son bic £orf)tcr, the daughter bcr i*atcr, the father SBtUjelltt, William bcr Winter, the winter flrftii, green; rot, r^vf fjci^, A»/j,* fair, A?/*/ juna., young; franf, ill, sick roarm, warm; fufjl, ^0/ f)icr, Atfyvy ba, //^r^ \a,yes; ncin f wy nicf»t f ;/^/ tntt f 7c'///^; unb, #//au3 mar ntdjt roarm, unb id) unb Sdjrocfter Woxxt roaren franf, 13. 3ft dearie ntdjt jung ? 14- 3a, fie tft jung ; Sftarte, too Gift bit ? 15. 2)a iff Stfarte mtt $ater nnb s Dcutter. 16. 2So tft griebridj? 3ft er ntdjt fjier? 17. Dfetn, %x\% tft nid)t fjier, tft er ntdjt franf? 18. (£r mar geftern franf, maren @ie ntdjt ba ? Exercise 3, English into German 19. Where is the house ? 20. There are the house and the 3 garden ; the house is red and green. 21. How is the sum- mer ? Is it (er, ber (Sommer, masculine) cool ? 22. It is hot, and brother Fred is ill. 23. Where is Fred ? Is he not here ? 24. No, he is not here ; he was here yesterday with father. 25. Where was William yesterday ? Was he here ? 26. Yes, he and Mary were here. 27. Where are father and mother ? 28. Mother is not here. 29. Father, are you there ? 30. Yes, and here are William and Elizabeth. 31. Elizabeth, were you here yesterday with father? 8 A GERMAN GRAMMAR ill. Siefer, £$encr, ^ebcr, AND 28eftf)er The German language has four cases : Nominative = the English nominative. Genitive = the English possessive, or the objective with of. Dative = the English objective, with or without to or for. Accusative = the English objective, with or without a prepo- sition. £ icier, tetter, ieber, and toeltfjer have special terminations, called strong endings, to indicate gender, number, and case : Masculine Feminine Neuter N. Meier biefe biefeS this G. biefeS Meier biefe 3 of this Singular D. Ma" cm Meier biefetn to or for this A. biefe 3 this N. biefe biefe these G. Meier Meier of these Plural D. Meicu Meicu to ox for these A. biefe biefe these Vocabulary bicfer, bicfc, biefeS or bie§, this jencr, jene, jcitc*, that jebcr, ict>c f jebeS, mcltficr, n>clci)c, n>cld)Cv, which t bos Srdt, the bread bcr ftnf'fcc, the coffee bcr itSfc, the cheese bte 3KUdj, the milk bcr SBagett, the wagon, the carriage bao SBajfer, the water flcilt, little, short i of persons) nit, old; \T\)d) t fresh, sweet (of milk, butter, etc.) Inner, sour; fuf;, sweet fdjtoars, black ; rocif;, white nbcr f but, hm foiibcru, but, following a negative clause and contradicting it in, prep, with d., in; with a., into nut, prep, with d.. with Wa§, what? [are going cr gcl)t, he is going; fie flcf)cu, they THE CASES 9 Exercise 4, German into English 1. SKo finb ^atcr unb Gutter, (Stifaoetf) ? Sinb fie in btefetn IBagen ? 2. Stutter unb griebricf) jtnb l)ter, after better ift ba, er t]el)t mit SSitfjelm tit jencit (Garten. 3- W\i toetdjer Sdnucfter ift grig in jenem SSagen? 4. (£t ift mit dearie in jenem 3Sagen. 5. $)iefer (Garten ift rTein, after luie grim unb fu()l er ift ! 6. Unb hue fait bieS SBaffer ift ! 7- Sn roetdjem SSagen finb bex ®affee, bie WM) unb ba3 S5rot ? 8. £er S=taffee unb bie 9Jcild) finb ha in jenem SSagen. 9. 2ffter raa£ ift in biefem SBagcn ? gutter unb 2kot ? 10. ga, fjier finb bie Gutter unb bas SBrot ; biefem 53rot ift pmarg, unb btefeS ift toeijs. 11. 2ffter bieje£ Q3rot ift nicfjt frifdj, fonbern aft. 12. i irrlic, the church: in bcr Utrriic, at church; in bic (or jfir) Uirdtc, A? church; uatl) bcr fttrrijc, /#- ward the church bic 3d) file, ///f schoolhouse, the school: in bcr 3cf)iilc, #/ school; \\\ bic (or jar) Sdjtitc, to jt/W/ bflv Sftca'tcr, // ; f theater: int Xhco= tcr r 0/ £fe theater; ?n§ ifjeater, A? ///6' theater geftern, yesterday: geftern ntorgen, yesterday morning; gcftcrnabcnb, /^jV night flClltC, to-day: f)ClttC ntorgcit, Mtf morning; fjeute abenb, Mu t'jynnfc, //cw^ 5S, prep, with D., to, at: 511 £>anfe, at home 1 liefer, jener, jeber, tnekner, and bcr are inflected with strong endings (8,2) and may be called Meier-words. THE DEFIXITE ARTICLE II When any part of the predicate of a sentence stands first in the I sentence (as in asking questions or for emphasis) the subject is put after the verb. This is called "the inverted order": as, 1. tt)0 ift $rit? Ijcttte? where is Fred to-day? 2. bo gcf)t cr in ben ©ortcn, there he goes into the garden. 3. ift Glifabctf) %Vi Jpaufe? is Elizabeth at home? 4. tttorgen fleljt fie ttott) £>cutfc, she is going home to-?norrow. Exercise 6, German into English 1. ©eftcrn roar ber $torgen fait unb ber ?(6enb inarm. 2. 28ar 2 e£ geftern nidjt warm in ber ©cljitte? 3. 3a, in ber ©crjute tear e3 lietf]. 4. 33o roaren ^ater unb gri| geftern abenb? 3m Sweater? 5. Sftein, im Sweater roaren fie nicrjt, fonbern in ber ®ircr)e. 6. 5(6er Ejeute ift es> fait, unb fie geljen 1 nidjt in bie £ird)e. 7« ©efjen 1 fie morgen tn§ heater? 8. 9cein f morgen gerjen 1 fie nictjt in3 Sweater, fie gerjen fritt) nad) <§>aufe. 9. 3ft (Slifabett) tjeute in ber (Sdjule? 10. 9cein, rjeute gel)t fie mit SSilfjelm nad) ber £irdje. 11. ©er)t gri| nidjt in bie 6dju(e? 12. 3a, er getjt in bie ©crjule, unb morgen bin 1 id) aud) (also) in ber ©djute. Exercise 7, English into German 13. Was it warm at church yesterday morning? 14. Yes, 3 the church was warm. 15. Marie was at church, and she was not cold. 16. Last night it was cold, but Elizabeth was with father at the theater. 17. Were William and Elizabeth at school to-day? 18. William was at school, but Elizabeth was at home. 19. The winter is cold, but the schoolhouse is small and warm. 20. There is Mary; she is going with mother toward the garden. 21. Is Fred in the garden? 22. No, he is with Elizabeth in the carriage; he is going home. 1 The present is often used for the future. Cf. "We sail to-morrow." 12 A GERMAN GRAMMAR V. THE PRESENT INDICATIVE OF WEAK VERBS I 3d) f age, / say, I do say, or / am saying: say open answer have id) jngc I say, etc. offne anfroovtc f)cibe t bu fagft. //W sayest, etc. offneft ant'ttjorteft m KOft er fagt /^ j-^yj, etc. offnef ant'movtct hat // say, etc. bffnett ant 'm mien da ben en When the endings ft and t are not easily pronounced with the preced- ing letters, the connecting vowel c is generally retained: as, bfftieft. In a subordinate clause the verb is put at the end of the clause. This is called "the transposed order." A subordinate clause is separated from the rest of the sentence by a comma : as, 1. cr frnflt, Juu 3ic n,cftcru iuarcn, he asks where you were yesterday. 2. id) fane, baf; cr l)icr rooiwt, / say that lie lives here} Vocabulary ct'roav (colloquially, tva*), some- IjBrcn, hear thing; ttidjtS, notJiing Icrncu, learn bat? Jycucr, the fire lichen, love, like fragen, ask a question : fragen nadi, marficit, make: toa$ mad)cn 3ic? with i)., ash after, ask for what are you doing? bov Jyrnulcut, the young lady ffitfjen, seek, look for btc dJeograpf)ic / r the geography uon, prep, with D., from, of ber £»crr, the lord, the gentleman: niaiut, when? jefet, now (fQCVT) Xohor 3d)mibt, Doctor ber 2Bittb, the wind Smith Wof)n en, dwell, live 1 \Vhen ban, that, is omitted, the verb in the subordinate clause is in its usual place (after its subject): as, id) fage, -er toofjnt fjter, I say he lives here. THE INDICATIVE M I 3 The present indicative (commonly with fdion, already) is i often used like the English perfect to denote that an action or a state previously begun is still going on: as, i. Wofjncn Sic fcffon (ange f)tcr? have you been living here long? 2. jo, id) bin f djrrn langc l)icr, yes, I have been here a long time. Exercise 8, German into English i. gtf) fibre ntdjts bott %x% tucts bbrft bit, dearie? 2. 2Ba^ 2 fragft bu, (Hifabetf)? 3. 3d) frage, toa£ bit boit grit) fjorft 4. s -l>on grtli mdjfco, aber id) ()bre may Hon graideut {Miss) Sdjmibt, fie imb «£>err 2)oftor ©djmibt ftitb ba. 5. grits tft franf §u ^oaufe r er gefit ntdjt in bie Sdjule. 6. 2Ba3 fagft bit, dearie? 7. 3d) fage, gri^ tft Iran! 511 ©catfe unb gefit ntdjt in bie ©djute. 8. 28a3 mad)t ©lifabetfi jefet? Sernt fie fictile toa<§? 9. 3a, granletn ©dfimibt, id) terne jejt ©eoarapfiie. 10. |)ter tft Softer Sdjmibt! (Sndjen ©te toas, ©err SDoftor? 11. Dcein, icfi fudje ntdjtS. 12. gragt grig nad) Gdifabetfi? 13. Dcetn, er fragt ntdjt nad) (Sftfabetfi, fonbern nad) 93krte. 14. SBtft bn $>a, dJlaxit? Ste anttnortet mdfit 15. £a gefit fie in ben ©arten, fie fud)t $ater, a6er er ift nidjt ^n gaufe. gorft bn ben SBinb ? Exercise 9, English into German 16. I hear something; do you hear nothing, Doctor Smith? 3 17. Yes, you hear the fire and the wind. 18. Where is Miss Smith to-day, and what is she doing? 19. What does Mary ask? 20. She asks where Miss Smith is to-day and what she is doing. 21. But Doctor Smith does not answer. 22. What are you looking for, Marie? 23. I am looking for the geog- raphy. 24. Here it is; I have it. 25. Are you learning some- thing to-day, Marie? 26. What do you say, Doctor? 27. I ask what Mary is learning to-day. 28. She is learning geography. 29. There go father and mother into the garden. H A GERMAN GRAMMAR VI. THE PAST INDICATIVE OF WEAK VERBS The past indicative of weak verbs is formed by adding it or etc to the stem (like d and ed in English) : as, sent Infinitive Past Indicative jag-en (stem fag) fag-te say off'n-en (stem off n) offn-ete open ant'roort-en (stem anttoort) ant'ioort-ete answer fjab-en (stem I) 6b) tHlt-tc (for l)ab-tc) have ta'bel-n (stem tabcf ; 20 2 ) ta'bcl-tc blame tuan'ber-n (stem toanbcr ; id 1 ) roan'ber-te wander The past indicative is used to express the continuance or the repetition of an action or a state in past time, and is the tense of narration or of description : as, irf) fngtc, / was saying, I did say, or / said: kb ffigte Bffnete ant'iiKHtete battc r)te bit fagteft offuctcft mu'iiuntcteft tnlttcft (Cttft er ffigte Bffncte ant'nuntctc ttfttc c U loir [agten offneten ant'iuortctcn belt ten s(e)te« i bi- [agtet Bffnetet nnt'iuovtctct lulttct a, we were there our The indirect object is generally expressed by the dative without a preposition, and precedes the direct object; but if the two objects are pronouns, or refer to persons, the accusative generally precedes the dative : as, 1. id) frijirfc iljm bit* 83ttd), I am sending him the book. 2. id) fffjufe cs il)in, I am sending it to him. 3. id) frliirfc il)it yt Gutter, I am sending him to mother. Vocabulary bct r prep, with d.. at. near, with, at fiiftrctt, fiifjrtc, lead the house of: bcim = bci bem burftcn, biirftete, impersonal : c5 biirftet mid), I am thirsty (17 1 ) frciiCH, frcutc, with a., piease bcr fttrifcr, the emperor fdjoncu, fd)5ittc, with g. or a., spare fefjr, very, very much rjcigcit, rjcigtc, show THE PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS *7 (£<§, it, is often used to introduce a sentence, the verb of i which agrees with the predicate nominative ; but used with another personal pronoun, e3 stands in the predicate : as, i. c§ War ciumat cut Siihttfl, there was once a king. 2. c§ ttmrcu ciumat jttiei JRfiitficr, there were once two robbers. 3. Sic jiub e3, it is you; finb Sic C§ ? is it you ? Exercise 12, German into English 1. 3ft ba$ {that) $cmS ba tm ^ao,m? 2. Dtein, e3 tft nicf)t 2 £an3. 3. Sift bit eS ntc^t, err Stofc tor, finb @te nid)t and) tjtmgrig? i5- 3a f mid) rjitngcrt unb bur* ftct. 1 16. gier tft SBrot, ftafe nnb ftaffee; e3 fre'ut mid) fei)r, baj] @ie fjier finb. Exercise 13, English into German 17. You and she were (S)u nnb fie, ttjr mart) at my house. 3 18. Yes, and you and I were at his house. 19. Did you show him the garden ? 20. I showed it to him, and led him into the house. 21. The emperor himself was at our house yesterday morning. 22. We showed him the house and the garden. 23. It pleased us very much that he was here. 24. Are you hungry, .Anna ? 25. No, I am not hungry, but I am very thirsty. 26. Are Fred and Marie at your house to-day, Anna ? 27. Yes, they are here ; it is they in the garden. *In common impersonal verb phrases like e§ fyimcjert mid), I am hungry, the subject (e§) is generally omitted when the inverted order is used (11, 1): as, mid) Ijungevt, I am hungry. 18 A GERMAN GRAMMAR VIII. THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS AND REFLEXIVE VERBS myself yourself himself herse Y itself G. D. A. metuer uttr mid) of myself to ox for myself myself bcincr blr bid) fciucr tfjrcr fid) fid) fid) fid) fciucr fid, fid) G. D. A. uufcr unl uu3 of ourselves to or for ourselves ourselves cucr ^lircr cud) fid) cud) fid) Ujrcr Hirer fid) fid) fid) fid) tfjrcr fid) fid) Review 16, i, 2, and 6, 2. In the plural the reflexive pronouns often mean each other, but, to avoid ambiguity, the uninflected reciprocal pro- noun ciunu'bcr may be used instead : as, fie liebcu fid) (or ciuaubcr,, they lore each other. Many verbs may be used with reflexive pronouns to form idiomatic phrases, and are then called reflexive verbs: as, id) fdjiimc mid), / am ashamed; id) frfjnnttc mid), / ned: id) kliamc mid) idi fd)amtc in idi t>n idiam ft bid) bfi id)5 111 tc ft bid) ev [djffmt lid) ev jdidmtc fid) tutt fdiamcn unS WW idiam ten uii§ ttn- ichaiiit Clldl itiv iditimtct cud) iic fdiamcn iid) fie fdiamtCtt fid) 8ic fdiamctt fid) 3ic fdiamtcn fid)' Vocabulary ait f prep, with d. or a., on (beside), at: am= du bem, au*= a\i i>a$ auf, prep, with d. or a., on (upon; bdo ^enfter, the window bcr lifd), the table fid) crtiil'tcu, catch cold fid) frcucn, be glad, be pleased fid) fiirdjtcu, be afraid fid) irrcu, be mistaken fid) fefieu, sit down (seat yourself) fiber, prep, with d. or a., over Dor, prep, with d. or A., before THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS, ETC. 1 9 Some reflexive verb phrases are followed either by the geni- tive without a preposition, or by the dative or the accusative with a preposition : as, i. id) frfjfimc mid) betncr, I am ashamed of you. 2. tdj fdjeime mid) itber ctttm3, I am ashamed of something (the accusa- tive with ii&er, because ctroc3 has no genitive ending). 3. id) fiird)te mid) uor 3'fjnen, / am afraid of you. Exercise 14, German into English 1. 3d) unb ytnna (ieben un3 (or einanber), SOcarte unb ©lifa* betr) (teben fict) (or einanber). 2. 9Iber bit unb SSiftjetm, liebt ifjr end) (or etnanber)? 3- Set, unb totr arbeiten, aber §anS unb grig arbeiten ntdjt unb freuen fid) baruber. 1 4. Scrjcimft bit bid) ttjrer, Stutter? 5- 9xetn, 2(nna, id) fdjame mid) attest tfyrer, fonbern meiner fel&ft. 6. gitrcrjten ©te fid) Dor §an3, graufein ? 7. 9 can, id) fi'trcfjte mid) nicfjt t)or ifym. 2 8. 23o tft $ater? 8e§t er fid) bor bag geuer ? 2 9- St raar am genfter, 2 jegt aber fegt er fid) an ben £tfdj. 10. ^rrft bu btcr) nictjt ? 2$tlr)elm fegt fid) auf bm Xtfcfj, aber $ater tft ant geuer. 2 11. greuft bu bid) itber ba$ S3ud) f 9Jcarie? 12. ^cfj freue mid) fefjr baruber. 1 Exercise 15, English into German 13. You are mistaken, Fred. 14. Yes, I am mistaken ; they love each other. 15. Was she not afraid of him ? 16. She was afraid of him. 17. But now she is not afraid of him. 18. Were you ashamed of him ? 19. Yes, I was ashamed of him and of her. 20. They do not work and they are not ashamed of it (baruber). 21. Where are father and mother? Are they catching cold ? 22. They sat down at the fire, but now mother is working at the window. 1 barU'ber over it, at it. 2 The dative with a preposition generally expresses the place where ox from which ; the accusative, the place whither. 20 A GERMAN GRAMMAR IX. ^eitt, (gilt, AND THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES I ®etrt, em, and the possessive adjectives are inflected like btcfer • (8, 2), except that the nominative singular masculine and neu- ter and the accusative singular neuter have no case endings, and are called defective : l Masculine Feminine Neuter N. fein fcinc fein 720 Singular G. D. feincc* fcincm fcincr fcincr fcinctf fcincm of no to ox for no A. feincit fcuic fein no N. feme fcinc fcinc no Plural G. fcincr fcincr fcincr of no D. feinen fcinc it fcincn to ox for no A. fcinc fcinc fcinc no 2 When the meaning is clear, the definite article (10, 1) is often used instead of a possessive adjective, and is sometimes accompanied by the dative of the person affected : as, i . 3tc brcdicit nttr t>cn Stmt, you arc breaking my arm. Vocabulary fein, fcinc, fctn, no 1 cut, cine, cut, a, an (no plural) 1 mciu, mcinc, incut, my 1 bctn, bcinc, t>ciu, t/hy, your, in familiar address to one person 1 fctn, fcinc, fctn, his, its 1 tf)r, tfire, tfjr, Jicr 1 unfer, nnfrc,- unfer, our 1 ener, enre, 2 ener, your, in familiar address to two or more persons 1 thr, II) re, tf)r, their* ^Ijr, ^sl)rc, ^sl)r, your, in formal address to two or more persons or to one person 1 bcr ^yrcunb, the friend baz 3i mmcr r the room 1 -Hcin, ein, etc. are inflected alike and may be called fetn-words (cf. io 1 ) - When a stem ends in el, en, or er, the e of the ending is commonly dropped if possible ; otherwise, the e of the stem : as, unierm, cuern, imfre. THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES 21 Exercise 16, German into English i. 2Bar 3 live £odjter Metric geftera gu §aufe? 2. jftetn, fie tear bei ifjrer 3dju>cfter 9(nua. 3- 3lber vjeute ift fie 511 .sSauje, unb ilyre 2cl)iuefter ift bet ilir. 4. SSann gefjt itire ©tfjtoeftet 2(nna nad) §aufe? 5- 9)taric, fragc 1 betne 3d)iuefter 2(nna, to cum fie nad) £)aufe gefjt! 6. 5ie gef)t morgen ntit meinem 23ruber nad) §aufe. 7- 3ft t()r SBruber &1110 in ber Srfntle? 8. 3a, er ift in ber Sdjule mit feiner 2diraefter (Eiifabeti). 9. Ito fer §an<§ ift ftein, bod) {still) (ernt er tt>a3 in ber Sdinle. 10. crr £)oftor, e3 gef)t ifjr beffcr. 3- 3ie fint am gener unb trin ft i)cildj. 4. ?(ber gefterrt gtng e£ ifjr mcrjt gut. 5- ©eftent morgen gtng mem SBruber SBUrjelm nad) ber &trd)e. 6. ^or ber Sltrdje faub er fetnett greimb Star! ©dmubt. 7- Star! fragte SSt(()elm: „2$ann fommt $ater nacl) §aufe?" 8. 2£ilrjefm ant* tuortcte: „(St fommt ntdjt Iieute, fonbern morgen abenb." 9. 23tl* |elm fiitjrte Star! in jeucu ©arten uub fprang iu ben gtug. 10. SOcetne Gutter faf] am genfter, §err £)oftor, uub fitrdjtete fid) fef)i\ 11. ©ie je^te ftcfj an ben Siftf) uub fcfjried ifyrem ^ater etnen 23rtef. 12. 2(6er SBtlrjelm uub $arl olteben ntcfjt lange ba, fonbern fdjlidjen in3 $)av&. i3« 3d) ging tn<§ ,3ims mer uub fanb Gutter fefir franf. 14. 3d) Mteb lange bet if)r. 15- 3d) bletbe (n 1 ) rjeute, grduletn; gerjen ©te (21 2 ) 511 3fyrer (Sdjmefter ! 16. 2)a lommt metn timber 2Bt(f)elm. 17- 2SUrje(m, bletbe (21 1 ) fjeute bet Gutter ! 3d) gelje ju ©djtoefter tota. Exercise 19, English into German 18. William, what is your friend's name ? 19. His name is Charles. 20. How is he to-day ? 21. He is well, Miss Smith. 22. Did he stay at your house last night ? 23. Yes, he was here last night, and he stays at our house to-day. 24. Yester- day he went into the garden and sprang into the river. 25. He found the water cold. 26. He did not remain there long, but crept into my room. 27. Did he write his sister a letter ? 28. No, he sat at the fire a long time, but he wrote her no letter. 29. When is he going to his sister's? 30. To- night; and he stays at her house till to-morrow. 31. There sits Charles in the garden. 32. Charles, stay (21 1 ) with me to-day ; Miss Smith is going home. 24 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XI. THE PRESENT AND TEE PAST INDICATIVE OF 3Sctbctt Pre sent (12, i) Past (14, 2) id) toerbe / become, etc. id) luiirbC / became, etc. bfl tDtrft //ww becomest, etc. bfi iDurbcft //W becamest, etc. er ttrirb /^ becomes, etc. er luurbc /^ became, etc. lutr ttJerbett 2£>/0« become, etc. 2ic ltutvbCtt j/0# became, etc. 2 In the present indicative the stem vowel c is changed to i in the second and third persons singular (as in some other strong verbs, 72, 3). In the second person singular b is dropped, and in the third person there is no personal ending. 3 The past indicative is formed by changing the stem vowel (22, 1) and adding the personal ending c (cf. 22, 3). In the singular the forms id) nmvb, bfi Wiirbft, er uinrb are now poetic ; but in compound forms they occur sometimes in prose : as, bcr finite ftarb uub nmrb begra'ben, the poor ma J! died and was buried. Vocabulary ttl§, when, introducing a subordi- nate clause (12,3) expressing a single act in past time mcitit, whenever^ introducing a sub- ordinate clause (12, 3) expressing repeated action in any time ; if e\'cr. if bo* @t§, the ice frcunbltri), friendly MU'frcuublitf), unfriendly [against gegen, prep, with a., toward^ ^ofinun', John ntiibc, tired ; with G. or A., tired of tic 3acf)C, the tiling, the affair bcr 3d]ucc, the snow fri)5n f beautiful, pretty Weil, because, introducing a subor- dinate clause (12,3) bic $t>cft, the world merben, become, get : werben an*, become of; tuerben ,>>u, turn to ttJtcbcr, again THE IXDIC ATI VE MOOD 2$ Exercise 20, German into English 1. 3e|t if t e3 SBtnter, unb ikvo SSaffer nrirb gu Sdjttee nnb 311 Gic; ! 2. 3m SSinter, benn c$ fait mirb, gcljt es meinem SSater oie( {muck) 6effer. 3« SDtir felbft gefyt e3 beffer im Sommer, toenn t£ toieber fyetfj rotrb. 4- 5((y id) franf tear, iDitrbe bie SSelt 2 fait unb unframbltd) gegen mid). 5- 2)te SSelt uutrbc fait gegen bid), (iiifabetl), luctl bu unfreunb(id) gegen fie (it) marft. 6. SBcntt bu felbft freunbfid) gegen bie 28e(t roirft, mirb fie 1 arieber marm unb fdjon. 7- $fa3 bir nrirb nid)t3, menu bu unfreunbfid) unb fait btft. 8. SSurbe bein greunb Sotjann auct) {also) fait gegen bid), (Htfabetf) ? 9. (£r tourbe fef)r unfreunblid) gegen mid) unb bid). 10. ater Ijat ©ein^ nadj §aufe gu Gutter gefd)tdt. 14. Gsr f)atte nad) feiner EOcutter gefragt ! 15. 3a, er tjatte nad) tijr gefragt. 16. 3d) tjabe geanttuortet, baJ3 fie $u ©aufe bet 3f)nen tft. Exercise 23, English into German 17. Have you waited long for us ? 18. No, we have not waited long. 19. Did you knock on the window? 20. No, but Henry knocked at the door. 21. Did Henry have my book with him (bet fid)) ? 22. Yes ; he laid it on that table. 23. Who put this table at the door ? 24. I put it (ifjn) at the door, but I did not open the door. 25. Did you not play in the garden ? 26. We did not play ; I sent Harry home to his sister. 27. I sent him home because she had been asking for him. 28. He did not wait for his brother Charles. 1 baran', on it, at it. 28 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XIII. THE PERFECT AND THE PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE OF STRONG VERBS I The past participle of strong verbs is formed from the stem by prefixing gc (denoting completion) and adding cu, the stem vowel often being changed (as in English) : as, Present Infinitive Past Indicative Past Participle ftng-en (stem fmg) jong ge-fung'-en sing finb-en (stem finb) fa nb nc-iun'b-cn find jdncib-en (stem frfjrcib) idiricb nc-idnic'b-cn w?'ite trtnf-en (stem truth tvnnf ge-tntnf'-cn drink jlfe-en (stem \\\\, irregular) inn nc-ici'i -en sit fteij-(e)n (stem ftcl), irregular) it n nb gc-itmi'b-en stand Perfect Pluperfect ( 26, 2) id) lid be gefung'en icb badte gefung'en ba haft gefung'en bu hiittcft gefung'en Of bat gefung'en er lnittc gefung'en rofr babe it gefung'en 11UV batten gefung'en ibr habt gefung'en ibr battct gefung'en fie babe ll gefung'en [ie batten gefung'en 2ie baben gefung'en 5ie batten gefung'en Vocabulary Inffcit, ftefj, gelfiffcn, let. leave frillnfcu, friiltcf, gefdjlofen, sleep friilagcn, ftfjtug, flcirtilagcn, strike^ beat tragen, trftg, getragen, carry geben, gab, gegeben, give lefcit, la*, gclcfcu, read fcfjcit, fat), gefefjen, see beificn, btf? f gebiffen, bite bredjen, bratf), gebrdtfjcit, break bclfcn, ba(f, n^bolfcn, with d., help ttetjnten, iiafjm, flcnommcn (irregu- lar), take; with n., take from fprctfjen, iprad), gcfprorfien, speak tun, tat, gctan', irregular, do rcrfjt, right : rcd)t gut, very well bcr finger, the finger fcer .§unb, the dog ber Otiitg, the ring; me, never THE INDICATIVE MOOD 29 After verbs meaning take, the dative expresses the object 1 from which the person or the thing is taken : as, 1. Ijat cr Mr beinett fcnnb flcnommcu ? did he take your dog from you t 2. ja, cr f)at iljlt mir jicnommcn, yes, he took him from me. Exercise 24, German into English 1. Seirt ^ater ()at mid) in jeinem 3 ulimcr a ^' m getaffett. 2 2. .ftabcn 2ie gut gcjd)(afen? 3- 3d) banfe btr, id) l)abe red)t gnt gejdjlafen. 4. 23a3 f)aben aufe geetlt, toetf mir morgen 511 ibm gebjert. 12. 3d) unb meine (Scrjmcfter tjaben nie gereift, unb 33ruber gri£ §at ntd)t fcnel gereift. 13. Seib if)r ntdjt 511 euerm S3ruber gereift? 14. 2£ir finb nie §11 ibm ge- reift. 15. 333er ift an ber £itr? 3t)r 23ruber «&ait£? 3Bte ift er gcmadifen! 16. (Sr ift fetjr gemadjfen, ift aber bod) flein ; bieibe (2 1 1 ) bet un§, §amo! 17. ©eftent abenb, a (3 er im (Garten mar, tft er in§ SSaffer gefallen unb gefunfen. 18. 2)ein 23vuber mar tf)m gefotgt unb fyrang tnS SBaffer ibjtn ju |)t(fe (to his aid). Exercise 27, English into German 19. Where was your brother yesterday ? 20. He was at Anna's, but last night he came home. 21. He had never been at Anna's. 22. To-day he has been at home, but to-night he has gone to my brother's. 23. Did his friend go with him ? 24. Yes, he went with him. 25. Elizabeth did not go because she had become ill. 26. She has never traveled much ; she has never been at her brother's. 27. Yesterday she fell into the water and has become very ill. 28. She is in her room to-day, and father and mother have remained a long time with (bei) her. 29. They have now gone home with Charles. 30. He came yesterday and stayed until this morning. 32 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XV. THE FUTURE AND THE FUTURE PERFECT INDICATIVE The future of a verb is formed by adding its present infini- tive to the present indicative of lucrbcn ; the future perfect, by- adding its perfect infinitive : as, Future Indicative Future Perfect Indicative id) trjerbe ftigcit id) trjerbe gcfngr' fjabcn (26, 2) say id) toerbe 1) alien idi ttjcrbe ncljalif fjalicn " have id) trjerbe fingett idi tDcrbe gcfuttg'cn IjfiOcn " sing id) tcerbe fcin idi tuerbe gcmcfcn fcin (30, 1) be idi roerbe wcrbcn id) tnerbe gcwor'bcn fcin " become idi toerbe fiitfen idi tnerbe gcfnnf'cn fcin " sink 2 ^\d) toerbe jiiflcn, / shall say or I shall be saying; id) uierbe (tcjltufcit fcin, / shall have sunk or I shall have been sinking: Future Future Perfect id) tnerbe [agen id) tuerbe gefunFen join bu llHl'ft [agen bu luirft gefunFen fcin er tntrb [agen er tirirb gefunFen fcin tr»tr ttjerbctt [agen toil tuerbcti gefunfen fcin tl)V toerbet [agen i Di- merbet gefunfen fcin lie luevbcn [agen iic roerben gefunfen fcin 3ic luevbcn iaoicn 5tc roerben gefunfen fcin Vocabulary ornuriicn, urnutfitc, gcbraurfit, need glnnbcu, glnubtc, gcglnttbr, believe faufen, fnnftc, gefauff, buy ladicn, hidjtc, gelrtcf)t, laugh : (adjen fiber, with a., laugh at lad)cln, tad)cltc, gctacficlr, smile: ladjcln fiber, with a., smile at fmtfett, lief, ift gefnufen, run balb, soon j bod), still \ surely ', 1 hope )o, soy often used to sum up a clause, and then not to be trans- lated tobi\i, perhaps, probably, I suppose ttJoru'bcr, over what? at what t THE INDICA TIVE MOOD 3 3 The future is often used to express a supposition or a prob- I ability in present time ; the future perfect, in past time. Em- phasis is given by adding U)of)( or bocf) : as, i. bic3 Joirb tt)of)( bctn 2>ruber fctit, I suppose this is you?- brother. 2. cr roirb bit* Qau§ botf) gcfauft (jaf«cit r he has surely bought the house, I hope he has bought the house. Exercise 28, German into English 1. 3d) toerbe unfertt greimb Rati halo fefjen, oraudjt er etn)a§? 2 2. SEcmn roerben ©ie il)it fefjen? 3- SJtorgert abenb; loirb er morgen fritf) 511 3f)tten fommen ? 28orii6er latfjett @ie ? 4- ftfcer Sic! Unfer gretmb tft }e§t jcrjort bet rair! 5. <£ie toerben i()ii bod) nicrjt gefcfjen fjaben! 6. Satoof)!, unb roemt totr ntdjt ins Ii beater gerjen, fo ratrb er itber un§ ladjen. 7. 3d) toerbe mid) fdjdmen, toenn er itber mid) (ad)t. 8. SBerben ©ie [id) Dor ifjm fitrdjten? 9. 9cetn, unb id) toerbe ntdjt gtauben, baf$ er itber mid) tad)en totrb. 10. SOcetne 6d)toefter totrb and) fjeute abenb fjter fein, fie tft geftem nad) §aufe gefafjren. 11. SSernt fie fjeute tm§ Xrjeater gef)t, fo toirb fie fefjr mitbe toerben. 12. 3d) gtaube, fie toirb gu §aufe btetben. Exercise 29, English into German 13. Shall you see my father ? 14. Yes, and my brother 3 will see him. 15. Will Charles laugh at me if I stay at home ? 16. I do not believe he will laugh at you. 17. When will your brother come home ? 18. He will drive home to-morrow night. 19. If we go into the garden, we shall find mother. 20. If she stays in the garden, she will catch cold. 21. When will she go to your brother's ? 22. She will go to-night, and I shall go with her. 23. I suppose this is your mother. 24. Yes, it is she (17, 1). 25. Mother, you will catch cold if you stay here. 26. If you catch cold, you will become ill. 34 A GERM A A' GRAMMAR XVI. NOUNS: CLASS I, STRONG (152, 1, 154, 155) Masculine : Most nouns ending in unaccented el, en, cr ; ber $dfe, cheese. Feminine: bie Gutter, mother, bic Sodjtcr, daughter. Neuter: Some nouns ending in unaccented el, en (includ- ing all infinitives used as nouns), er ; all diminutive nouns end- ing in djcn, fcin ; most nouns of the form ®c — c. In the plural, a, 0, u are modified (3, 2) in bie flutter, bie Xodjtcr, W JUdftcr, and about twenty masculines (155. 3). Feminine nouns of all classes remain unchanged in the singular ; in the dative plural all nouns end in it. this wagon the mother the painting tin )M))1C b icier SBagen bic SKuttcr bntf ©emcU'be bcr 92&me(n) x bieictf 2Bagen3 bcr SKutter bcc< ©emat'beS bed SRamenS bieicm SBagen bcr abutter bent ©emsl'be bem 92 amen biefeti SSagen Die 2Kuttet Dac< ©emaTbe bCU teamen biefe 2Sagen bic 2Riittet bic ©emal'be bic v Ji aincit biefe* SSagen bcr aJKittcr bcr ©emal'be bcr ^1 a 111 en biefeti SSagert ben 3Riitterti ben ©emal'betl bClt Xiamen biefe SBagen bic v J3i ii iter bic ©emaTbe bic Dtfamen bet Wiener bie Xtcncr servant bie Xorfitcr bie Xorf)tcr daughter ber .cncn heart ber Cfcn bie Cfcn stove bSe ^teffer Die 3Reffer knife ber Sgfiter Die i>Stcr father bag better bie ^Setter weather ber $oge( bie 33ogel bird !The nominative without n is preferable (155, 4). 2 Irregular in the singular: Dae £er,, bee £er$ene, bem fcerjen, bae $er$i tfOUNS: CLASS /, STRONG 35 Exercise 30, German into English 1. gct&ett Sic Starts Dnfel gefefjen? Gsr teat im (SJarten mit i unferm Sefjrer unb nnfern Q3riibern. 2. §8on ben genftern meine3 Qimmer ten? 8. 3cmjof)l, ba$ §erg flopft mtr, menn id) fie Ijore. 9. SSenn @te mit mir in ben (Garten getyen, fo roerben roir bie SSijgel fefjen. 10. SSir roerben and) 5lpfe( finben. 11. £ner finb bie Spfel in §aufen, fyaben (Sie ein Sfteffer bet fid) ? 12. 3d) f)a6e ()ente fein SD^effer bd mtr, meine iDceffer finb in mcinem dimmer. 13. 9?ef)tnen @ie mein SD^effer ! 14. SDtefe Spfel finb fcfjim ! 15- 23ir fjaben feme $lpfel ^n §aufe unb feinen (Partem 16. £>, rote fdjon tft ber Hftorgen ! 3Bie fcfjim fingen bie $#gel ! Exercise 31, English into German 17. I did not see William's teacher yesterday, and I shall 2 not see him. 18. Who is his teacher? 19. My uncle John; he is the brother of my mother. 20. There he is in the car- riage with my father. 21. Did you hear the birds this morn- ing ? 22. I opened my window, but I did not hear them. 23. You will hear them to-morrow morning if the weather is fine (fd)on). 24. Here is the servant with apples ; here is a knife. 25. Have you seen the paintings in the cloister ? 26. Yes indeed, the paintings are old and very beautiful. 27. How small the rooms of this cloister are ! 28. They are small and cold, they have no stoves. 29. How beautiful the windows are ! Inflect "my window," "his daughter," "your cloister," "your gar- 3 den," " our brother," " her bird," " their heart," and " his knife." 36 A GERMANY GRAMMAR XVII. NOUNS: CLASS II, STRONG (152,1, 154, 156) Masculine : Most nouns of one syllable ; all nouns ending in id), tg, ling; many nouns, mostly of foreign origin, ending in l r it, x f t r and accented on the last syllable. Feminine: About 35 nouns of one syllable; all nouns end- ing in funft ; some nouns ending in ttUf, jrtl. Neuter : About 60 nouns of one syllable ; most nouns end- ing in nig, fal ; many nouns of foreign origin (not denoting persons), ending in 1, n, r, t, and accented on the last syllable. Most nouns of one syllable have a, o r it, nil modified in the plural : if masculine, generally; 1 if feminine, always; if neuter, almost never. 2 this tree the hand the year the secret btefet SBaum bie .\>anb \m ?\aliv briS ®e$eim'niS biefeS SBaumeS bet .\>anD iCC a live 3 ccv? ©eljeim'nifj e3 a bid" cm SBautnC Dcr Manb bent ^alnc Dent O'ctieim'uiiic biefen SBaum Die .\>anb Dn* r\aliv ba$ (tfclicim'ni* biefc SBaume Me MiinDC Die a live Die ©etjeim'niffe Dicier SBaumc bet .\>anDc Dcr a tire Dcr Oktieim'niijc Mejctt SBaumen Den .s>anDcn Den 3 aincn Den '^ciicini'iiiiicn biefe SBaume Die MaitDC Die 3 a live Die (^etieim'niue Vocabulary mountain Die flnrfjt bie ^arfjtc night foot Die 3tdM Die 3tdbtc city, town son Do* Scin Die Petite leg arm b&§ v 4>dar bie SjSaare pair shoe bg§ ^fcrb Die s ^fcrbc horse day b23 Iter bie Xicrc animal month b53 2Bort bie s £>ortc word bev $crfl Die Gertie Dcr Jyftf? Die 7v it f^ c Dcr 3otm bie 3ot)uc ber Slrm Die Shrine 1 ber 3d)ftf) bie Sc^iifjc 1 bev Ian bie icuic 1 bev Wnat bie TO'nate month 1 3lrntC, £imbc, 3cfiuhe, Jage, and some others are not modified (156,3). 2 ba§ (or ber) gfl5fj, raft. Die jvioi?e: Dae 33oor, Jarf; Die £oore or Sote (3,2). 3 Before case endings the g of ni? is doubled. NOUNS: CLASS If, STRONG 37 The accusative is used to express the extent of time or of i space : as, i. btcfcn 9)ioitat hicibt cr Ijicr, this month he will remain here. 2. cr ift cinen Slop] grufjer, he is a head taller. Exercise 32, German into English 1. £a ift Der ©ot)n 5f)re3 greihtbeS, fefjett Ste if) it ! 2. (£t 2 Iiat fctncn |ntt unb feme ©djufje. 3. SSenn bic Saume grim fittb unb bie 9cad)te inarm, toofmt er tmter {among) ben Steven ouf bent Serge. 4. 5l6er tm SSutfer btetbt er bet meinent Solme. 5. ©etne Irate unb Seine ftnb nod) fe£)r fc£)rrjacr) f auf bent Serge tturb c3 tfjm tnof)l beffer gefjen. 6. £ontmen ©te nut nttr nad) ber (Btabtl SSir roerben fet)en, tua3 er ba tun ftrirb. 7- SSerben ie t()m etnja^ in ber ©tabt faufen ? 8. Gsr ge()t oft (often) nad) ber @tabt r rjat a6er fein s $ferb unb leine ©d)ul)e, id) toerbe t()in em ^aar ©cljtdje (of shoes) faufen. 9. Sfyre SSorte ftnb fefyr freunb(td), and) id) luerbe ib,m etmaS faufen. 10. ©tefen 9)conat roobmt er t)ier auf bent Serge. 11. (£r roirb biefen SSm* tcr in ber ©tabt bleiben, tuo er in bie ©d)ule gef)t. 12. ®ein Sater unb feme Gutter ftnb gut gegen tbm, a6er toed fie fo arm (poor) ftnb, l)e(fen fie if)ren ©ofmen ntd)t biel Exercise 33, English into German 13. Have you seen the sons of my friend ? They are very 3 poor. 14. I saw them yesterday morning among the horses and the animals on the mountains. 15. This summer they will live on the mountains. 16. But to-day they have gone to town. 17. The hands and feet of this son are very small. 18. Has he no shoes ? 19. No, he has no shoes, but the days are warm. 20. Will the sons stay here this winter? Inflect "which day," "no animal," " your word," " my horse," "my 4 shoe," " which horse," "your city," " his son," and " our mountain." 3° A GERMAN GRAMMAR XVIII. NOUNS: CLASS III, STRONG (152, i, 154, 158) Masculine: 8 nouns of one syllable; ber 3> r rtu"m, mistake, ber 9icidjrlim, riches. Neuter: About 60 nouns mostly of one syllable; almost all nouns ending in titm. All nouns have -a, 0, it, ait modified in the plural. this man the error the house the antiquity bicicr 9Jlann ber ^rv'tfun ba# iga u3 bad SH'tertfitn bicfcS SKanneS be$ Srr'tiimS bSS .\>auic3 be3 Sn'tertfimS bieicm SRarme bem ^rr'tfun bem Manic bem Sl'tertfim biefeti jilftcmn ben ^rr'tiim bntf £au3 batf SU'tertftm bicfe Wanner bie 3vr' turner bie Lanier bie SU'tcrtflmcr Meier Wanner ber ow'tfiincr ber Mauier ber SH'tertfimet bieicn Wannern ben ^iTtuinern ben Mauicru ben Wtestfimem bieje Wanner Me oir'tmncr bie .\>auier bie 2U'terrfimc* Vocabulary ber ©ctfi bie OJcifter spirit ber Mcinb bie ffiaitbcr edge ber (Stott bie ©otter god ber 9Sa(b bie {tftilbcr forest ber Scib bie Better body ber SSurtn bie SB&rttter worm ber SRattn bie SRamter man ber ^srrtunt bie ^rrtfuuer error ber Crt bie Drier place ber JHctdjtum bie J}ictd)tumcr wealth bffS 8iU> bie Silber picture bra 5Ucib bie JUctbcr dress bo's ©urfj bie $urf|er book bra L'aub bie fianber land ba> Tncii bie Tiirfjcr roof bra I'idjt bie Stdjtcr light ba§ ^orf bie S)5rfer village bra SJicb bie £icber song bra ei bie Gtcr e gg bra 3d)(o£ bie 3d)lui;cr castle bra $cU> bie gfelber field bff§ Srfiiocrt bie 3rf)roertcr sword bra ©elb bie Ctfctbcr money bra %a\ bie Safer valley bra ©cftrfjt' bie ©cfirfi'tcr face bra $otf bie mtttt people bra ©fa3 bie GHtifcr glass bra SScto bie 29et6cr woman bra Siutb bie fiinber child bff§ SBort bie Shorter word 1 1 ^Sorter = words (singly); 2$ >orte (36, 4) = words (connected). NOUNS: CLASS III, STRONG 39 When the article bcr limits a noun followed by an explana- i tory genitive, clause, or phrase, it is accented (demonstrative) and should not be contracted with a preposition (cf. 10, 2): as, 1. in ba3 (not in§) £ait3 mciucr 9)httter, into the house of my mother. 2. on bent (not am) Xage, ai§ cr ftarb, on the day that he died. 3. in bent (not tm) 2Uter toon 50 Safjren, at the age of fifty years. Exercise 34, German into English 1. @otte3 ©eift ift an jebem Orte, uoit bent £ei6e be3 Cannes 2 bi3 gu bent SSurme an bem 9fonbe beg 2Balbe§. 2. 9M_unen ©ie Sfyre $M)er imb lernen <5ie biefe Sorter ! 3- ®ann tuerben nnr auf bie gelber gefjen. 4. ©ef)en t\\ ftebetn ben tto'niginncn biefe Joven bie ^ungett Die ac Do in bie too'niginncn Vocabulary hero bet ft italic bie ftnabcu boy master 4 bCV &5tt)C bie Sitirocn lion man 5 ber JHicfc bie JHicfcn giant prince ber 3H6oc bie 3flaueu slave fool bet 3olbar' Die 3otba'tcn soldier woman 6 bie $fumc bie Stiimcn flower battle bie (Irbe bie (*rben ea?'th forehead bie JRcife bie 9ictfctt jourtiey deed bie Strafe bie Strain street time bie Stunbc bie Stuubcn hour bet £>clb bie -ftclbcn bet crr 3 bie .'pcrrcu bet SDZenfdj bie Sftciifdjcn bet %x\\\is bie ^rinjen bet Sor bie Xorcit bie gfrem bie Jyroucn bie 3ti)Ind)t bie 3rf)tarf)tcu battle bie 3ttrttic) bie Sttntcn bie errrt mil feiner grau. 7» 3#) fpracf) mtt bem §errn Don bem 2)orfe im ^ta(e. 8. £ie @efid)ter unb bie ©tirnen ber banner unb granen in biefcm Sorfe finb fefjr fdjon. 9. £)ie banner fjaben leiue 8f(anen unb arbettcn fetbft auf ben gelbern. 10. Unb bie grauen madjen leine Sfteife nad) ber (Btabt 11. 3Benn e£ 3(6enb nnrb, figen fie in if)ren §aufern unb lefen unb fpredjen bon ben Sd)(ad)ten unb ben %aten ber «&elben. 12. 2)iefe£ £af fjeiftt , f £oiuenta(,'' ba$ Xat ber Sbtoen. 13. 3)ie Scanner Ijei^en ^inuenfjeqen," toeil fie §eqen tote {such as) bie Soften fjaben. Exercise 37, English into German 14. Have you seen the valley of the lions ? 15. We shall 2 make a journey into this valley. 16. The men and boys work in the fields, and the women remain at home. 17. You will see these heroes and talk with them. 18. The men are the lords of the earth. 19. If you have time, we shall read of the deeds of these men. 20. And you will see their fields and their flowers. 21. The women are beautiful, and are the queens of the earth. 22. And the men of the valley have the heart of a lion. Inflect "our soldier," "no fool/' "which slave," "his deed," "his 3 master," " no woman," "which flower," " your boy," and " our street." 1 In auf (Sl'ben and sometimes in poetry the old ending (e)n (c, D., A.) is seen. 42 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XX. NOUNS: CLASS V, MIXED (152,1, 154, 162) Masculine : A few irregular nouns ; almost all nouns of foreign origin ending in or. Neuter : A few irregular nouns ; some nouns of foreign origin ending in I, m. In this class the singular is strong and the plural weak (1^2, 1). this peasant the state the doctor the museum bicfcr SBauer bcr Stoat bcr % of tor ba$ s Khtje'um bicic3 SBauerS bc$ ©taateS bec* Tof'tovS be$ Sftuje'umS bicjcm Salter bcm 2taatc bcm 3)oFtor bcm 3Jlufe'mn biefett SBauer ben Staat ben T of 'tor ba$ s Hcuje'um bicic 89auertt bic Staatcn bic ToftS'rcn bic SDhife'en 1 bicfcr SBauerti bcr Staaten bcr Tofto'rcn bcr SDhije'en btefen SBauern ben Staaten ben Tofto'rcn ben 9Kufe 7 e« biefe SBauero bic Staaten bic Tofto'vcn bic SKufe'en Vocabulary bcr Winter bH§ Matters 2 bic ^aucrn peasant ber Wndibnr bee Warfiunr* 3 bic 9latf)baxn neighbor bet Sdjmcrj oB Srf) merges bic Srfjmcr^cn Pain ber Sec bl§ 3cce bie 3ccn lake ber 3traf)l beg 3traf)(c* bic 3traf)lcn ray ber better bgg $ctter£ bie 3>crtcrn cousin ber £of tor be§ ^of'tor* bic Xofto'rcn doctor bff§ Sluge beg 2fa0e3 bie 3(ugcn eye bS3 %ctt beg $ctte§ bie 2krtcn bed ^av ©ttbe bee- 6nbc^ bie (Snbett end bff§ ,s>cmb(e) be§ £>cmbc3 bie ^cmben shirt ba§ Dljr be§ Df)re§ bie ibfjren ear b&§ Stu'bmm bee 3tu'butm§ bie 3tu'bten study bH§ Material' b& 9ftatcrtai3' bie Sftatcria'lten 1 material 1 Nouns ending in at' and it' have the plural in =i=en: as, baz gfofffl', bic %Q\\Vi\^U, fossil. 2 Or bes 23auerru 3 Or bee Dtorijbarn. NOUNS: CLASS J", MIXED 43 Exercise 38, German into English 1. ©iefer 23auer ift mem 9iad)bar getoefen unb luofjitt mit i fritter gran am ©ee. 2. 2Sol)nen @te bemt nidjt in biefem <£taatc? 3- 9tein, id) tootnte nidjt [)icr, fonbern bet bent better 3f)re3 £)oftor£. 4- ®utb @te fdjon tange am 5ee? 5- Sa, totr toofmen fdjon einen 9}Zonat (37, 1) ba. 3ft ber ©of tor }e|t gu §aufe ? 6. 3arool)t, ba ift ber Sicner be3 2)oftor3. 7- Unb ©ie loerben ben SDoftor fc(6ft in jenem gimmer finben. 8. $[00= fen ©ie nidjt an bie %ux, fonbern gerjen ©ie in§ 3immer nnb • fegen ©ie fid) an ba$ Qntbe be3 £ifd)e3! 9- @tnb S^rc lugen rtictjt fefyr gut? 10. jftein, meine 2lugen finb mct)t gut, meil id) fo t)tet tin 23ette lefe. 11. 5I6er fie roerben me beffer roerben, menn ®ie tm S3ette lefen ; eS ift diet 6effer, menn ©ie am genfter ft|en. 12. 3Sie get)t eS mit Stjren ©tubten? 13- 3e§t gefjt e£ 6effer r aber in ben Dfjrert l)abe id) oft ©djmerjen. 14* Unb fo bin id) §um Potior getommen. 15. 3ft ber better be3 2)oftor3 je|t 5 it §au|e? 16. !lftem, roeit id) gu ^rjtten gefommen bin, bteibt er bet unferm 9?acfjbar; er arbeitet mit ben SBauern auf bem gelbe; fie rjaben je|t in ber (Srnte (hawest) oiel (much) 5U tun. Exercise 39, English into German 17. Do you see the end of the lake ? 18. Yes, my eyes 2 are better to-day, and I see the house at the end of the lake. 19. That (ba$) is the house of my neighbor ; your doctor will stay at his house. 20. Has the cousin of my doctor come ? 21. He came yesterday, and the doctor himself will come to- night. 22. This summer they will live at my neighbor's on the lake. 23. To-morrow I shall see the doctor and ask him how it is going with his studies. Inflect " his study," " his neighbor," " your bed," " your cousin," " her 3 eye," " their doctor," and " their lake." 44 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XXI. NOUNS: PROPER NAMES (163) William Emma Max Louisa Smith SSU'fjetm Smma SKaj Sut'je Sdjtnibt 2Sil'f)e(m3 ©mtnaS SDtorettS 2ufjc(tt)8 SdjmibtS SSU'fjeint (imma 3Kaj Sut'fe Sdimibt SHW'fjetm (rmma 3Kaj Sut'fe Sdjmibt 28it'f)eime (SmmaS 2Jlare Sui'fen SdjmtbtS 1 SBil'fjdmc SmmaS 3ttare Sui'feti SdjmibtS SBU'fjdmett Smma3 Warctt Sw'fett 2cbmibt3 2Bil'f)dine (immae* 9Kare Stiffen SdjmibtS Germany Switzerland America Berlin Paris TcntjdUauD bie Sdjrorig xHnio'iit'a SBeritn' $art§' 3)eutfd)lanb3 bcr Sdjrorig Slme'rifaS SBerlftt'S 44,4 Teutidilanb bcr Bchmci., Slme'rifa Scrim' Paris' TaindUanb bie Scfyroeia Vlmo'rifa Scrltn' inutv' Given names ending in an s-sound (8, ft, U, $, g) have the genitive singular ending in end ; but surnames and most foreign given names have merely the apostrophe: as, 1. tyrilJClt!?, Fred's; but. 2>o|V, J'oss'sy Sopfjoffc^', Sophocles' sP- In the names of places ending in an s-sound the genitive relation is expressed by adding another word or by the dative with turn : as, 1. btc 3trnf;cu bcr 2tnbt !$art§, the streets of the city of Paris. 2. bic Strofjcn Don $uri£, the streets of Paris. The names of countries (except those always having the definite article 171,3) and of towns are neuter: as, 1. bo5 alte Gnglanb, old England; but, in bcr SdjttJdj, in Switzerland. Vocabulary fyranf'retrfj, France bffS 2$crf, bie 28erfe, work bet £ihtig, bie £8'mgc, king rooljcr', whence? from where? ber ^rofcf for, professor (42, 1, 3) toof)tn', whither? wliere? 1 As, @d)ttlibtS futb rjter, the Smiths are here. 2 Or Sophocles'. NOUNS: PROPER NAMES 45 The genitive case expresses the time within which; the dative, the time at which ; the accusative, the time how long (37, 1). But the accusative is often used loosely for the geni- tive or the dative : as, 1. etnc£ Xagew tarn er 311 mir, one day he came to me. 2. am folgcnbeu Xagc (or ben folflcnbeu £ag) tarn cr, the following, etc. 3. jcben 3)Zorgcn blctut cr JU § rjeute morgett 6et ifjm ftnb. 4. 9So luofjnen pdjmibt^ jettf? 5- 2)ct ift. gerrn (or be<§ ^errn) 1 Sprofeffor 5)oftor ©tfjmtbtS 1 §auj3, after ba3 ,£>au3 be3 grau(em3 ©tfjinibt 1 ift tut SDorfe. 6. §eute mtrft bu ba$ ©djlofj be3 ®onigS Hon (Sngtanb fetjen. 7. 2)iefert ©ommer fasten roir nacf) $Pari3 unb £>eittfrf)(artb. 8. £>a tpirft bu bag Sd)lo& ®aifer 2Btlt)elm3 be3 3^etten 2 fetjen. 9. ^e£t toerben ftrir etroag au§ ©oetb,e lefen. Exercise 41, English into German 10. These works are the works of a Schiller; 1 where did they come from? 11. Max has bought the books, and we shall take them with us to France. 12. In Paris we shall re- main a month, in the house of your Miss Smith. 13. Then we shall go to Berlin. 14. This winter we shall live in Ger- many, at the Smiths. 15. Then the Smiths will come to America. 16. Max's sister will remain in the city of Berlin. 1 1 A proper name used with a biefer-word or a fein-word (io 1 , 20 1 ), or follow- ing a noun so used, is uninflected unless depending on a noun after it. §erv is always inflected: as, ein ^reitnb meiner Sftarie; ber greunb 3fire§ $errn ©djmibt; be§ £errn ©djmibts ^veunb (but, be§ §errn ^5rofeffor§ ©cfimibt $reuub). 2 An added title is always inflected : as, beg < 3 lx,e itcn, the Second (48, 1). 4 6 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XXII. ADJECTIVES: CLASS I, STRONG Not preceded by a btefer-word or a fern-word (io 1 , 20 1 ), at- tributive adjectives or attributive participles take the strong endings of btefer (8, 2), except that before a genitive singu- lar ending in (e)3 they take the weak ending en (164 2 ). long , cold winter good old friendship laugcr, falter Winter gutc altc Sreunb'fdjaft Icmgett, faltcn SSinterS gutcr alter greunb'fd&aft long cm, fa Item SBtntet gutcr alter SJfreunb'fdjaft langcn, fatten SBinter gute altc £f-veuub'fd)aft laugc, faltc 2B inter gutc altc tfrcunb'frfjaftctt (anger, falter SStnter gutcr alter 7vrcuub'jd)aftctt langett, faltcn SBintertl giitcn altcn ^Tcuub'jdiaftcn laugc, faltc 933 in tcv gutc altc ?i-vcuub'jd)aftcn good cold water cold, biting winter gutce* falter SBaffet falter, fdmci'bcnbcr SSinter gutcn faltcn SBafjerS faltcn, fdmei'benbetl ©intcrS gfitein fa Item SBaffer faltcm, idmci'bcubcm s £>iuter guteS fattcS SBaffet fatten, fd)uei'bcnbett SBiutet gute faltc SBaffct faltc, fdiuei'benbe s 23intcr gutcr falter SBaffet falter, fdjnci'benber 23iutet gutcn faltcn SSaffertt faltcn, jd)nei'benben SSintern gutc faltc SBaffer faltc, fdjnet'benbc SBinter Vocabulary bcrfifjmt', famous bumnt, stupid ; flug, clever faul, lazy ; flci'^tg, diligent gri% great, tall (of people) pradj'tig, splendid; fdjarf, sJiarp frfjlcdjt, poor, bad tap'fer, brave; ^tuci, two bS3 (Bebau'be, bie ©ebau'be, building bie Scute, neuter plural, people bie UntDcrjitaV, bie UnioerjitS'ten, university teljren, lefjrte, getef)rt, teach ADJECTIVES: CLASS /, STRONG 47 A noun in apposition with another noun generally agrees i with it in case (but see 45 *) : as, 1. tdj tt>of)ne dci meittcm Dnfcf, bcm Sruber mciner Wlvdtcv, I live at my uncle's, the brother of my mother. 2. in bcr on £)eutfd)tanb gelefen. 3- 2)ie ^tabt Berlin ijat 6eritf)mte pftajsen, pradjttge ©ebdube nnb gro^e (Garten mtt alten ©to men nnb mtt ©lumen nnb Xieren. 4. (&te l)at aud) tapfre ©o(= baten, fluge Seute, gute @d)ulen nnb eine Uniberfttdt. 5- ©erufjmte alte ^rofefforen lefyren an ben ©d)ulen. 6. 3d) f)a6e gute alte greunbe in ber ©tabt. 7- ©te f)aben groet Huge junge ©ofjne mtt fd)arfen 2lugen unb Dtjren. 8. £)u rntrft fie fetjen unb mtt tfmen in bte (Sdjute. gefjen. 9- 3nj3 tft nid)t faut unb bumm, er gef)t nte in bie ©dmle, met! er fd)(ed)te 5Iugen t)at. 10. 2Str fyaben jegt ratted, fdjnetbenbeS ^Better, aber bu rntrft beffer leraen, menu e3 latt tft. Exercise 43, English into German II. Summer (ber ©ommer, 171, 3) is here with warm days 3 and green trees. 12. We shall now go to Paris and Berlin. 13. These cities have splendid streets and beautiful buildings. 14. They have also great museums and famous universities. 15. When we go to Switzerland, we shall make little journeys into pretty villages. 16. In Switzerland the people live in little houses on the mountains and on the lakes. 17. They have famous mountains and beautiful lakes. Inflect "old bread," "warm winter," "hot water," "hot summer," 4 and " beautiful friendship " (^reimi/fcfjaft). 4 8 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XXIII. ADJECTIVES : CLASS II, WEAK Preceded by a btejer-word (io 1 ), attributive adjectives or at- tributive participles take the weak ending en, except in five forms in the singular (nominative masculine, feminine, and neu- ter, and accusative feminine and neuter), in which they take £, this long, cold winter the good old friendship biejcr fange, fatte ©inter bic gute aftc ^reunb'fdjaft btefcS (angett, fatten ©inters bcr eulten a (ten greunb'fcrjaft biejem fangen, fatten ©inter bcr grttett alten gromb'fdjaft biejen fongett, fatten ©inter bic gfitc altc ^reunb'fcliaft biefc fangett, fatten SBinter bic gutetl attcn ^rcunb'jcliaften bicicr [angett, fatten Sinter bcr autcn alten ^rcunb'fcl)aftctt biefen tongeti, fatten ©intern ben gutetl attcn Jreunb'fdjaftetl btefe (angett, fallen SBinter bic gutetl attcn Tyrcuub'ktiaUCH the new Berlin knife the never-to-be-fo?gotte?i winter bfiS none SBerti'ner 3Kcffct bcr me 5O bergeffenbe ©inter bid ncucn SBerli'ner SftefferS bcc< nic ul bergeffenbetl ©inters bem ncucn SBerK'ner SDleffet bem nie ,^rl bergeffenbett ©inter bac< ncuc SBerli'net SReffet ben nie 3U bergeffenbetl ©inter bic ncucn SSerK'ner SKeffer bic nie gu bergeffenbetl ©inter bcr ncucn Sertt'ner SDfceffer bcr nie gn bergeffenbetl ©inter ben ncucn Serif ner 9Rejfer» ben nie gn bergeffenbetl ©intern bic ncucn SBertt'ner SKeffer bic nie go bergef jenben ©inter 4 Adjectives ending in er derived from the names of towns are unin- flected and begin with capital letters (48, 3). Man, blue; n»ctr, wide, far fertt(e), far, distant gcbrntft', pressed, printed Ijittter, prep, with d. or a., behind Vocabulary bie 3>u'genb, youth bie 3ee, bie 3een, sea (cf. 42, 4) benfen, think; traumen, dream ttuc, as, like ; immcr, always ADJECTIVES: CLASS II, WEAK 49 Many phrases are used as attributive adjectives : as, I i . btc an bcr See liegcnbctt ^orfcr, the villages lying on the sea (the on-the-sea-lying villages). 2. btc Don ifjm gefefirtebeuen 25udjcr, the books written by him. The present participle is formed by adding cub to the verb 2 stem. In transitive verbs it is often used with 511 in a future passive sense, and called the gerundive : as, 1. ber me 511 rjergeffenbe Sag, the never-to-be-forgotten day. 2. fdjbnc, nie su rjergeffenbe Sage, beautiful, never-to-be-forgotten days (46, 1). Exercise 44, German into English 1. 2>er gute grig 1 fjat and) bent armeit Qam 1 etma£ gegeben. 3 2. 3n bent neuen, oon ifjm gefcf)rie6ertcn 23utf)e fjat grig Don fet= ner ^ugenb gefprocfjen. 3- -Da^ ftetne, in Sparis gebrud'te S3ucf; ift fefjr jtf)on. 4. grig fdjretbt: „3n metner Sugenb tear bie SSeft mie etn (Garten, groft nnb frfjon, mtt Q3aumen nnb SBtu? men. 5. ^n biefem groften, fdjonen ©arten fptelte id) mtt met- it en SBrubern. 6. $l6er mtr tranmten unmet: Don bm meit oor un§ liegenben Sarjren. 7- Segt ftnb nrir alt geroorben unb ben- fen Diet an bie fernen, blauen SBerge unb an bie fcfyone Sugenb, mo bag §er§ jung mar." Exercise 45, English into German 8. The new book written by Jack is beautiful. 9. In this beautiful little book he writes of the days of his youth. 10. When we are young, we dream of the great world lying before us. 11. When we are old, we think of the never to be forgotten days when our hearts were young. 1 Proper names in such expressions as "poor Fritz," "beautiful Germany," require the definite article (except in direct address, where they may take the personal pronoun: as, bu armer %x\%, you poor Fred). So A GERMAN- GRAMMAR XXIV. ADJECTIVES: CLASS III, MIXED Preceded by a leirt-word (20 1 ), attributive adjectives or at- tributive participles take the strong endings of bicfcr (8, 2) in the three forms in which fern is defective (nominative masculine and neuter, and accusative neuter ; 20, 1) ; elsewhere, they take the weak ending en or c (48, 1). your 3 live m Si)rcn 5$re long, cold winter [anger, falter SBintet langett, fatten s Binter3 langcn, fatten ©inter [cmgett, fatten ©inter [angeit, fatten ©inter laua.cn, fatten SBinter lana.cn, fatten SBintem langett, fatten ©inter their good old friendship tf)rc gutc alte ^reunb'jd)aft itner cjutctt altcn ^reuub'febaft finer gutcn attcn tfreunb'jd)aft ttn - c cjiitc atte $reuub'jd)aft tine gutcn attcn ^veunb'jdjaften ttner giitctt attcn ftreunb'icbaftcn itivcn gutett attcn ftreunb'fdjaftett ttnc guten altcn ^-reunb'fdjaftcn your new Berlin knife 5l)r neue$ 53crtt'ner SWeffet 3tnc^ neuen SBerlfner SKefferd Jtncmncucn SBertt'ner SKeffet 5 f)i* netted Serlf'ner SKeffet "oiirc neuen Sertt'ner SHeffer Since neuen Serif ner SDcejier ^snicn neuen 33erft'ner ^ceuertt ^fjrc neuen ^Berlfner s ??tei"fer your affectionate friend bein bid) lie'benber tfteunb beinc3 bid) lie'benben Ai'cunbcS beiucm bid) lie'benben ^-reunbe beincn bid) lie'benben ^reunb betne bid) lie'benben ^-reunbe bcincr bid) lie'benben ^reunbe beincn bid) lie'benben ^-reunben betne bid) lie'benben #reunbc Vocabulary tjatt), half($i % i)\ nod), still, yet itttereffanr', interesting; liefi, dear lie'gen, loo, Qcte'gcn, lie mrf)t wafjr ? is it not true f ber 9if)etu, Rhine ber dtod, bie Mode, coat ftolj auf, with a., proud of ber Stitljt, bie 3tiif)(e, chair un'gliicflicf), unfortunate, unhappy toirf '(id), really j o'ber, ^ ADJECTIVES: CLASS III, MIXED 5 I When standing alone before proper names, fjanj, whole, and I Ijail), half, are uninfected : as, i. ganj (or f)ai&) Ghtro'pa, all (or half) Europe. Exercise 46, German into English I. £ie6er §cm3, id) l)abe betn fdjoneS alte3 Q3ndj gefefen. 2 2. 2)eht neue3 $md) Ijabe id) fyter in metnem 3^ mmer r e ^ ift 1 e () r intereffant. 3« 2)u btft fef>r ftol§ auf betn grofte3 SBudj, md)t roaljr? 4* 3aroof)t, mein Ite6e3 grdidetn, tmb @te finb and) ftotg auf %\)it fdjonen <8ad)cn. 5- 9l6er fjaben ©te 3l)ren jun* gen 33rnber mit fetnem griinen %iod gefefjen? 6. Sa, mein guter Qkter f)at and) etnen neuen 9vod. 7* 9Ste get)t e3 betner urn gliidlidjen, franfen ©djmefter? 3ft fie nod) im 55ette, fiber gefjt e3 tt)r fcfyort beffer? 8. 3d) banfe Sfjnen, e3 gef)t ttjr beffer, tmb fyeute morgen f)at fie erne fya(6e ©tunbe in ifjrem cr shorter fim fiir'ftcftcu shortest tnng /w/g- (finger longer nm laitgftcn longest ftnrf strong fthrfer stronger nm ftnrfftcu strongest mnrm warm warmer warmer nm mnrmftcu warmest As attributive adjectives, the comparative and the superlative are in- flected like the positive: as, 1. laiigcrcr, fnltcrcr SBintcr 146, 2 1; bicfer fhngcrc, fnltcre Winter (48, 2): ^l|r Initflcrcr, tiiltcrcr Winter (50, 2). 2. (fiitflftcr, ftiltcftcr Winter 146. 21 : bicfer liiugftc, faltcftc Winter (48, 2); 31)r langftcr, f dttcftcr Winter (50, 2). As predicate adjective, the superlative is in the dative singular neuter with am 1= an bent, 10, 2) ; as adverb, it is in the dative singular neuter with nm to express superlative comparison, and in the accusative singu- lar neuter with anf3 (= anf ba$, 10, 2) to express superlative eminence (without comparison): as, 1. bic Xage ftnb jc&t tnng, {finger, nm (fingftcn, the days ai-e now long, longer, longest (167, 3). 2. er futgtftf)im, frfjoncr, nm fdjonften, anfs fcfiintfrc, he sings beautifully, more beautifully, most beautifully (of all), most beautifully (= very beautifully, without comparison with others). ADJECTIVES: COMPARISON 53 2Btc, as, is used after the positive ; a\$, than, after the com- i parative (but a(3 is sometimes used for tDte in expressions like jo balb a(y mbg(td), as soon as possible). The persons or things compared take the same case : as, i. rot ttuc $htt, red as blood. 2. rotcr a(§ SBlur, redder than blood. 3. fie Ijat i^rt Itebcr al» td), i-/zcrj bin ber jiingere; mem dlterer ©ruber tft mtt bem fleinen |jan3 in bie ©cbjule gegangen. 3- §an£ ift ber biimmfte $nabe in ber gait-jen (Sdjule, aber er tft am fteifeigften, toemt er in ber ©cfjute tft. 4- 3ft §an3 a ^ er a ^ ou ? 5- 3a, idj bin graei Safyre jiinger unb etnen bjafben $opf turner ai§ er. 6. te Xage finb je|t am fuqeften, unb fie gerjt jeben toarmett £ag an bie ®ee. 10. Seben £ag rairb fie ftarfer unb fctjoner ; crc the outer bcr au'fecrftc Jfc outmost, ut- Adjectives or participles used as nouns begin with capitals, but are inflected like attributive adjectives; but when preceded by adjectives with strong endings, they take the weak endings in the genitive plural, in the dative singular, and in the nominative and the accusative neuter singular: as, 1. bicfer gutc 9Hte, this good old man (48, 2) ; gutcr filter. 2. alter !$cfnnntcn, of old acquaintances ; tljm ate altcm iikfantttcn, to him as an old acquaintance ; fcilt frfjbnctf ?Utjjtcrc (5$, 6). In certain phrases adjectives are used uninfected as nouns ; but if inflected to indicate case, they have capitals: as, 1. alt nub jung (or 8Hfc nub ^tntge) fnmen, old and young came. Adjectives after personal pronouns are generally strong ; but in the dative singular and the nominative plural they are weak unless used in apposition or distributively : as, 1. t>n armc3 $Hnb, you poor child; Sic firmer, you poor man. {child. 2. btr armen $liubc, to you poor child; bir f armem ftinbe, to you, poor 3. mir ^cutfd)en, ice Germans (as a whole, collectively). 4. ttrir "Scutfrfjc, ''due Germans (individually, distributively). Most adjectives from proper names do not begin with capitals: as, 1. em bcurfdjc§ SBurf), a German book (but, as proper name, ba$ £eutfd)e 9?Ctd), the German empire ; see also 48, 4). 1 For grofjeften. 2 When !j is followed by a vowel, the stem has no c. 8 When f) is followed by a consonant, the stem has c. 4 Uninfected. ADJECTIVES: IRREGULAR COMPARISON 55 Exercise 50, German into English 1. £u unb bcinc Sdjmeftcr (£dt)a6etl), ijabt iljr et\va§ @ure3 getan? 2. 9JMne Sdjmefter fyat tfjr SBefteS getan, |>err Scfjmibt. 3. &$ roaren t)ie(e Seute ba, arm unb retd), ait unb jung, unb fie gingen jur 9txd)tcn unb §ur fitnfen 1 ber Strafe. 4. 28tr 3nngcn gingen immer na()er, 2 unb e» mad)te un£ jefyr ung(ud(td), a(3 rotr bie Written unb bie 5Hten fafyen. 5. @3 roaren aud) merjrere ^tnber, grofse unb Heine, auf ber ©tra^e, unb rotr fatjen groet arme Sftetfenbe. 6. SDte s Jterfenben fatten letn fd)8ne£ $u= feere, 3 roaren aber roemger arm a(S miibe. 7. 2U3 rotr nad) §aufe famen, rjatte id) bet mir ein neue3 StReffer, ein beut)cf)e3 23ucfj unb groet SpfeL 8. 3d) gebe Srjnen ba£ beutfdje SBudj, roed e£ am 6eften tft. 9- Hub oon btefen groet ftyfeln iff btefer ber beffcre. 10. 3d) f)abe triete 23itd)er 3U §aufe, gute unb fdjledjte, aber bie$ $ud) ift al(erlie6ft 4 unb fdjoner al3 bie meiften metner 53iicfjer. Exercise 51, English into German 11. You poor boy, have you done your best to-day ? 2 12. Sister Mary and I (168, 3) were with the poor people in the street. 13. There were also rich people in the street, but there were fewer children. 14. The most of the people were unhappy. 15. My sister bought bread and gave it to the poor. 16. The poorest people are not always the unhappiest if they are diligent. 17. And the most of the richest people are not the unhappiest, because they are very diligent. 18. We are happiest when we work most diligently ; and few of us (oon un£) work too (§u) much. 1 to the right and to the left ; §cmb is omitted (54, 2), as in the English. 2 immer ll&her, 7tearer and nearer ; immer, always, is so used with a com- parative. 3 $UJ3ere, outer appearance, exterior. _ * The superlative atlerUebft', most charming, is uninflected. 5<5 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XXVII. ADVERBS Many adverbs are compared like adjectives (52, 1, 54, 1), but some are irregular : as, soonest best oftenest extremely (56, 2) worst best A few superlative adverbs are uninflected (cf. 52, 1): as, 1. cr i ft l)iid||*t unfrcuitMid), he is extremely unfriendly. 2. flcljcit 3ic ininiliriift bolb! go as soon as pi 3. cr iff crft morgetl I)icr, In- will not he here until to-morrow. Some adverbs are formed from the stem of the superlative by adding citv : as, 1. iid|i bnitfc bcftcitv, aufc, he is coming home not later than (at the latest) to-morrow. baib soon eljcr ^ frttfjcr > sooner am c'fjeftett flcrnfc) gladly ticber rather am Uebftcn oft often after oftener am Ijtiu'figficn fcfjr very mcfjr more f)6rf)ft ) iiuf;crft ) Ulict badly tirflcr worse am araitcn Wofjl well beffer better am bcftcit ) aufv bene ) CY)t,frst; not until, only flcfaTltflft, if you please (most pleas- antly) jitngfr, recently (Sttgft, long since mb:ilttf)ft f as . . . as possible bcftcitv, very much (in the best manner) frfi Soften*, at the earliest, not be- fore Ijorijftcni?, at most, at best Vocabulary mciftcn*, mostly, generally nattiftcitv, next time, by and by frflihtftcitv, very much (most beauti- fully) ffla'tcftcttS, at the latest, not later than (fpSt, late) roc'ittflftcit!?, at least fctt, prep, with d., since : fctt cittern 3abrc, for (since a year bet s £Iafc, Me ^tafce, place, square : neljmcn 3ic "JMafc ! take a seat ADVERBS 57 To express liking, preference, ox choice, gew(c), ftefcer, or am 1 Itcdften is used : as, i. id) fjabe btc Settling fcljr gcrn, I am fond of tlie newspaper. 2. id) Icfe gcru (or licbcr, or am (tcOftcn), I like to read (or prefer read- ing, or like reading best of all). Exercise 52, German into English 1. SSir bartfert btr beften§ (or fd)dnften3), mir btetbcn Ijeute 2 ntdjt, toetf bein $ater erft (or frii[)ften3) morgen abenb nacf) £)aufe lommt. 2. 23enn e3 ifym nid)t immer arger gefyt, jo !ommt er erft 311 im§. 3. ®ann gefjen mir mdglidjft balb §u meinem 23ruber. 4. Sr roirb trjertigften^ beine Gutter fet)en f nid)t roarjr ? 5- 3amot)(, a6er feit langer Qeit ift fie meiften3 bei metnem timber. 6. 92ef)men ©ie gefaftigft pa§, mein §err, unb lefen @ie biefen $kief! @r ift jihtgft t»ort meiner Gutter gefommen. 7- Set) ioerbe ifjn gerne lefen, toenn bit e£ roimfdjeft 8. 9Jtein timber ge!)t jetjt oft abenb3 in bie &tabt, unb meiften3 martet meine Gutter auf if)n bis fptit in bie ^acl)t. 9. 9icid)ften3 lommt er gar nid)t {not at all) nacf) §aufe. 10. 3ft bein 23rief an {to) ttm fdjon fertig? 11. O getoiJ3, er ift tdngft gefdjrieben. Hftetn timber ift t)od)ft ungludlidj, toenn rair nidjt oft fdjreiben. Exercise 53, English into German 12. Thank you very much, Fred, but I shall go to town to- 3 day. 13. And if your mother comes, I shall see her as soon as possible in town. 14. My mother will not come home till to-night. 15. For two years she has lived (13, 1) at my younger brother's. 16. She is very unhappy because my older brother does not like to work. 17. When he comes home, he stays at most only an hour, and then generally goes into town. 18. By and by we shall not see him at all; he has not worked (13, 1) for a year. 5§ A GERMAN GRAMMAR XXVIII. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS 1 Learn the cardinal numbers, 166, 167. 2 When not followed by a noun, a cardinal number of one syllable may take the strong endings of btefcr in the nominative, the dative, and the accusative (8, 2) ; before nouns, gttici and brei do so in the genitive and the dative if the case is not otherwise indicated : as, 1 . t§ finb unf er fiittf e, there are Jive of us. 2. juicier gnten (or guter) $rcnnbe, of two good friends. 3 (£in§ before another numeral or before U!)r (58, 5) has the form ein ; before a noun, it is inflected like ein, a (20, 1), but has emphasis (often printed with spacing, e i n, a common way of showing emphasis) : as, 1. cr §at cine n $rennb, he has one friend. 4 4?Uttbert an< ^ £<*nfenb are neuter nouns, with the plural =e : as, 1. fie fanten 511 ^mnberten, they came by hundreds. 5 The hour of the day is expressed by a cardinal number, with or without the uninflected feminine iU)r, clock (59, 2): as, 1. toietitet Ul)r ift t§ ? what time is it? e3 ift ein3 (or ein Ufjr), §ttiei (or ^roei Uljr), it is 07ie (or one o'clock), two (or two o'clock). 6 From the cardinal numbers are formed three kinds of words : 1. The cardinal adverbs, by adding mat, time : as, ein'tnfif, once j tan'fenbntaf, a thousand times. 2. Uninflected adjectives denoting kinds of by adding erlei : as, gttJei'erlei See (or $tyfef), two kinds of tea (or apples). 3. Adjectives denoting fold, by adding fad) (compartment) or fattig (fold), 46, 1, 48, 1, 50, 1 : as, ein'fatf), simple (one-fold) ; eitt etn'faltiger Sftenfd), a simpleton. 7 Vocabulary bte Stttnu'te, bie SDftnn'ten, minute ber %y\% bie 3&$t, train baz 25iertcf f bie $iertel, quarter: ein fyalb, half: fjalb brei, half past two SHertet anf gtoet, a quarter past (half of three) [to, by one (toward two); brei $iertel anf natf), prep, with d., after, according gtoet, a quarter of two (three urn, prep, with a., round, at quarters toward two) tiorbei', past: etn§ tJor&ei, past one THE CARDINAL NUMBERS 59 Nouns denoting weight or measure, except feminine nouns ending in e, are put in the singular number. The nouns de- noting the material weighed or measured are generally unin- flected; but, accompanied by an adjective, they take the case of the preceding noun or the genitive : as, i. (mit) gttiei $fmtb %tz f {with) two pounds of tea. 2. (mit) gwei £ttffeu (feminine plural) See, {with) two cups of tea. 3. Ijter ftub stud ^funb guter £ee (or gutett £ec§), here are two pounds of good tea; er fjai suiei %\w\\>s guteu £ee (or guteu £cc3), A* has, etc. 4. tnit stoet SPfitttb gutem £ee (or guteu Xct$) t with two pounds, etc. 5. gelju fyuf? fyodj, ten feet high. Exercise 54, German into English 1. SBteutet llfjr iff e£? 2. 9^a(^ mehter Ufjr {watch) tft e3 eto (58, 5), jtoet, gtodtf ; eine Minute, gtoet Sftttmtett nadj (or ttber, past) em3; etrt SBtertel auf gtuct (or nad) etns>); gtoangig Sfttnutett nadj em3; f)alb gruei; gtocmgtg TOituten nor gtuet (or tit groangig SDcimtten $wti); bret SBtertel auf gtoet (or etn SStertet oor greet) ; eute Wimite, gtoet Sfttnutert bor groet; tin§ borbet, etc. 3. 5lber metne Uf)r gefjt bret 9fttmttert nad) {slow ; t>ov, fast). 4. Urn unebtel Uf)r (or Urn ruelcfje gett) gef)t urtfer 3 U 9? 5- tint etn§, etc.; in etner fjafben ©tunbe. 6. §ter tft erne Xaffe ftarler £ee, trtnfen <3te fie ! 7. S^ f)abe fdjott gtoet Xaffeu uon btefem £ee getrunfen ! Exercise 55, English into German 8. At what time shall you go to Berlin? 9. My train goes at nine, five minutes past nine, etc. 10. By my watch it is a quarter of seven. 11. But my watch is (goes) six minutes fast (Dor). 12. It is now a quarter past nine, and my carriage will be here in five minutes. 13. Drink a cup of this tea; it is strong and hot. 14. Thank you, but it is twenty minutes past nine, and here is my carriage. 15. I am a simpleton ! I have bought only two kinds of coffee. 60 a GERMAN GRAMMAR XXIX. THE ORDINAL NUMBERS 1 Learn the ordinal numbers, 166, 167. 2 To form the ordinal numbers 1-19, te is added to the cardinals (erfte and britte are irregular, and in adjte one t is dropped); after 19, fte is added. 3 From the stems of the ordinal numbers are formed two kinds of words : 1. The ordinal adverbs, by adding tn§ : as, erfteng, first; gfoeitettg, secondly; geljuteit^, te?ithly. 2. Fractions (except Ijatfi, half)) by adding the neuter til in the num- bers 3-19 (in adjtel one t is dropped) and ftet after 19 :i as, ba§ Srittef, the third j cine tuertet fflltilt, a fourth of a 7nile. 4 ^fllti, half is inflected like other adjectives except when used alone before proper names (51,1) or when compounded to form a numeral : as, 1. eine f)ai&e Stmtbe, a half hour, half an hour. 2. att'bert^alfi $u| fang, afoota?id a half 'long (59, 1). 3. in tuer'tcfjatf) Stmtben, in three hours and a half 5 Vocabulary ber Sotuttug, bic — e, Sunday ber $ii'it, bie 3u'K3, /z//j/ ber WidntaQf bie — e, Monday ber 3fugttft', bte — e f August ber $ien3tag, bte — e, Tuesday ber ©cptem'&er, bie — , September ber 2ftitttt)odj, 2 bie — e, Wednesday ber Drto'fcr, bie — , October ber $>otttter§tag, bie — e, Thursday ber 92ot>em'&er f bte — , November ber $reitag, bie — e, Friday ber Siegem'&er, bte — , December ber Sonn' a&enb, bie — e, Saturday ber $rUf)'(ittg, bie — e, spring ber Samgtag, 3 bte — e, Saturday ber (Summer, bie — , summer ber San'uar, fric — e f January ber ^perbft, bie — e, autumn ber $e'&ruar, bie — e, February ber 2$inter, bie — , winter ber Mrs, bie — e, March Sftt'faitg, 9ftttte, Ohtbe 9)lat, /#* &?« ber 9tyrtf f bte — e, April ginning, middle, end of May ber Stttri, bie 9ftate(tt), ^#y er murbe ge&5'rett, /z*? ««w for*? ber Su'nt, bie $u'tti3, /^^ fter&en, ftarfc, ift gcftorbcu, die x tet = %i\\, part. 2 See 136, 3. 3 Chiefly Southern. THE ORDINAL NUMBERS 6 1 To ask the day of the week, toeldjer £ag is used ; the day of i the month, bcr tt)ictuel(f)te : as, i. tueldjer £ag ift fjeute? what day {of the week) is to-day? 2. bctt tmeiiieftett f)afan ttur Jjeute? wto <$y of the 7?ionth is it? Exercise 56, German into English 1. 28e(cr)en %a§ bjaben roir ^eute, gri£? 2. ^peirte ift Sffton^ 2 tag. 3. 3)ert roieoielten fcfjreiben (or fjaben) roir fjeute? 4. §eute ift ber fiinfte. 5- ©0 fcfjreibe id): Berlin, s Dc,ontag, ben 5. (or ben 5ten) Sanuar 1904. 6. 28ann ttmrbe 1 ©cfjiller geboren? 7. (£r ttmrbe 1 am 10. Sftouember 1759 §u s JJcarbad) geboren. 8. @eftorben ift er §u SSeimar am 9. SOcai 1805. 9. 3d; tin 1 and) am gerjnten ^ooember geboren. 10. Sn bem §erbfte be3 SafjreS — (= fo nnb fo), in bem Satjre 17 — (= fiebgerjntyim* bert fo unb fo), in bem SQconat 2tyrit, or (Snbe 9cooember in bem Satjre 184- (= a<§ tjefjn I) un bert in ben SBiergtgem) ttmrbe 1 ein grower $onig geboren. 11. ©er)ft bn SDcontag 2 nadj Berlin? 12. 9cein, erft am ©onnabenb 2 bin id) nad) §aufe gefommen. i3« 3d) bteibe fjier oon ©omiabenb morgen ben 6. big 2)onner3* tag ben 11. Snni Exercise 57, English into German 14. Goethe was x born on August 28, 1749. 15. He died 3 March 22, 1832. 16. Were (bift) 1 you also not born in the month of August ? 17. Yes, I was (bin) 1 born on the fifth of August. 18. My brother was (ift, ttmrbe, or roar) 1 born March 17, 1883. 19. What day of the month is to-day? 20. It is ' Saturday the twenty-eighth. 21. Father came home (on) Fri- day 2 and remained till Monday night. 22. In the middle of October we are going to France. 1 ttntrbe or roar (past) is used of the dead ; Bin (present), of the living. 2 The accusative is better for future time, the dative for pa st time. 62 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XXX. THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS The possessive pronouns are inflected like btefer (8, 2) and should be distinguished from the possessive adjectives, which are inflected like feitt (20, 1) : ber, bte, ba§ mei'tuge 1 ber, bte, bft3 bet'tttge ber, bie, ba§ fei'ttige ber, bte, bag tyrtge matter tttettte tttettte^ be titer beitte behte§ fetttcr feitte fettte^ tfjrer tfjre lt)ve§ uttfrer uttfre uttfer^ eurer ettre cuer3 2 tljrer ifjre tl)re3 Sfjrer 3f)*e %1)Vt§ ber, bte, ba§ tm'frtge ber, bte, ba§ eu'rtge ber, bie f ba§ tfj'rige ber, bte, ba§ $l)'rige mine thine, yours his, its hers, 62, 2 ours yours theirs, 62, 2 yours N. tf)rer t^re ft)re3 ber tfyrige bie tfirige ba§ tfirige G. tljreS tfjrer tf)re3 bc3 iljrigett ber ifirigett be3 tfirigett D. tfjrettt t&rer tftrem bcm ttjrigett ber ffirigctt bent tfirigett A. tfirett tftre tljreS ben tfyrigett bie tfirige ba& tfirige N. tftre tfire tfire bie Ujrigett bie tfirigett bie tfirigett G. tfirer ffjrer tfirer ber tljrigett ber tfirigett ber tfirigett D. tfjrett tfirett tfirett ben tfjrigett ben tfirigett ben tljrigett A. tfire tyxe tfire bie t^rtgen bie tfirigett bie tfirigett Vocabulary bS§ 9Jleitte, what is mine ber $td)ter, bie £>tdjter, poet bff§ ©ebid)t', bie ©ebtdj'te, poem bie Stebe, /eftertt? swAacA are your sisters? Exercise 60, German into English i. £>n etnem 2$albe an ber ©ee tuofjnte etn ^ot^auer, na- 2 men3 «!peinrid) r ber fjatte 5toet fctjone ®inber, §an3 unb ©retdjert. 2. 3)iefe toar fixrtf unb jener 5ef)n Sa^r (59, 1 ; or gefjn 3ctf)re) alt. 3- 5I6er fie fatten nicfjt btefetbe ^cutter gef)a6t 4. £an* fen£ Gutter mar fcfjon fett neun Saljren tot, unb je|t ftarb aud) bie ber @rete (171, 2). 5. £)er $ater tear gut gegen «£)an3 unb beffen ©cfjtoefter, aber ba§ Sebett ber ®inber toax immer etn unb baSfel&e. 6. 5( n benifelbert Xage, ate @rete3 Sautter ftarb, tna^ ten fie tief im SSalbe, too fie 53(umen fudjten. 7. (Sine alte ^eje fam gu thjien, bie tear freimbltd) gegen fie unb fagte: „©eib tt)r e3, meine fcfjdnen Slinber, tt)a£ rooftt tfyr?" 8. §)er Sunge ttmrbe Ua% antmortete aber: „9)Mter ift Iran! 5U §aufe, unb fie liebt folcrje SBfomen ttrie biefe." Exercise 61, English into German 9. Yesterday father took Fred and his (Fred's) brother into 3 town and bought them hats and books. 10. He showed them two kinds of hats and said, " Do you want one of this kind (einen fotdjen) or one of this kind?" 11. That is Fred's hat, and this is his brother's (that of his brother). 12. These are the books. 13. Jack has never had such a good (einen fo gnten) 1 hat as this (53, 1). 1 Such a is often expressed by ein f o or fo em (for eitt fold) or fold) ein) ; no such, by fein fo: as, fo einen £ut, such a hat; in einem fo grojjeu ©arten, in such a large garden ; !eine fo grofeeit 23itd)er, no stick large books. 66 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XXXII. THE RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS (170) ber bie ba§ //z#/, w^tf, which infl. like ber at 64, 2 metdjer mcldje melcfieg that, who, which inn. like biefer, 8, 2 mer mer toa§ whoever, whatever infl. like mer at 66, 2 metdjer meldje me(d)e3 which ? what f infl. like biefer, 8, 2 tuer mer ma3 who f what f 66,2 Singular N. mer who f mer ma3 W^fl/ / in form, but G. meffett whose ? meffett meffett of what f used of both D. tuem to whom f mem numbers A. men whom f men ma3 what ? SSefdjer (rel. or interrog.) is not used in the genitive except as an ad- jective. Before eitt or an adjective, the exclamatory form meld) is used: as, 1. &atjer melcfie^ 2?o(fe3? emperor of what people? 2. me(d) ettte Stabt! what a city.' meld) fdjiitte Gkfiattbe! what pretty buildings ! In the interrogative or exclamatory phrase mft§ fur (eitt) or ma3 , ♦ ♦ fur (eitt), what kind of , the case of eitt depends on the construction: as, 1. ma3 fitr eitt $au§? what kind of house ? itt mag fitr eittem ^attfe? in what kind of house ? ma§ fitr See (or 23tittttett) ! what tea (or flowers)\ ma§ fitr eitt fdjimer £mt! what a pretty hat! A relative pronoun is never omitted (as is often done in English). For emphasis, or when required by the construction, mer is followed by the demonstrative pronoun ber : as, 1. ber $ftatttt, bett id) geftertt fat), the 7nan (that) I saw yesterday. 2. mer frit!) tarn, bettt gafiett fie, whoever ca?ne early, to him they gave. When the antecedent is in the first or the second person (142, 4), the relative pronoun ber is used, and if emphatic is followed by the personal pronoun; but if the personal pronoun is omitted, the verb of the relative clause is put in the third person: as, 1. bo§ fagft bit, ber bit itttmer mem $rettttb gemefett fiift? and you say that, who have always been my friend? 2. id) bin eitt firmer, ber ttid)t3 fiat, I am a poor fellow that, etc. THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS 67 Demonstrative and relative pronouns that are alike in form are distinguished by the position of their verbs : as, 1 . t§ mar ciit Sftamt, ber mar arm (ber, he, demonstrative, 64, 3). 2. eS mar eta Sftamt, ber arm war (ber, who, relative, 1 2, 3). The relative pronoun ttm£ (not bct3 or raeld)e3) is used after a neuter pronoun, or after a neuter adjective used as a noun, or in referring to a whole sentence : as, 1, aUt§ (or \>a$ 23efte), ma§ td) Ijabe, «// (or //«? £*tf) that I have. 2. er f am ttidjt, ma3 ungiitig mar, /^ *#tf not come, which was unkind. Exercise 62, German into English 1. SSer finb ber ! SSeffert ®tnber finb ba$ ? Unb mem fyaben ©te ba£ (Mb unb bte fdjjonen SHetber gegeben? 5- 3 ra 9 eit ^^t ^ er ^ e f e SHnber finb? ®ie§ finb bte Sltnber, beren better unb 3J?utter geftern abenb fpat rjter im ©arten raaren. 6. 2)as> SBefte, raa3 id) 6et mtr rjatte, f)abe id) ifmen fdjon gegeben. 7« 3)er SDrenfd), bent tc^ ba3 @elb gegeben fjabe, nnrb attd) morgen abenb fjter fetn, unb @tc toerben il)n fefjen. 8. £)a3 finb bte Ketnen SHn= ber f benen \§ t)ie ®letber gegeben fjabe. Exercise 63, English into German 9. Are you the man that came this morning, whose little daughter is ill ? 10. He is the same man you saw last night in the street. 11. Who are these boys? 12. These are the boys that were here yesterday. 13. Are you really the boys who were here yesterday morning ? 14. Yes, we are the same boys ; we are the ones (bte) to whom this gentleman gave the money to-day. 15. He has given you all that he has. 6$ A GERMAN GRAMMAR XXXIII. THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS, PART I after, afle, aUe§, all; before pronominal words or the definite article the uninfected form aft is generally used, afte £5ge, every day (but, ben gunmen £ag, all day) ; afte nnb jebe r each and all. 68, 3 bzibt§ f 5eibe§, Beibem, Betbe3, neut. sing., both things; pi., Betbe, Betber, etc., both, or bte Betben, etc., the two. toir Betbe, both ^/"^(distributively, 54, 4) ; ttJtr Betben, we two (collectively, 54, 4) ; afte Betbe, both (distrib- utively, 54, 4); fetncr tttht Betben, neither of the two etner, etne, tin(t)§, one, or ber eitte f bte etne, ba§ eme, the one. 68, 2 jeber, jebe, jebc^ f everybody, everything; after ettt (20, 1), inflected like an adjective (50, 1). jeber Dim Betben, each of the two je'bermann, je'bermann^, everybody je'manb, je'mattbCe)^, somebody, anybody fetner, feine, fein(e)3, none, nobody. 68, 3 man, g. eme3, d. einent, a. einen, we, you, they, people, somebody nie'manb, nte / manb(e)§, nobody N. einer etne etn(e)3 ber etne bie etne ba$ eine G. etne£ enter eine 3 be$ einen ber einen be3 einen D. einem einer einem bem einen ber einen bem einen A. einen etne ein(e)3 ben einen bie etne ba$ eine N. bie einen bie einen bie einen G. ber einen ber einen ber einen D. ben einen ben einen ben einen A. bie einen bie einen bie einen After the plurals afle and feine (denoting determinate numbers, " all " or " none "), adjectives should have the weak form (=en) : as, 1. afte gnten Seute, all good people (but, aft or afte feine SBorte, all his words, feine being pronominal). 2. feine gnten Sente, no good people. To refer to a person or to persons without indicating the sex, the neuter singular is used : as, 1. afte3 ging nad) £anfe, everybody went home. THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 69 Exercise 64, German into English 1. .gaben ©te unfern guten 5l(ten gefefyen, liebe3 graulein? i 2. (£t fam 5U un3 meiften£ aHe bier donate, aber feit einer SSodje lommt er affe Xage ; rjeute ift er ben gan-^en Stag geblie- ben. 3* ®eftern abenb lam er fpctt mtt meinen betbert Jiingften SBriibent. 4. Gsr fagte ^u mt3 : „OTe3, raa3 tc£) rjab.e, ift euer." 5. £>te beibert ®inber banften ifyn, unb and) id) banfte ifjm fetjr. 6. 3d) rjabe me fo einert gefeljen rate irjn. 7- @r ift gut gegen alle unb jebe, unb letner rairb tun, raa3 er getan Ijat. 8. 3a, beibe^ ift raafyr. 9. 9(ft bie ^tnber (ieben itjn, nicfjt raafjr? 10. 3araof)f, ratr aHe Iteben i()it. 11. ©0 geljt e3 intnter: raenn man freunblid) unb gut ift, fo ge()t e3 einem (not it)m) gut. 12. 5(6 er raa§ raerben er attberg? who else? ttttt tuem etitber^? with whom else? THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 7 l After the plurals anbre, ei'ttige, maudje, mcfj'rere, tilth, toe'* i ttige (denoting indeterminate numbers) and fofdjC (64, 4), adjec- tives should have, especially in the nominative and the accusa- tive, the strong form (*e; cf. 68, 3) : as, 1. aubrc gtitc Settle, other good people. 2. attbm gttter (or gutett) Settte, of other good people. Exercise 66, German into English 1. grt£ wax mtt ein paax Sfrtaben in meinen @arten gegan^ 2 gen nnb rjatte tnefyrere gute Spfet gefnnben. 2. 3)ann !amen anbrer Sente $tnber, etn<8 nad) bent anbcrn. 3- 3)aS etne rjatte otele Spfel, bie anbern fatten toenige. 4. „333otIen ®ie %p\d?" fragte ber cittefte ^nabe, ber bie meiften Spfet f)atte r „ober l)a- ben ©te njeld)e?" 5» „£)anie beften3, id) f)abe mcv)x Sfyfet al3 U)t, t)abt it)r nid)t3 anbre£?" 6. ft %<§ t;abe mdjtS a(3 Spfel," anttoortete er. 7. r ,@tnige Don un3 Ijabcn njemgcr a(* id)." 8. „^tele rjaben toeing nnb brandjen and) toeniger al§ anbre," fagte id). 9. „5l6er loentge Ijaben mcfjr, a(3 fie motion, toeil bie, bie btel fjaben, mefyc tooHen." 10. „%atoorj(," fagte er, „unb manner (or mancf) ein) 9J?enfd) braud)t fo uiele3 (many things) nnb v)at fo toemgeS (few things)." n. pollen ©ie nod) ettoa3?" 12. „3d) rjabe 33rot genng nnb genug uon bet= . nen 2ipfeln, aber jc£t brandje id) ein fletn btfjdjen ®db." Exercise 67, English into German 13. "Do you want some money?" our mother asked. 3 14. No, thank you, mother ; we have little, but with a bit of money we shall buy many things. 15. Many people have enough, but want more. 16. Some people have much money, and need little. 17. And some that have little need less. 18. But those (bie) that have much or little want something better (etfua3 93effere£) or something different (ct\va§ anbres). 72 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XXXV. THE PRESENT INDICATIVE OF PECULIAR VERBS Verb stems ending in t, b, or m or u preceded by a mute (204) generally retain e before ft or t (12,2, 173). Stems ending in an s-sound generally retain e before ft, but ef or e is often dropped. For liquid stems see 20 2 . wait talk breathe open sit blame wander timrte rebc atme offne ft|e table roanbre trmrteft rebeft atmeft offrteft W% W tabelft roanberft roartet rebet aftnet i3ffnet (tftt tabett roanbert roarten reben atmen bffnen ftrjen tabeln roanbern roartet rebet atmet offnet m tabett roanbert marten reben atmen offnen jtt^en tabetn roanbern In the second and third persons singular of strong verbs, a generally becomes a\ an becomes ait; short e becomes short i; long e becomes ie in fcefcfj'fcn, command, em^fefjlett, recommend, gefdje'fjen, happen, lefcn, read, fdjcren, shear, fcljen, see, and \itiy lett, steal. If the stem of such verbs ends in t, the ending et is dropped. GJckn, nelntten, and ireteit are irregular. hold run help see give take step finite laitfe fjelfe fefjc gebe nefyme trete pttft ioufft $Hflt fictift gfbft, gtbft ntmmft trtttft pit lauft m* jiet)t gtbt, gtbt rtfmmt txitt fatten lanfen tietfcn jet)en geben nerjmen treten fiattct lauft ^elft W gebt netnnt tretet fatten lanfen fjelfen jetien ge6en nefmten treten effett, eat, of persons freffett, eat, of animals Vocabulary fana.ett, fhtg, gefattgett, catch Stttcrn, sttterte, gcjittert, tremble THE INDICATIVE MOOD 73 The existence of persons or of things in their natural sur- roundings is expressed by e£ gtbt, there is, there are (literally, it gives, that is, nature gives') : as, i. in 9(frtfa gtfit e3 Somen, in Africa there are lions. 2. Ijcnte gibt t§ fyif ef|e f there will be fish to-day (a natural event). 3. t§ gnu fcinen fdjimeren ©arten at§ biejett, no prettier garden than this existed. Exercise 68, German into English 1. 3Skt3 gtbt'g (= gibt eg) Dleueg fjeute? ©djjlaft |)ang nod) md)t gut? 2. Deem, er gtttert am gan^en Seibe ben gan^en Sag, ber Softer empftef/lt if)m biefe Staffer. 3. ®ieg ift bag= fe!6e SBaffer, ba$ mix fo biel f)ilf t r aber jetted rjabe ic^ nidjt. 4. §altft bu ben £)oftor fur einen greunb? 5. giir einen gu* ten greunb; id) glaube, er tut ttnnter fetn £tefteg. 6. unb, t)m er fie^t, raeil etn §unb fetnen jiiugeren SBruber gebtffen v)at 8. D, ba ift feanfen^ ©ctjtoefter 3(nna, fietjft bu fie? %&a§ fur einen fdjonen |jut fie tragi! 9. C \a, unb bag fdjone SKetb, ba§> fie fjeute trdgt, l)at il)r SBruber .'pang ifjr gegeben, eg ift gang neu. Exercise 69, English into German 10. Do you see the old doctor, Jack? 11. If you step to this window, you will see him. 12. He is sitting there in the garden. 13. Yes, I see him now; he is talking with Frederic. 14. No better friend than he exists. 15. Do you blame Fred- eric? 16. Yes, and the doctor blames him, because he does not help his sister. 17. If we wander toward the lake, we shall find Anna. 18. There she is with her dog; he is eating an apple. 19. You (man) breathe much better here than in the house. 74 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XXXVI. THE IMPERATIVE MOOD The familiar imperative singular of weak verbs and of luer* ben is formed by adding e to the stem. In liquid stems the e of the stem is dropped (20 2 ) : as, Present Infinitive jag-en (stem fag) tocmber-tt (stem number) Imperative Singular fag-e (bu) ! say trjcmbr-e (bit) ! wander The familiar imperative singular of strong verbs may be found by dropping (c)ft of the second person singular of the present indicative, except that a (or an) or of the stem re- mains as in the infinitive. Of feht, it is the simple stem : as, Present Infinitive 2 Sing. Pres. Indie. Imperative Singular lef-en Hef-eft lie§ (bit) ! reaa nefjm-en nimm-ft ninrm (bu)! take ft|-en ftfe-eft We (ba) ! sit Irmf-en Ifittf-ft umf(e)(bu)< run fiof$-en ftBfreft ft5tf(e)(bu)! pus/ fei-rt bt-fi fei (bu) ! be fage (bu)! say {thou, you) lieS (bu)! fei (bu) ! fagt (IW say {ye, you) left (ifjr) ! ' feib (tlfr) ! fagen @tc ! say {you) lefett axa\l§' f out of it, out of them sitions: as, ttUJttmf, on which THE IMPERATIVE MOOD 75 Before a direct quotation the dative of the indirect object I takes %u f to; but when the quotation is indirect, the dative alone is used : as, i. fie fagt sit bir : „Set gut!" she says to you, " Be good." 2. id) fage bir, ba% id) gut bin, I tell you that I am good. Exercise 70, German into English 1. ©eftern fagte id) ^u meinem fletnen better ®ctrt duller: 2 „®omm ^u mir, ®arl, fe£e. bid) auf btefen ©tub/l tmb lieg mir au3 betnem SBudje t)or (lte3 . . . bor, mzaT /#)." 2. SBttte, fa- gen ©te mir, ma3 Star! ba^u fagte. 3. ©r antraortete: „§eute morgen fjabe id) feme Qdt, auer ^ er *ft mem £md), nimm'8 (= mmm e§) unb lie§ fe!6ft !" 4. §oleit aufe. Exercise 71, English into German 10. Please go to the table and lay this book on it. 11. Then 3 go to the door and say to my little cousin that we are going to bed. 12. If he runs into the garden, do not follow him. 13. When he comes into the house, catch him and carry him into his room. 14. You will find my prayer book on the little table that stands at the bed. 15. Take it and read to him out of it. 16. Good night, sleep well. 17. Go to bed yourself, my dear friend, and sleep well till to-morrow. 76 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XXXVII. THE CONDITIONAL MOOD (150, 151) The past subjunctive of weak verbs except t)abm is like the past indicative (173); the past subjunctive of strong verbs and of fja&cu differs from the past indicative by having a, 0, or it modified and the suffix e retained by all stems. The pluperfect subjunctive differs from the pluperfect indicative by having [jcirte for fycttte, and ttmre for wax (26, 2, 28, 2, 30, i, 2): as, Past Indie. Past Subjv. jag-te jag-te mar roftr-e rourbe luurbe Plupf. Indie. Ijfftte gejagt' toar geroe'jen roar gerooYben Plupf. Subjv. f)Stte gejagt' inttre geroe'jen rottre geroor'ben say become The present conditional of a verb is formed by adding its present infinitive to ftiitrbe ) the past conditional, by adding its perfect infinitive (32, 1) : as, id) luitrbe fctgen, I should say or / should be saying; id) iuiirbe jjetocfett feitt, I should have been: Present Conditional Past Conditional id) rourbe jagen icf) rourbe geroe'jen jein bu raurbeft jagen bit roiirbeft geroe'jen jein er rourbe jagen er rourbe geroe'jen jein rotr rourben jagen rotr rourben geroe'jen jein it)x rourbet jagen it)x rourbet geroe'jen jein fie rourben jagen fie rourben geroe'jen jein .(Sie rourben jagen <3te rourben geroe'jen jein Vocabulary fi5§ or oBfe, wicked, cross £ut§'rf)ett (dimin. of Suije), Lou gar, quite: gar mrfjt, not at all \xvi\x, now, well; \)\tx\)lx' f hither, here getotf?', certain, certainly bie Sefjtt'fudjt, longing gtitcf lid), happy bie £ante, bie Xanten, aunt THE CONDITIONAL MOOD 77 A conditional sentence in the past subjunctive is either less i vivid future ox present contrary to fact; in the pluperfect sub- junctive, past contrary to fact (151, 3, 4). In the conclusion (but not in the condition) of the sentence, the conditional mood (76, 2) may be used instead of the subjunctive : as, 1. tt>enn fie Ijterfjcr fame, (fo) f tinge fie or (fo) ttmrbe fte ftngen, if she came (or should come) here (and she may come), she would sing. 1 2. menn fte Ijterfyer fame, (fo) fringe fie or (fo) ttmrbe fie ftngen, if she were coming here (but she is not), she would sing. 1 -«■'..«■ « ( (fo) Mite fte gefnngen or 3. ttienn fte Sterner getommen ttmre, I )[ ; ' . ' ' t t ( (fo) ttmrbe fte gefnngen tjaoen, if she had come here (but she did not), she would have sung. Exercise 72, German into English 1. 9?mt, bu tteber $ctr(, menu bit in3 $au§ gtngeft, fo fan- 2 beft bu beine Gutter. 2. (gie roiirbe btr betnen neuen |mt ge6ett. 3- 2lber loenn bu I)ter Mie6eft, fo gct6e id) btr ben met- ne3 ©of)ne3. 4. Sfteut, id) nerjme fetnen ntd)t r «£>err Sculler, aber menu id) bet grt| mare, roitrbe tdj irjm ben fetntgen net)* men. 5« ©agft bit, bu Kleiner (54, 2), bu rjdtteft beinem ^ru- ber ben |)ut genommen, menu bit bet trjm geraefen ractreft? 6. 2Saerr 2)oftor? Exercise 75, English into German 9. Will you read this morning? 10. No, I am not permit- 3 ted to do it, because I ought not to use my eyes. 11. Does your brother want to write? 12. He wants to read, but he cannot write. 13. He will have to learn it ; he will have to write and read letters. 14. Was he permitted to stay at home yesterday? 15. Yes, and he wanted to do nothing. 16. To- day he must go to school. 17. He will be permitted to go to his aunt's to-morrow. 18. May I ask where she lives? 19. She lives in that little house ; can you see it ? 8o A GERMAN GRAMMAR bitrfcu been allowed" fihnteu been able er tyattt Metfcen tnogeit • t he would have ■ liked tnitffctt had soften j . wanted XXXIX. THE MOOD AUXILIARIES, PART II (200) ' The mood auxiliaries have two past participles, one weak (ge — t r 78, 1), the other strong ( — en, without ge), exactly like the present infinitive (78, 1). This strong form is used when an infinitive depends on it : as, 1. cr f)at e§ gerrutttt, he was able {to do) it (79, 1). 2. cr §at z§ tint fomtett (not gefonnt), he was able to do it. to stay. 4. er fyattt fitetfien foften, he ought to have stayed. 2 The strong verbs fjetfjen, bid, faffett, let, cause to, and feljen, see, have also old past participles like the present infinitive (80, 1) ; the strong verb fjelfen, help, and the weak verb f)6reit, hear, and (less often) \%§\v\ f feel, leljrett, teach, lemen, learn, and matfjeu, make, use by adoption the pres- ent infinitive for the past participle. They all take the infinitive without 5U(79> i) : as, 1. ttitr fefjen fie fdjretben, we see her. writing: 2. ttJtr fjaoctt fie fcfyretoen feffeu (not gejeljen), we saw her writing. 3. er tjat mid) fmnmen faffett (not getaffen), he has had me come. 3 When two infinitive forms stand together in a subordinate clause, the tense auxiliary (fjafctt or toerben) is not put at the end of the clause, but before the first infinitive or its modifier, according to the emphasis (120 1 ): as, 1. ttJetl er ttrirb gctjcit ttwften, because he will want to go. 2. mentt er geftern fy'attc (or Ijiitte geftern) Bteiben muff en (not gemufst), if he had had to stay yesterday. 4 Vocabulary ftwgie'rett fafjrett, go driving gleitfj (colloquial for fcgletdj'), im- f^ajte'ren gef)(e)tt f go walking mediately fpagte'reu reiten, go riding fattg'fam, slowly; fdjitefl, quick THE MOOD AUXILIARIES 01 fonnen or mogen means may == be possible ; but fonnett often I has the meaning of bitrfen f may = be permitted : as, i. ba§ rarnt (or mag) fetn, that may be. 2. bu fauuft morgen geljcn, you may go to-morrow. Exercise 76, German into English 1. ©utett 9)torgen, §etn^ raiftft bu rjeute morgen mit mir 2 fpagieren fafjren? 2. $ieten S)anf (»ztf;y> thanks), Staii, aber icf) bin nictjt miibe unb modjte lieber (had rather, 57,1) jpagte- reit reiten. 3* 3d) fomme gleicf) toieber, id) rutll meine bret ^Pferbe tjotert laffen, etnS fur mid), ein<3 fur bid) unb ein3 fitr meine fTeine ©d)roefter. 4. 5lber bier tft meine ©crjroefter, fie mbd)te am liebften fpagieren gefjen. 5- Sdu3n! £>eute morgen mollen mir fpagteren getjen unb tjeute abenb reiten. 6. s IBenn mir aber geftern fpa§teren gegangen roaren, fo fatten mir in ben ^ar! gefjen biirfen. 7- 3f)r rjcittet bie Somen feb,en fonnen. 8. 3Benn id) meinen SSater fyatte lommen laffen, fo fyattm mir mit tfjm gefjen fonnen. 9- ©r lonnte roenigften£ bi£ greitag bfeiben. 10. 9Iber er roollte nad) granfretd) (79, 1). 11. 3f)r ger)t fo fdmelf, ifjr beiben, lafjt un£ langfamer gerjen! Exercise 77, English into German 12. Did you hear my father come into the house? 13. No, 3 he has not been able to come. 14. If he had come last night, he would have wanted to go into the park. 15. We shall not be permitted to go into the park to-day; we ought to have gone yesterday. 16. But we should have had to go alone, and I had rather go with father. 17. He cannot be here to- morrow ; if we want to go, we shall have to go alone. 180 My older brother will be here Saturday, and we shall be able to go with him. 19. He would like best to go to-morrow, and we will have him come. 82 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XL. IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS (191) i Six weak verbs have a change of stem vowel in the past in- dicative and the past participle : °res. Infin. Past Indie. Past Subjv. Past Partic. brcimen brannte bremtte gebrannt burn lentten fannte fenrtte gefannt know nennett uannte nennte gentmnt na?}ie remten rnnnte rertnte ift geranrtt run, rush fertbett fanbte jenbete gejartbt send Jaenben roanbte icenbete geiDanbt turn Three weak verbs have a change of stem vowel (and modification) in the past subjunctive, also; and they suffer consonantal changes in their principal parts, as in English. In the present indicative, ttriffen is in- flected like the mood auxiliaries (78, 2, 191, 3): brtngen otadjte brcid]te gebrad)t bring, take benfen bacfyte bad)te gebadjt think ttriffen ttmfcte ttmfjte ■ gettrofjt know A collective noun, unless followed by a nominative plural in apposi- tion, takes its verb in the singular. The verb is also singular with sin- gular subjects regarded separately or as forming a unit; and it may be singular (commonly so in the inverted order) when it stands next to a sin- gular subject (cf. 168,5): as, 1 . cine -sKKenge turn Shtubett ttmr (but, eitte Sftettge ®itaben ttmrett) f erttg, a crowd of boys was ready. 2. *pret3, (£f)re, £raft fet bent $ihttg ! glory, honor, power be to the king. 3. ait mtb jttttjj tam (or famett), old and young came. 4. fragteft ^n tutb bte SHttber nad) timt? did you and the children ask for him ? Vocabulary fentten, know, be acquainted with, ber (Stefattb'te, ein $efattb'ter, mes- as a person or a book ttuffett, know, as a fact frfjtcfett, send, as a package fettben, send messenger or message senger, aijtbassador. 48, 1, 50, 1 fenttett lernett, becojne acquainted with (learn to know). 80, 2 bte ^omnie, bte ^atm'ltett, family IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS 83 Exercise 78, German into English 1. SBiffett @ie, too |jerr Softer Wiitia tuof)ttt? 2. Deein, tdj fenne §errn 2)oftor SDftiHer mdjt nnb ioeijs jxtcTjt, too er toof)nt. 3. "paben ©ie feine altefte £orf)ter fetmen gelernt? 4. Sdj fetme bie Xocfjter gar ttidjt, id) lenne aber §ernt bolter TluUtxS better §emrid) (Sdjmibt imb toeifs, too er bie£ Safjr geioofynt f)at. 5- Set) fjafce and) ben ©ofm, namenS -fpeing, lett= nen lernen (80, 2). 6. 9?mt r geftern iff eitt ®na6e Oon 2)oftor duller gerabe (Just) t)ierf)er gerannt, al3 loir au$ bem £)orfe rittett. 7. 2)od) rarntte er uo£ nad) (a/ter) imb fragte, toofnn totr rittett. 8. %\% loir fragtert, toa§ er Oolite, anttoortete er: ff §errtt WiilkxZ §au3 brennt, er tv'ili, bafc 6ie ifjm §ilfe brin- gen." 9. 2Bir fanbten i()ttt gleidj mefjrere banner nnb rittett fetbft nad) ^jaufe. 10. (Sine SDtettge Seute, alt nnb jung, grofj nnb fletn, gtngen gum 2)oftor. 11. Scfj benfe, er mufe ijeute toieber 511 §auje feitt. Exercise 79, English into German 12. Do you know the German ambassador in Paris? 13. Yes, I know him; I got acquainted with him this year. 14. Has he brought his family with him? 15. No; I do not know where the children are. 16. I know one of the boys, and I want to send him some books. 17. The books are ready; if you can go, take (use brtngen) them to his father. 18. I do not know where they live. 19. And I have no time now, but I will send brother John. 20. Do you know where John is? 21. No, but I think I can find him. 22. He knows the father and the mother. 23. If he can go, he will be able to take (bringen) the books to them. 24. If he cannot go, do you think you can go to-night ? 25. I do not know (3d) toeifj e3 ttidjt or £>a3 tDetB id) nicfjt), but perhaps I shall be able to go to-morrow. 26. I think I can go myself to-morrow. 84 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XLI. THE PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE (203) The so-called prepositions with the genitive are properly adverbs or adverbial phrases, on which the genitive depends as on a noun. The following are the most important : nn'ftatt or )tatt f instead of (in place of). 84, 4 bte3'fdt(<§), on this side of (biefe ©ette) fjctfben or fyal'bev, in behalf of , following the genitive. 84,2 j5tt'feit(S), on that (or the other) side of(\lm ©ette) (cutg§, along (keeping the course of), -sometimes with the dative tvofyf in spite of sometimes with the dative ftttt ♦ . ♦ ttnfleit, for the sake of. 84, 2 tttSlj'tenb, during (within the time of) Wegeit, on account #/~(by way of), often following the genitive. 84, 2 ^patben, ttntfett, or njegett is compounded when used with the personal pronouns, feaibtv may be compounded with other words: as, 1. met'ttetljaibett, on my behalf ; urn bti'mtmtlzn, for your sake; fei'= itcttuegett, on his account. 2. el)'rctt!jatt>er (or ber (£f)re §aibtv),for honor's sake. Compounds of fyatb are an' j?evl) alb, outside (outer half of); itt'nerfjalb, inside (with the dative if the genitive is not indicated by inflection); 5'berljafb, above; mitcvfyalb, below, xut'tcrljalb $erlttt3' f below Berlin. 5(tt'ftatt or )tatt may be used before an infinitive with §u, or before a clause introduced by ba% that: as, 1. anftatt hk§ gu tun (or mi)tatt baf? er btc§ tat), Mteb er, instead of do- ing this he remained. Vocabulary bie 2tb'ftrfjt, bte Wfidjten, purpose nterfen, merfte, gemerfr, notice bie Str'mut, poverty be§ 9Zadjt3, duri?ig the night ( 126, 4) baljer', consequently, so nuv f only ber $ieb, bte ^tebe, //zziebe nicf)tg fefyen fonnten, nnb fie fatten fein £id)t; bafyer mnftten fie mtt ben .ganben Icings ber SSanbe be3 fteinen gimmersg fudjen. 5- Anftatt ettua3 gn finben, tnarf einer t)on i()nen einen ©tufjl urn. 6. 2)er arme $ltte offnete bie ?Ingen nnb tro(3 ber ginfterniso {darkness) fa!) er bie gtnei £)iebe. 7- ®r merlte ifjre 2Ibfid)t, aber anftatt ettoa£ gn tun, fagte er gn ifjnen fef)r (angfam: ,Mdm guten greunbe, fcr feib grof}e £oren; tfjr f)offt fjter eatm^ be3 9lad)t§ gu finben, nnb id) finbe tjier nictjt^ am £age." 8. 28a3 fyattft bn Don bem bitten unb oon benen, bie ifjm etnm3 ftet)len toollten? Exercise 81, English into German 9. Shall you go to Germany instead of your cousin? 10. Yes, but I shall go for the sake of my sister and on your account. 11. Does your sister live on this side or on the other side of the city? 12. She lives on the other side of the river, outside the city. 13. Inside of a week (innerfjatb einer 2Bocf)e) we shall be on the other side of the Rhine. 14. For her sake we shall live in Berlin almost all (68, 1) winter. 15. We shall go to my cousin, who lives below the city. 16. For your cousin's sake we ought to live on that side of town (ber ^tabt). 17. Perhaps on his account we shall live outside Berlin. 18. During the winter we shall go often to the opera (in bie Cper). 19. This winter we shall go to the opera instead of going to the theater (84, 4). 86 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XLII. THE PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE (203) The dative with a preposition generally expresses the place where ox from which. 9lari), toward, to, and %n, to, are used with the dative although expressing motion toward: au§ f out of, of anfov, outside, beside, besides. 86, 2 feet, at, near, with, at the house of, by (not of agency; cf. tion) eutgc'gett, contrary to (= merely in the opposite direction to, literally or figuratively; cf. guttu'ber, 86, 2), generally following the dative (see 87, 2, sentence 1). Cf. " contrary to expectation" gegenU'ber, facing, opposite, generally following the dative, er ttJofjttt ber £trd)e gegettii bcr r he lives opposite the church ttttt, with, of joint action, manner, or means (instrument) ttfld), toward, to (never of persons ; cf . git) * t after (of persons or of things), according to, sometimes following the dative. 86, 3 feit, since, f eit gitiei SSodjen, for two weeks (of past time). 86, 2 t)Ott, of, from, by (of agency, with the passive voice) git, to (with the infinitive and words denoting persons and some things; but not with the names of countries or of towns, where nad) is always used); at (git SSetfttt'; 511 WlWiaq, at noon). 86, 3 9(ufter and fcit are properly adverbs, not being compounded with verb's. Some other adverbs also are used as prepositions (cf . 84, 1) : as, 1. btnnctt adjt Sagen, within a week. 2. bet 9 r Jatur / gemii^', according to nafoire. 3. nSrijft ©oft bcmfe id) bit, next to God I thank you. 4. 9ftar £). ttcfift fciner £$rau, Max H. together with his wife. 5. bem ©ejel'e guttnber, in defiance of (in active opposition to) the law. With verbs expressing motion, nad), nad) . . . p, or §u following the noun, means simply toward, while §u in its usual position (before the noun) generally implies arrival at: as, 1. id) gefye nad) bet <&tabt r I am going to (starting for) town. 2. Deceit, fjimgern, fdjtefjen nad), bite at, hunger for, shoot at. 3. tdj gtng (nadj) bem 28a(be git, I went toward the forest. 4. id) gtng pr Stabt, / w^;z/ A? town (and arrived there). THE PREPOSITIONS %7 When not referring to a person, the dative or the accusa- i tive of a pronoun with a preposition* is commonly expressed by adding the preposition to the demonstrative adverb ba(r)* or the relative adverb ttJo(r)* f or by using another adverb (74, 5): as, 1. ntntnt bte3 nnb lit$ baran^' (== an§ tfjnt), take this and read in it. 2. ba§ Siccv, UJOUon' (= Don bent) cr f&rarf), the army of which he spoke. 3. in ber 8tabt, mo (= in bcr) er tooljttte, in tlie town where he lived. 4. fett bent Sage, mu (= an bent) er ftarb, since the day that he died. 5. bie %xi, tttte (= anf bte) id) leote, the way that I lived. Exercise 82, German into English I. 9Jtetne3 Waters 2Sitnfcf)en {wishes) entgegen (or gmoiber) 2 ift metn 33ruber auctufe). 16. Will you have something to eat (§u effett) or to drink? O 5 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XLm. THE PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE (203) The accusative with a preposition generally expresses the place whither; that is, the place toward, to, or into which: 0t§, till, as far as (properly an adverb; cf. 84, 1, 86, 2), accompanied by another preposition when before the definite article imrcf), through, by (denoting cause or means, often of persons). 88, 2 fur, for (= in view of, toward), in behalf of gegen, toward, against (= merely in the opposite direction to, literally or figuratively ; cf. ttuber). gegen ben ©trom, upstream. 88, 4 oljne, without (not having; properly an adverb ; cf. 84, 1, 86, 2). 88,3 itm, round (going toward an object, 1 often with the idea of getting it); vm /. ♦ §it, to, used with the infinitive to express purpose 2 tt)tber f against (= in active opposition to, literally or figuratively; cf. gegen), soiber fan Strom, against the current l^urd) used as an adverb stands after the accusative: as, 1. bfc§ gaujc %af)r bitrdj (or Ijinbnrd)'), the whole year through. Oljne is often used before an infinitive with gn or before a clause intro- duced by bafj, that (cf . 84, 4) : as, 1 . ofjne iJ)r ttwa§ gu geoen, gtng er fort, without giving her, etc. 2. gel) ttttfjt, otjne ba% id) c§ toetf?, do not go without my knowing it. Words with meanings directed toward an object are fol- lowed by gegen (not 511, as often used colloquially) : as, 1. bic Steoe ®otte3 gegen bic SJlettfdjeit, God's love to mankind. 2. tanfc gegen ben dtat fetner ^reunbe, deaf to the advice of his friends . 3. frennbitdj, nn'frcnnbttd), gnt, pfiidj, mt'fjiifftdj, fait gegen bid), friendly, unfriendly, good, polite, wipolite, cold to you. Vocabulary bte $tr'oett, Me Str'oetten, work fdjttrimmen, swim ottten, Mt, ask (itm, for a thing) ber Strom, bte SrrBme, stream gemin'nen win, gain tEg'tid), daily (Sag) ; fort, away ber ^Ziftag, noon (midday) to&nxti)' t through or by which. 87,1 !To go round an object, you must keep turning toward it, for any other direction will take you away from it. 2 Cf. " to compass your designs." THE PREPOSITIONS 5 9 Exercise 84, German into English 1. llrtfer tieber Skater tft tot, unb totr rjaben mcf)t3 gu effen i ober gu trtnfen. 2. 5(6er toer toill fur un<§, mid) unb bid), arbetten? 3« Hut ba£ taglidje S5rot 5U getoinnen, mliffen toir felbfi ben gangen Zaa, fdjtoer arbetten. 4. 2Iber mo ftnben totr bie Arbeit, tooburd) totr unfer tftgltdjeS 23rot getoinnen fonnen? 5. 2Sir miiffen nad) Arbeit futfjen Hon rjter bt3 (or bt3 nad)) Berlin. 6. Unb Don jetjt an U$ 5Utn Xobe (or bis in ben Xob) miiffen totr un£ felbft fjelfen. 7- ©8 tft gut fiir un§, baf$ totr etnanber gu rjelfen toiffen. 8. Satootjl, fo toerben totr ntd)t urn 33rot bitten miiffen. 9. Hub fo fonnen toir toiber ben ©from fdjtoimmen. 10. Urn totebtel ilt)r (or lint toetcrje Qdt) f°^ eit toir nad) ber @tabt fafjren? 11. SStr toollen urn gerjn Urjr gerjen. 12. SSteEetcrjt toerben bie Seute freunb(id) gegen un§ fein unb nn§ fjetfen, 2Irbett §u finben. 13. 3n ber (Stabt miiffen toir Arbeit fudjen unb bttrd) bie Arbeit greunbe getoinnen. 14. Cfnte 2Irbeit lann man nidjt leben. Exercise 85, English into German 15. The man came into the garden without my knowing it. 2 16. He was very poor and asked for work. 17. But deaf to your advice, I sent him away without giving him anything. 18. To-day I have sent him a letter through Karl. 19. If the man comes again to me, I shall give him work by which he can earn his bread. 20. It is hard to swim against the stream if you (man) have no friends to help you (einem). 21. When people (man) are polite and friendly to us, Ave ought not to be cold to them (irgenbeinen). 22. If we are not good to each other, who shall help us? 23. If you go as far as Paris and find the poor man, be good to him. 24. When you have good friends, do not be deaf to their advice. 25. And you will not have to ask for your daily bread. 9° A GERMAN GRAMMAR XLIV. THE PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE OR THE ACCUSATIVE Some prepositions are used with either the dative or the accusative : the .dative to express the place where or from which (86, i) ; the accusative to express the place whither (88, i): as, an, 07t (beside), at, by, to, touching or vitally connected with. 90, 3 auf, 011 (upon), up at, up to, the accusative often denoting the object, the limits or the manner of action or of thought. 90, 2, 3 1) inter, behind ttt, in, into ite&Ctt, by, beside, near fiber, above, over, beyond, about (91 1 ), the dative implying no contact, the accusative implying previous inotion toward Witter, under, below, a?nong t)5r, before, infro7itof,fro7n (because of, being confronted by) Sttufdj'ett, between Ancient towns were generally built with the market and the public buildings in the center, on the higher ground; and so in speaking of elevated or of public places, auf is used : as, 1. auf bent Wlatlte, at the market; auf bte Strafje, into the street. 2. auf meittcm dimmer, up in my room; auf§ Sanb, into the country (which generally looks higher than where you stand). 2In often denotes a close co7i7iection, while auf is merely local or inci- dental: as, 1. er ift lafjm au eiuem $u|e, he is la77ie in (touching) o7iefoot. 2. er ift ^rofeffor an ber Xtm&erfitat, he is professor at the tmiversity (cf. "on the board of directors," "on a newspaper"). 3. er ftubtcrt auf ber XlnitJcrjttat, he is studyi7ig at the tmiversity. 4. gel) an ba§ limit tgau§ I go to (communicate with) that s7Jiall house. Vocabulary ^opffduuer^en, masc. pi., headache fid) nmnbern ituer, with a., wonder at auf 233tc'bcrfel)cu, till we tneet agai7i, stefjcu, 509, ge3ogen, draw, move au revoir barau', at (beside) it, etc., Sy, 1 leibcn, (ttt, gelitteu, suffer ttioran', at what, etc., 87, 1 THE PREPOSITIONS 9 1 The indirect object is expressed by the dative unless art or 511 1 is required for the sake of clearness : as, 1. Ucrlau'fc ntir bcin ^ferb ! sell me your horse. 2. uerfan'fe t>a§ $Pferb an midj ! sell the horse to 7>ie. 3. gi& tfjm ben 23ricf an (Stifcbetl)! give him the letter to Elizabeth. 4. er faitbte eitten 23oteu 511 bir (or an btdj), he sent a messenger to you. Exercise 86, German into English 1. £)ore cmf mid), grig! ©i$t metn jttnger SBruber an ober 2 au ; bent £ifd)e? 2. (£r fafj aitf bem £ifcfje, a6er jetjt \t%i er ftcf) baran. 3- ©r fdjreibt an feinen gretmb, ber in granffurt am Wain ttormt. 4- 333enn er fertig tft, too den fair nn3 anf * bie Dteife mactjen. 5- 3d) moctjte and) gem gel)en, tuenn 3f)r better ntcfjt bofe auf mid) toare. 6. (§<§ gefjt tftm f)eute mor- gen fd)led)t, er leibet fef)r an Stopfjcrjmer^en. 7« Scf) ttmnbre mid) immer ii6er tr)n, er arbeitet 3U (too) oieL 8. (£r mag t>ie( arbeiten, aber id] luetfs nid)t, ttoran er je^t arbeitet. 9. £od) f)aben ©ie einen gnten grennb an i()m, er benft immer an ©ie. 10. Unb ©te braudjen fid) rttcr)t oor il)m 511 fiirdjten. 11. ©r ioofjnt itber mir, unb id) mag ifjn fefjr gern. 12. 3ej3t muff en mir abfar)ren; rair fafjren itber (3y way of) Berlin. %{\x\ SSteber- fel)en ! Exercise 87, English into German 13. Lay this book on the table behind the door. 14. Then 3 come and sit down beside Mary or between Fred and me. 15. You sit too much over your books. 16. You ought to play more with the boys that live below us. 17. When they go to France, you will have to play alone. 18. We shall soon move into the country, where you will have the fields and the flowers. 19. To-night Professor Miiller will speak on flowers (itber bie Wurmen). 1 1 Ci. oon bir tyredjen, speak of you; ttBer bid) fpredjeu, talk about you. 92 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XLV. THE SEPARABLE PREFIXES (188) A verb is called separable when compounded with a separ- able prefix. The important separable prefixes are ab, off; an, on; auf, up; au§, out; bti, by (near); ba (bar before vowels), 1 there; bar, in view; bauott', therefrom; eitt (not trt), into; tmpOX f ,up; entge'gctt, against, toivard, to meet ; \z\i f fast; fort, on, away; 2 fjchu, home; fjcr, here; ljut, there; lo3, loose; ttttt, with; natf), after; uiebcr, down; t)or, before ; oorki', by, past; tJorit'ber, past, gone; lueg, away; ineitcr , farther ; urieber, again, back; $u, to; ^nrM', back; gufam'ttteit, together. A separable prefix receives the principal accent, as in English. In the present and past tenses a separable prefix stands at the end of its clause (149, 1, 3, 6), except in the transposed order (12, 3): as, 1. er ftef)t fritf) auf, he gets up early (auf jtefyen). 2. er ftonb fritij auf, he got up early. 3. ftcfjc frit!) auf ! get up early. 03c of the past participle and gu of the infinitive are put between the prefix and the verb. But if the infinitive depends on tijerbeu or a mood auxiliary, ^\\ is omitted (79, 1): as, 1. ttieuu cr fritf) auf geftaubeu ttmre, if he had got up early. 2. er bittct bid) frill) aufjuftefjcu, he asks you to get tip early. 3. er Urirb (or tuuf) frit!) aufftcfjen, he will (or must) get up early. Vocabulary ab'faljreu, fufjr ab' f tft ab'gefa^ren, auf madjeu, tuadjte auf, auf gemarfjt, start. 72, 3 open ao'oe^(e)u, start, go gu'madjeu, close (make to) au'faugeu, begin (lay hold on) auf gefj(e)u, rise, of the sun au'fommeu, arrive aufftef)(e)n, rise, get up, of persons au'gteljcu, dress (draw on) bie ©ouue, bie Sonuen, sun augj'jtefyen, undress (draw out) jjera'be, straight, just, exactly 1 2)a (bar before vowels) is generally compounded with other prefixes: as, baran', thereon; OODOU ', therefrom. 2 on, forzvard ; then, away, gone. THE SEPARABLE PREFIXES 93 A short infinitive phrase may stand inside a clause; but any infinitive phrase put after a clause should be set off by a comma, unless the infinitive is necessary to complete the sense, or has an object or a modifier before the verb on which it de- pends : as, i . e§ fangt git regtten an (or e§ fangt an 5U rcgnen), it begins to rain. 2. er gtttg, ofjtte JU fpredjett, fort, he went away without speaking. 3. c§ ift ftf)tt>er, gu (efen, reading is difficult; but, ba$ tft fc^tucr 511 (cfctt. 4. (B0U1 gelaitg e§ Hjm 511 ftttben (or e3 gelang Ujm, ®otb §u ftnben), he succeeded in finding gold. Exercise 88, German into English 1. ^m (Sommer gerjt bte Sonne jefjr friit) auf, unb mtr foil* ten and) friit) aufftefjen. 2. 3m SBmter aber getjt fie trie! fpater auf, unb mtr braucrjen ntct)t fo frttrj attfgufterjen afe tm ©ommer. 3. $l6er rnandje Seute fterjen tm 933 inter gerabe fo frttrj auf mie tm Sommer. 4- Sftorgen gtefjen mir un3 fetjr friif) an, urn mit bem erften 3 u Q e abgufafjren. 5- $)er 3 U 3 9 e W inn M^ IX^r a6, mtr miiffen un3 gtetd) aus^ierjen unb gu 33ette gefjert. 6. SBitte, macfje bte Stir §u unb bte ^enfter auf! 7- ©3 fangt fcfjon an 511 regnen, foil tcf» bte£ genfter aufmatfjen ? 8. 9cur em Item btftcfjen. SSolien mtr abfabven, menu e3 morgen regnet? 9. S^a* titrticrj, marttm f often mtr aber mit bem erften 3 u g e abfarjrcu? Exercise 89, English into German 10. At what time does the sun rise to-morrow ? 11. It (£>ie) rises at a quarter of six. 12. When do you want to get up? 13. If our train starts at a quarter past eight, we need to get up at seven. 14. My brother is coming here to start with us. 15. If it begins to rain, we cannot go. 16. It is warm to sleep here; will you open that win- dow? 17. I cannot open it. 18. Ought we to start if your brother does not come? 19. No, but he will arrive early. 94 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XL VI. THE INSEPARABLE PREFIXES (189) A verb is called inseparable when compounded with an in- separable prefix. The inseparable prefixes are unaccented and remain attached to the verb : he-, be-, round, over, then much or completely, generally making an in- transitive verb transitive ; then used in forming verbs from other parts of speech, with the idea of providing with: as, 1. fhtbett, find: befin' 'belt, find, judge (find the surroundings of); tine beftuben 8te fid) ? how are you ? 2. feljett, see: befe'fjeit, examine (look at all round). 3. fti^ett, sit: beft^'eit, occupy (sit round), possess. 4. ber 2Birt, host, landlord: bettur'ten, entertain. ent= (attt=, emp=), over against, denoting correspondence to, opposition to, transition from one state to another, then re7noval from, as being op- posed to (cf. \ytx-- and $er=): as, 1. becfett, cover: entbecfen, discover (remove the cover), reveal. 2. ba§> $8ovtf word: bie Wntwoxt, answer (swearing over against). tx-f from inside out, through and through, getting the meaning up, through, etc* from the verb compounded- with it: as, 1. ftttbett, find: erfiu'bcn, find out, invent; ber (Srfut'ber, inventor. 2. geben, give: erge'ben, give up, yield. ge= r together, denoting union or completio?i, and so sometimes success advantage, or pleas2ire (cf. t»er=) : as, 1. ber 83crg, mountain: Mz ($ebtr'ge, chain of mountains, highland. 2. f alien, fall: gefaftctt, please (fall in with), d. ; gefaHtg, pleasing. 3. IjBren, hear: gefjo'ren, belong (be all ears for, as a slave). 4. (iegen, lie: bie Gfcle'geuljeit, opportunity (lying-together-hood). tytt'-, forth, away, gone, tho?-oughly, often with the idea of risk, disadvan- tage, or loss, sometimes making an intransitive verb transitive (cf. ge=); also in forming verbs from other parts of speech: as, 1. faufett, buy (trade for): ticrfau'fctt, sell (trade away). 2. fud)en, seek: ncrfu'djcn, t?y, tempt (seek to your harm). %ix~ t asunder, to pieces : as, I. bredjett, break: §txhxtd)'tn, break to pieces. THE INSEPARABLE PREFIXES 95 Inseparable verbs are inflected like simple verbs, except that i the past participle is without gc, to avoid having two unac- cented prefixes standing together (189) : as, fcefpretfi'ett befprad)' befprodj'en talk about, discuss t>erge'ben Dergab' t>crge'bett give away, forgive ticrf^redj'ett tierfprad)' tjerjprodj'ett promise (risky) t>erftetf' en tierftecf'te tierftecft' stick away, hide tiersei'ljen tiercel)' toersie'fjett pardon, with d. Exercise 90, German into English 1. ©utert SJcorgen, graulem s DculIer, tote beftnben @te fief) rjeute 2 morgen? 2. ©anj gut, (id)) bartfe, barf id) ma3 mtt Sbjnen befpredjen? 3- ^Bttte f bttte, bjaben ®te ma3 entbedt? 4- Sd) I)a6e eg Sfynen oerfprodjen, bet ber erften ©elegenbett auf t>a$ @e= btrge 311 gebjen, urn ba§> £)orf §u ferjen. 5- ©eftern gtng id) unb mem alterer SBruber auf ba$ alk 8d)(oJ3. 6. &§ mar fo fdjon, mir moftten alle3 befebjen. 7- SStffen Ste, mem ba$ Sdjlofc gebjort? 8. Dcctn, ba§ metfe id) ntcrjt, aber ut) beufe, em greim ber bemobut cS je£t. 9. 3Btr ucrfttdjten tn£ ©djlofe gu gebjen uub flopftcit an§ £or ( £**&■), aber mir fonnten ntcmanb entbef^ fen. 10. £)er £ag mar aber fdjott, unb es> geftet mir a(fe3 feb)r. 11. Sm atten 3)orfe fatnen mir in etn fleineg 2Strtsrjau3, mo man unS aufS fdjonfte bem'irtete. Exercise 91, English into German 12. How are you, Jack? Should you like (9Jcod)teft bu) to 3 go up on the mountains, to examine the old castle ? 13. I do not know who owns the castle, but perhaps we shall be able to discover it. 14. I hear he is educating ((agt er f u>bjen) his sons at (auf) the university. 15. If we cannot go into the castle, we shall not be able to examine much. 16. We must go at once if we want to see the village. 17. I think the old village will please you very much. 9 6 A GERM AX GRAMMAR XLVII. THE DOUBTFUL PREFIXES $ltrd), through, iikr, over, iim, round, and wtter, separable when used literally, and inseparable when used fig- uratively; 1 toiefcer, again, back, is separable, 2 and totber, against, is inseparable; gutter, behind, and bott f ful/, are gen- erally inseparable ; mi$ is inseparable, 3 but the verbs com- pounded with it are irregular in form and in accent: 4 as, brattg burd)' bwrcfy'gebrmtgen burtfjbrang' bwrdjbruug'ett feijte ii'&er U'bcrgefe^t wberfeij'te fiberfeljt' gfng ftm' iun'gegangett ftmgfng' umgaug'ett i. burdj'briugen burrfjbriug'en 2. U'fcerfefeen uberfefc'en 3. ftm'geljeK itmgc^en 4. nn'terf) alien nnterfyal'ien 5. tt)te f berfel)cn tt)tbcrfpred)'cit 6. ^utterlaf'fen ooflbritt'gen 7. miprau'djett mt^ f 6raurf)en press through penetrate, pervade set over, transport translate go round get round, evade hold under sustain, entertain Ijtett un'tcr un'tergefjaltett untcr^ieif nnterhaften faf) nne'ber ttne'bergefefjeit see again nuberfpradV nnbcrforodj'en contradict ^mterite^' fytuterlaffen bequeath Dotfbradj'te tiofl&radjt' accomplish mipraudj'te ntiprantfjt' 3 mt^brandjie gemifj'braurfjt In compound nouns and adjectives, these inseparable prefixes are accented except in words in which the prefix is followed by more than one syllable: as, 1. ber 2£rbcrf£rud), contradiction; Me ttmge'bmtg, surroundings. Verbs are often compounded with two or more prefixes. If an inseparable prefix is next to the verb, the participle is without ge, to avoid having two unaccented prefixes standing together: as, 1. nueberatt'faitgen ftng ttrieber an' miebcron'gefaugen . begin again 2. an'oertrauen uertraitte an' an'Bcrrrant trust 1 Cf. "look o'ver," "overlook"'; "go un'der," "undergo'." 2 But, tt)teber= Ijo'Ien, tt)tebert)ot r te, roieberfyott', repeat. 3 But, mifj'suDerfleljen, to misunder- stand. 4 In compounds with mtf3, the participle without ge is preferable. THE DOUBTFUL PREFIXES 97 Exercise 92, German into English 1. 2£ct3 fur em bitrdj'brtngenber Oiegen ! Saffen ©ie un§ bier ein flein bifscrjen btetben! 2. 2tber tjoren ©ie jene burct)= brtng'enbe ©timme ! SSal mag ba§ mot)t fein ? 3. 3d) gtaube, e«o tft ber ©differ an bent anbent lifer be§ ©ee3, er mitt tjertt^ berfommen, urn um§ it'bequfetjen. 4. 3)er 9iegen mirb immer ftarfer, unb mir miiffen t)htu'ber (79, 1). 5. 3)er ©differ fcingt mieber an ju rufen, roa3 fotten mtr ibm antmorten ? 6. (£r foil nidjt ()eru'berfommen, mtr lonnen urn ben ©ee rjerttm'getjen. 7. 2Sir lonnen e3 geroifi nidjt unternefy'men, itber£ SSaffer 5U faft= ren. 8. 3a, eS tft Oiet beffer, rjerum^ugeben. 9. Sir feljen ben ©differ haib mieber unb fonnen if)m bant'en. 10. petite abenb lonnen mtr itjtt nict)t mie'berfef)en. 11. SStr miiffen attein gu §aufe btetben, mir bitrfen in unfrer 9lufgabe nict)t3 itberge'tjen, mk tjaben Oiet 511 itberfe|'en. 12. SSenn mir in unfern 3im* mern ftnb, merben mir bte Qtit nidjt mifjbrau'djen. 13. 9?un, lonnen ©ie ba3 ©ebtcfjt miebertjo'len, ba$ mir §u ternen tjaben ? Exercise 93, English into German 14. Come out, Doctor Miiller, and go with me to the lake. 15. A good boatman lives on the shore, who will take us across. 16. He takes me across every day if the weather is good. 17. But if you wish it, we can perhaps go round on the shore. 18. The wind is piercing ; we ought to stay in our rooms and translate our lesson. 19. If we have beautiful weather, we can see each other again to-morrow and go to the shore. 20. Repeat to me the poem that you learned yesterday. 21. I have repeated it twice (groeimal), but I will begin it again. 22. To-morrow I will repeat the other poem that I have to learn. 23. We have so much to translate to-day ! And we always have too many poems to learn ! 9 8 A GERMAN GRAMMAR XLVIII. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD Review 76, 1,2, 78, 1, 82, 2, and learn the present, the per- fect, the future, and the future perfect subjunctive of fyafcett, feht, and toerbett, 175, 177. Observe that the stems remain unchanged (cf. the indicative, 174, 176), that the connecting vowel e is retained throughout (except fet, for fete), and that the endings (except in the third person singular) are the same as in the indicative (173). The subjunctive may express a wish, a mild commajid, pur- pose, concession, mild affirmation, or co7idition: as, 1. ber ^aifer feee f)ori) ! long live the Emperor! (wish) 2. geiobt fci (&ott ! God be praised, (wish) 3. fciett ttrir tttdjt tm'gnrtg ! let us not be unkind, (mild command) 4. er fommt, bamit' er mid) fefje, he comes that he may see me. (pur- pose) 5. fet er (or er fei) nod) fo arm, be he never so poor, (concession) 6. t>a§ bitrfte 511 tuet feht, that might be (is probably) too 7nuch. (mild affirmation) 7. menu td) ifyn faf|e, if I should see him. (condition; yy, 1) The subjunctive is used in indirect discourse merely to re- port what another person has said, whether true or not. To distinguish the subjunctive from the indicative when they agree in form, the tenses of the subjunctive are changed. But even when the sub- junctive is not like the indicative, these changes are often made merely for euphony, both in speaking and in writing: INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE ' Present : er fagt (fagte), er fittge Present: er fingt ( Past: er fagt Oagte), er fange Past: er fang 1 _ J Perfect: lv fctgt (fagte), er fiabe gefimgen Perfect: er \\&t gefimgen ) ( Pluperfect: er fagt (lagte), er fy&ttt gefimgen Plupf. : er fjatte gefimgen = Pluperfect: er fagt (fagte), er Jjarte gefimgen _ . . w , .. (Future: er faqt (fagte), ertterbe fingen Future: er unrb fmgen = 4 _ _ _ . _,,!_'_ «. ' ( Pres. Cond. : er ]agt (lagte), er ttmrbe fmgen THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 99 1. ftC fingt fjClite, she sings to-day j fie fingen Ijente, they sing to-day. er fagt, ba% fie Ijente finge (or fiinge), he says that she sings to-day. er fagt, ba% fie Ijente fangen (not ftngen, which is either indicative or subjunctive), he says that they sing to-day. 2. fie fang (or §at gefungen), she sang. trf) fragte, ob fie gefnngen (jabe (or fyatte), I asked whether she sang. 3. fie uierben morgen fingen, they will sing to-morrow. er fagte, &af? fie morgen fingcn mitrben (not toerben, which is either in- dicative or subjunctive), he said that they would sing to-morrow. 4. er fooflte uleioen, met! er f)ier toof)ne (not tt>ol)nte, which would here be taken as indicative), he wanted to stay because (he said) he lived here. 5. ©ie ttdren jener ^jerr? (you say) you were that gentleinan? Exercise 94, German into English 1. (Siloiberte ber alte Sifter, baft er arm jet (or mare) ? 2 2. (St fagte mir, baft er im tegten Slriege ©olbat fitr3 $ater= lanb genjefen fet. .3- 3SolIte er eine Steftitng, toeil er fetn ©elb f)abe (or l)dtte) ? 4- @r toollte (Mb, bamtt er etnen alien ®ame* ■ raben befucrjen fonne (or fonnte). 5- @r Ijojfte, baft mtr etoa^ fatten (not fjafcen), id omit tott if)n beftfjenfen mitrben (not mer- ben). 6. (Et fagte and), baft er nicrjt roett Don tjter roofme (or mofmte) unb morgen mieberfommen merbe (or mitrbe). Exercise 95, English into German 7. They wanted to come here to-day because (they said) 3 they must see you. 8. You say that you do not know them, and that they do not live here ? 9. They say that they are the sons of your neighbor and live on the lake. 10. They asked whether you were at home. 11. At last they said they should come back to-night. 12. They said they could not stay long because they had no time. 13. Did they say they were going home ? 14. Yes, they said their father was ill. IOO a GERMAN GRAMMAR XLIX. THE COORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS c'&er, but, however, weakly adversative (cf. afteitt'). 171,5 allem', but, yet, still, strongly adversative (cf . a'&er) bemt, for. 100, 3 o'bcr, or. 171, 5 ent'roeber . . . ober, either . . .or. 100, 2, 171, 5 fouberu, but, following a negative clause and contradicting it ttidjt nitr . . ., fouberu aud), not only . . ., btit also ttttb, and. 171, 5 meber . ♦ . nod), neither . . . nor. 100, 2, 171,5 Coordinating conjunctions do not affect the order of words, except that when ettftoeber (unless followed by a pause), tueber, or ttutf) introduces a clause, the inverted order is used (11, 1) : as, 1. cr ift arm, afier er tft g(utftttf), he is poor, but he is happy. 2. eutmeber ift er arm f obcr er ift uuaJutfUtf), ~) either he is poor, or he eutmeber, er ift arm, obcr er ift uuglutfUdj, ) ' is unhappy. 3. mebcr ift cr arm, nocf, ift er reid), neither is he poor, nor is he rich. 4. Weber idj, ttorf) bu (tft l*eicf) r neither I nor you are rich (here the sub- jects are contrasted and the order is not affected). betttt meaning for stands at the beginning of its clause; when it means then, pray, it stands after one or more words: as, 1. er ift arm, betm er ift uugtittflirf), he is poor, for he is unhappy. 2. ma§ unflft bu htnn? what do you want, then? In indirect discourse the subjunctive merely repoj'ts what an- other person has said (98, 4); the indicative not only reports, but indicates the speaker's belief 'in the report. Thus, the indica- tive should always be used after verbs in the first person of the present indicative (because by using the subjunctive you would throw doubt on what you yourself say is true), and after words implying certainty, such as feljett, see, e3 ift flat, it is clear. THE COORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS 10 1 When the indicative is used in indirect discourse (ioo, 4), the tense of the direct discourse is retained, except that when the principal verb is in the past indicative, a present indicative is generally changed to the past (as in English) : as, 1. fie meifj, bafy er jiutg tft, she knows that he is young. 2. fie ttm^te, baf; er juug toav t she knew that he was young. Exercise 96, German into English 1. 3)er Sunge fagt, baft mem 9ieffe, ben er gefeften f)abe (or fyat), 1 geftmb fet. 2. (SJlauben fie, baft er bie 2Saf)rf)eit fpredje (or fprtd)t)? 2 3- Sc§ gttictfle, 06 er bie SSatjrfjett fprtdjt. Stttetn id) Ijoffe, baft ber ®na6e beffer tft. 4- 5lber ntdjt ttur ber $rgt, fonberrt aud) Sfjr 9ceffe felbft fragt, to aim (Ste eine SRetfe mit mtr madjen to often. 3 5- 3d) lann toeber mitgetjen, nod) fjter 6Iei6en, beim id) f)abe metner ®ufine oerfprod)en nad) 2)resben 5U retfen. 6. SSoften 6te erlcauoen, baft id) mttgefje? 7. 3d) benfe, 9lmta toiirbe (77, 1) fid) frenen, menn ©ie mit- gtngen. Exercise 97, English into German 8. I fear that it will rain and that my nephew will not come. 9. But Miss Smith says the boy she saw 4 this morning in the street is your nephew. 10. I do not believe that it is he (bafj er es> tft, 17, 1), for he said that he should come to-morrow. 11. Did you ask Miss Smith when she saw the boy? 3 12. Yes, and she said she saw him at nine in the village. 13. Jack writes that he is better now and shall come with your nephew. 14. The doctor says that he is able to come. 15. The doctor thinks he will be better here with us. 1 f)abe (subjv.) = wkom he says he saw (98, 4); Ijat (indie.) = whom he saw. 2 tyred)e === I doubt that he speaks the truth ; what do they think ? fpridjt = I think he speaks the truth; what do they think? 3 Indirect questions that repeat what may have been direct questions often take the indicative. 4 whom she saw (66, 5). 102 A GERMAN GRAMMAR L. THE SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS, PART I al$ f when, of a single occurrence in past time, and used therefore only with the past tenses of the indicative (or with the historical present = the past). Cf. tttemt, 102, 2 Bet»Dr' or e'fje, before. 102, 2 bl§ t until; fij (ange . ♦ ., Dt3, until '(103, sentence 6) utbetti' with a verb, — ing, of an occurrence simultaneous with that of the principal verb, the subject of the two verbs being the same, er ftanb anf, tub em er fagte, he arose, saying je ♦ ♦ ♦, beft'o, or je . , ., itm fij, ^ . . . the. 102, 3 natfjbem', after; je narijbem', according as. 102, 2 feit or feitbem', jzto, of time fofealb', as soon as fofang'(e), so long as, as long as mSfy'renb, while, whereas. 102, 2 inenn, whenever, when, of a repeated occurrence in past or present time, or of a single act in future time. Cf. al§, 102, 2 Subordinating conjunctions require the transposed order (12,3): as, 1 . al§ er tn3 3i mmer ^ am ( or tommt), f alj (or fteljt) er bid), a§ fyenfter geiiffnet Jjatte, ghtg er %vl 23ett f when (= «/3fer) /^ /^df opened the window, he went to bed. After the subordinating conjunction je the order is transposed (12, 3); after the adverb befto or nm jo the order is inverted (11, 1). In short sen- tences je is oftenused instead of befto or nm fo : as, 1 . je mefjr man §at, befto (or nm fo) meljr mitt man f)aoen, the more we have, the more we want. 2. je eljer, je lieoer, the sooner the better. THE SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS IO3 Exercise 98, German into English 1. GsmeS £age3, ate unfer alter greunb m3 3^ mmer ^ am r fa!) er tm3 $naben auf bem ©of a ft|en. 2. 23eoor er after ju un3 fommen fonnte, ftcmbert toir beibe auf unb etlten auf il)n §u. 3. Sir naf)men t()u bet ben g&nbett, iubem totr „©utert 9)?orgen!" fagten. 4. @r fagte 5U un<8: „©eit id) fyier bin (13, 1), bin itf) fer)r glud'tid); toartet t)ter, bte tcfj gurucffomme!" uub ging l)inau3. 5- ^acfjbem er fortgegangen toar, fegten rotr un3 toieber auf ba$ ©ofa uub bu'eben ba, folange er fort mar. 6. 2Saf)renb nur fo faften, tarn uufre attefte a ba§ ^ijermome'ter fteigt, nrirb l§ farmer, since the thermometer is rising, (I infer that) it is getting warmer. iuetttt, if ever (= whenever, of indefinite time; 102, 1), if in conditions of all kinds (151) Jrjie, however; as, like, with the same case after it as before it. 1 105, 1 When, with the past indicative, is best translated by al§ or trjafyrertb (while, 102, 1); with the pluperfect, by rtadjbettt' (after, 102, 1); with the present, by ttietttt (whenever, 104, 1): as, 1 . ai§ id) f am, mar er fd)on f)ter, when I ca?ne, he was already here. 2. mafjrettb cr Ijter ttmr, lam id) in3 dimmer, when (while) he was here, I ca7ne into the room. 3. nadjbem er bte§ gefagt fyattc, ging er fort, aft&r saying (after he had said) this, he went away. 4. menu id) morgen nad) bcr <&tcfot gefje, rucrbc id) bid) fefjett, when (if) I go to town to-tnorrow, I shall see you. 1 In English the case after as or than depends on the construction: as, I saw nobody younger than he (is) ; I have seen nobody else that I like more than (I like) him. THE SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS 105 To denote identity, al§ r as, is used; similarity, ttrie, as: as, 1 1. er kfite al§ em ^rht5 f he lived as a prince (which he was). 2. er lebte ttJte citt ^rtttj, he lived as a prince (which he was not). Exercise 100, German into English 1. S^r better tft fet>r freunbltd) gegen mid); ba er nic^t fyier- 2 Iier lorn men fonnte, b,at er an mid) gefdjrieben. 2. @3 gibt feinen £tfenfd)en, ber frennbtidjer ift ate 3^r ^Bater; benn er Be- l)anbelt jebermann meb,r ate grennb benn ate 1 gremben. 3. 28ie arm er and) immer mare, er roitrbe 2 gtudlid) fein, toeil er jo Oiete greunbe I)at. 4. &at er ntdjt fefjr unredjt getan, inbem er nid)t gefommen ift? 5- 9cein, ba$ gtmuV id) nidji Cbgleid) er nid)t gefommen ift, ()at er nn3 bod) (Mb gefdjidt, bamit mir nad) «r ^ater morgen ttrirb gu «urbe urn fed)3 geijffnct, the door was opened (went through the act of being opened) at six. 2. btc %\\x tfi tJOtt mir geoffnet iuorben, the door was opened by me. To express the state resulting from a previous action, rather than the act itself, fein is used instead of tuerbett (106, 1): as, 1. bte %\\x tuar urn fed)§ tUjr geoffnet, the door was open (had been previously opened) at six o'clock. Many intransitive as well as transitive verbs may be used impersonally in the passive voice, the subject e£ being omitted when the inverted order is used : as, 1. t§ ttmrbe gcftern abenb gcian^t, there was dancing last night. 2. geftem abenb nmrbe getangt, last night there was dancing. The passive voice is much less common than in English. It is avoided by using man (68, 1), (affen (80, 2, 202), a reflexive verb (18, 3), or the present infinitive active: as, 1. man fagt, ^a\ er arm fet, he is said to be poor. 2. man §at tfjn fingen Ijorett, he was heard singing (80, 2). 3. man t)at iljn lommen (affen, they have had him co?ne. 4. id) mill bir 83itd)er fdjidcn laffen, / will have books sent to you. 5. er Vafyt etn fgan§ bon mir bantu, he is having a house built by me. 6. id) Ijabe bent ®nauen tttva§ $u trtnfeu gcben taffen, I have had some- thing given the boy to drink. 7. laffen Sie bon fid) fyihren! let yourself be heard fro?n. 8. fo (a§ mat f)bren ! let us hear it, then. 9. c§ taftt fid) ntdji lengnen, it is not to be denied. 1 o. ob er fjtcr ifr, fragt fid), whether he is here is the question. 1 1 . e3 tft ntdjt $n em^f eljlen, it is not to be recommended? 1 With 182, 183, cf. 176, 177, where the position of the past participle is in- dicated by a star (*). 2 Cf . " A house to let." THE PASSIVE VOICE 107 Exercise 102, German into English 1. 2)u bift itid^t r>on betnem Sefjrer gelobt toorben, toeil bu i mcfji fleifjig getoefen bift. 2. Sa, SDcama, aber man l)at unS fo btete @ebid)te au^toenbig gu lernen gegeben! 3. £eute unb geftern fjat man un§ faft ben gan^en Sag getabett, tocil totr ittdjt fletfctg feien. 4. 9cun, ba totr im ©tymnafium finb, toirb ber Seljrer bofe auf un£, toenn totr nid)t iminer fleijug lernen. 5. 2)er Seljrer t)at recx)t, unb toenn ifjr trier) t flet^iger toerbet, fo toerbet ifjr natitrtid) beftraft toerben. 6. 23ir miiffen rjeute mor* gen fef)r fletjgig arbeiten, benn unfre beiben 9lufgaben finb nod) ntdjt abgefdjrieben. 7- 5lber e3 fragt fictj, ob toir rjeute aE bk 9lufgaben abfdjreiben fbnnen. 8. ^eben Sag muf3 man fie alle abfdjreiben, benn ber Sefjrer lafjt ftcf) nidjt leicfjt Don un3 $na- ben itberreben. 9. Unb toenn er fid) nidjt itberreben lagt, fo totrb man tmmer nad)fi£en miiffen, um nod) ein ©ebidjt au^toett* big ^u lernen. 10. iPcorgen fjaben toir oielleidjt rein ©ebidjt, 5U * lernen, toeil rjeute abettb getan^t toerben totrb. ii. 2lber man tjat un£ rjeute fdjtoere 5lufgaben gefteEt. Exercise 103, English into German 12. If you are not more diligent, Charles, you will be blamed ^ by your teacher. 13. But if I learn my lesson, I shall cer- tainly not be punished. 14. Fred was punished yesterday be- cause he had not learned his poem. 15. A poem has to be learned (man muf; lernen) by heart every day. 16. For our teacher will not be easily persuaded by a small boy. 17. If our lesson is not learned, we must stay after school to learn it. 18. I cannot copy this poem, for my book has not been found (r)at fid) nidjt gefunben). 19. Your book must be found (inufj gefunben toerben), and you boys will have to go to school to-morrow. 20. For if you do not go, you will be punished because you are not more diligent. io8 A GERMAiX GRAMMAR Lin. THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS I (192) Review 22, 1, 28, 1, 30, 1, 2, 32, I? 2, 72, i- 4> 74, 2-4, 76, 1. In the strong verbs the past indicative and often the past par-, ticiple are formed by a change of stem vowel (9(B(aut), as in the strong verbs in English (22, 1, 28, 1 ; cf. "fall, fell, fallen," "rise, rose, risen"). Pres. Infill. Pres. Indie. 2, 3 Sing. Imp v. 2 Sing. Past Indie. Past Subjv. Past Partic. Meaning a i a fungen fang-ft, -t fang(e) fing fmge gefangen catch tjangen f)ang-ft, -t f)ang(e) Wm fringe getjangen hang,'mtr. a te a bfafen m-m, -t bta§, btafe hik§ btiefe gebfafen blow braten brat-ft, brSt brat(e) brtet briete gebratcn 1-oast fatten m-% -t fali(e) fiet fiele gefatten 1 fall fatten balt-ft, Ijatt hatt(e) tjtett tjielte getjatten hold laffen taff-eft, 2 lajs-t taB tiej? tie^e getaffen let, allow raten rat-ft, rat rat(e) net riete geraten advise, d. ftfjtafen fatSf-jl, -t fcf)laf(e) fdjtief frf)Xiefe gefdjtafen sleep oatfen bacf-ft, -t bacf(e) u biif bu!e ft gebatfen bake fasten faljr-ji, -t fabr(e) fiif>r fuhre gefatjren 1 go, drive graben grab-ft, -t grab(e) grub grube gegraben dig taben tab-jl, -t tab(e) I«b tube getaben load taben tab-eft, -et lab-fi, -t tab(e) fabcte titb labete (Ilbe getaben invite ft^affen fcrjaff-ft, -t frf)aff(e) fdjuf jebfife geftfiaffen create fct)tagen Wh-% -t jd)tag(e) fdjtitg 1*cf)t5ge gestagen strike tragen trag-fi, -t trag(e) tritg trUge getragen carry ttmcfjfen )vad)\-(e\)t f -t ttmefife 3 \vutf)§ roil d)je gefoarfjfen 1 grow wafdjen tt>afcf>-(e)ft, -t toafd)(e) mitfet) tnUfd)e gctt>aftf)cn wash 1 Inflected with fein (30, 1). 2 OrlaH 3 Or tvad THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS I 109 Exercise 104, German into English 1. %o& SBilb meine3. S5etter^ SSilfjetm, ba$ an biefer SBanb f)ing, ift f)eruntergef alien. 2. ©eftern ift er m %i)<§ eingelaben raorben. 3. 2$ir fatten eine fdjon gebratene (&cm§ unb nem 6acfene§ S8xot 4. Gr l)at geftern abenb bet un£ gefd)lafen, after er fcfjldft me gut 5- ©em Strgt rjat if)m geraten, fortmgeljen, unb er ift fdjon nad) £)re3ben gefafyren. 6. 9J?ein fletner SBru* ber ®ar( fjangt an if)m mit gan3em ^er§en unb fjctlt tfm fur einen alteren SBruber. 7- @r raollte mit if)m fafjrett, aber id) fann irjit nict)t fo allctn geljen taffem 8. 3d) (iefj bem Clemen uom ©cljneiber einen neuen Dtocf madjen, benn fjeute abenb gibt eS em fcfiorte^ ^ortgert 9. Um raiemet Uf)r fdngt ba$ ^onjert an? 10. 11m acl)t Wqt. 2)a fcf)(dgt 7 3 fitnf. 11. Unb tjter ift Start, raie er geraadjfen ift! 12. SBitte, Start, ruafct) beine |janbe unb trag biefen S3rtcf gum (Sdmcibcr! 13- SSenn bein 9?orf nidjt fertig ift, fo mufjt bu Ijeute abenb biefclben Eleiber tragcn rate geftern. 14. $omm gletd) nad) §aufe f Start. SSie fait ber SBinb bldft! Exercise 105, English into German 15. The theater begins at a quarter of eight. 16. You ought not to go to the theater, for you do not sleep well. 17. Let lis stay (98, 3) at home to-night, the wind blows so cold. 18. To-morrow we can go driving (80, 4) through the woods if the day is warmer. 19. I advise you to stay at home to-morrow, for our good old friend William Smith will be in- vited to dinner. 20. Shall I wear the same clothes as now? 21. You will have to wear the same clothes; you have no new ones (feme neuen). 22. My older sister is having (lafet ftcfi) a new dress made. 23. Yes, and I shall have a new dress made for you. 24. Is that your younger brother Charles ? He has grown so, that I really do not know who it is. 25. Charles will carry your book to Anna when he has washed his hands. no A GERM AX GRAMMAR LIV. THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS II (192) Review 22, I, 28, I, 30, I, 2, 32 , 1, 2, 72, 1-4, 74, 2- 4, 76, 1. Pres. Infin. Pres. Indie. 2, 3 Sing. Impv. 2 Sing. Past Indie. Past Subjv. Past Partic. Meaning e a e effeu iff-eft,ifc-t,ift-t IB af? afc gegeffen eat freffcn friff-eft, 1 frifs-t f*B fr«i? fratfe gefreffen eat gebeu gtb-ft,gib-ft,-t gib, gib gs& gabe gegebert give (efett fief-(ef)t, -t lies 153 lafe gelefeu read fefjett (ief)-ft, -t ftef) 2 fat) $¥ gefeljen 7. step treten tritt-ft, tritt tr?tt trat trate getreren 3 uergcffen uergtft-t, 4 -t rjergtft t»ergafe ttergafte tiergeffcu forget e a firemen brid)-ft, -t brtd) brad) bradje gebrodjen break Ijetfett Pf-ft, -t E,itf W fyiilfe 5 geljolfctt help, D. uefjmeu mmm-ft, -t nimm uafym rtafyme genommen take fpretfjen fj3rirf)-ft, -t fprtdj fprarf) fprScfje gefprocfjeu speak ftefjfen ftieljl-ft, -t ftid)t piW ftof)le 5 geftofjlen steal fterbeu ftirb-ft, -t ftirb ftarb ftiirbe 5 geftorben 3 die trcffen triff-ft, -t triff traf trafe getroffeit hit, meet Derbergen nerbirg-ft, -t Derbtrg rjcrbarg Oerbiirge 5 oerborgen conceal roerfeu toirf-ft, -t tt>irf worf loiirfe 5 getoorfctt throw e bewegcn betteg-ft, -t beroeg(e) betuog beruoge bettJogen induce fjebcn Ijeb-jt, -t fyebe,l)eb' JjoB f)obe,f)fibe 5 gefjoben heave, lift The other verbs of this class are as follows (194) : e a e t genefett, get well; 3 gefdjefjett, happen; 3 tttcffcit, measure. e a : befcljleu, command; berftett, burst ; 3 empfeljlctt, recommend; erfdjretfen, ^ terrified ; z geltctt, be worth; fdjelten, scold; ftedjeu, prick; tocrberben, spoil; ttJerben, j«*. coo: fed)tett,y%-/z/y ftetfjten, braid; meffett, milk; auetten, gush; 3 ftfjerctt, shear; fdjmelgett, melt; 2, fd)tt)eflcn, swell; 2, ttiebcn, weave. 1 Or frifj-t 2 Or, exclamatory, ftet)(e) ! /^/ 3 Inflected with fettt (30, 1). 4 Or tiergiffeft. 6 or ii distinguishes the form from the present, THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS II III Exercise 106, German into English i. 9rnn, grt$ r ctlle £iere nnb alle S5oget freffett, mafyrenb mir SLRenfc^en effen, t>erfte^ft bu? 2. SSenn ein SJtenfd) ifet toie ein £ier, fo fagt man Don il)tn f bag er freffe. 3. ©t6 mir bein fd)dne3 neue3 23nd) f morin man fo bieleS lefen lann! 4. SBetl bein guter $ater fo trie! gelefen l)at, fo foCfft bn attdj oie( lefen, obgletdj man oft bergijst, toa$ man gelefert tjat. 5- Stef) bm 9llten, ber am genfter fi|t! 6. (£r bittet mid), baf$ id) tl)m ijelfe, benn er fyabe fid) ben 5lrm gebrodjen. 7. 9cimm bein 23ud) nnb tntt in beine£ S5ater§ Qtmmer, w° tofr Qeftern abenb lafen! 8. ett f fiil)lett, (jafcen, fjiiren, or fcljeu, the present infinitive is translated by the English infinitive in -ing: as, 1. er fanb fie fittgen, he found her singing. 2. er Ijatre eineit $aum bovt ftefjen, /z^ /z^# tree standing there. Pres. Infin. Pres. Indie. 2, 3 Sing. Impv. 2 Sing. Past Indie. Past Subjv. Past Partic. Meaning i a ' begittnett begutn-ft, -t beginn(e) begamt begbune 1 begomten begin win gewtttnett geroinn-ft f -t gett)inn(e) gettiantt gerootme 1 gettJonuen rinnen rittn-ft, -t rittn(e) ratm rcirtrte geromten 2 run, flow fdjn>im= fd)tt)imm-ft,-i fd)tnim= fcfynxtmnt fd)tt)om= gefrf)ttiom= men m(e) me 1 men 2 swim finneit ftnn-ft, -t jtnn(e) ftttttt fdttrte 3 gefonnen think 4 ftrimtett fpitm-ft, -t foitm(e) fpamt fpbtme 1 gefpottttett spin • t fiittbctt btnb-eft, -et binb(e) ft battb banbe u gebttttbett bind ftnbett ftnb-eft, -et ffrtbe fanb fartbe gefunbett find gettngett - — ,geUng-t getattg getdnge geiungeu 5 succeed fdjttmtbett fd)rt>iiib-eft, -et fd)nrinb(e) ftflttmub fdjirjdnbe gefrf)ttmtt= ben 2 vanish fittgett ftng-ft, -t fmg(c) fang fdrtge gefuttgett sing ftufett ftnf-ft, -t fin!{e) fan! fdnfe gefmtfett 2 sink fpringett fpring-ft, -t foring(e) forattg grange geftmutgen 2 spring trinfen trinf-ft, -t trinf(e) tranf trdnie getnutfett drink winben ttunb-eft, -et nrirtbe Wttitb mdnbe gettmttbett wind jttmtgen $itnng-ft f -t £TOing(e) swung jindnge gesnmugett force The other verbs of this class are as follows (194): t a tt: briugett, press, crowd; 2 flingett, sound (mir.)\ rtttge tt, wrestle wring (tr.) ; fdjlmgctt, sling; fdjttiittgett, swing. 1 The b represents an earlier ii. 2 Inflected with feirt (30, 1). 3 Or forme (Il2l). 4 meditate. h Generally mpersona , with D. JO, x). THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS III 1 1 3 Exercise 108, German into English i. Um toelcfje Qeit ^eginnt ba$ Sweater? 2. (£3 \vixb haib beginnen, unb toir finb _ ge§mungen, gfeid) gu gerjen. 3- 3Sor^ iiber firatft bu, ©lifabetf)? 4- 3^ benfe baron, tute mir bie Bremen au£ ben 5iugen ranncn, al3 icfj ba3 erfte SDZal im Stfjea^ ter tear. 5. SDte 2lugen memer <2d)raefter fdjmammen aud) in Xranen ; baS Stud (play) mar munberfdjbn. 6. Sn einem fleinen (Garten fpann ein ffictbtym unb fang. 7- ©in jungcr Dittter, bem e3 gclungen Wat, ifjre Siebe 5U geminuen, Kefj fetn SJSferb iiber bie Wlauw fpringen. 8. (£r fab fie fpinnen unb tat r ate roollte er tf)r bie §anbe 6inben. 9. 8ie glanbte fic6j in bringenber [imminent) ©efat)r unb fan! auf bie ftnie. 10. £er Slitter aber marf einige fdjbne ^rdn^e, bie er gemunben fjattc, ibr um ben £eib. 11. S)aim marf ber Sitter fid) mit irjr auf<§ Spferb, unb bie beiben r>erfd)roanben in bem grofeen 2Ba(be. 12. 2Sir merben beute abenb etmas fefyr ^crjone3 fet)en. 13. Set) ()abe grofjen £nrft, trinfen mir (98, 3) ein ®taS falter Staffer, efje mir bineingeben ! 14. 3eftt mtiffen mir unfre ^(a£e fudjen. 15. 5Ccfj, tote fdjbn flingt bie 9Jcuftf! Exercise 109, English into German 16. To-night you will find something pretty at the theater. 17. Drink this coffee before you go. 18. That sounds (flingt) good, for I like to drink coffee. 19. The play will be very sad, and your eyes will swim in tears. 20. The tears run from my eyes if I am very sad or very happy. 21. Will they sing to-night ? 22. They will not sing, but the music will be beau- tiful. 23. Does the theater begin at eight o'clock (58,5)? 24. The music will begin at a quarter of eight, and I think we shall be at home at half past eleven. 25. If we do not go at once, we shall not be able to find our seats before the music begins. 26. I fear that the music has already begun. H4 A GERMAN GRAMMAR LVI. THE STRONG VERBS , CLASS IV (192) Review 22, x, 28, 1, 30, i, 2, 32, 1, 2, 72 *, 2, 74, 2-4, 76, 1. ^ _ ' Pres. Indie. Pres. Infin. 1 2, 3 Sing. Impv. 2 Sing. Past Indie. Past Subjv. Past Partic. Meaning ei i i beiftett beiB-(ef)t, -t beig(e) &ife btffe gebifjen bite i gleidjeu gfetct)-ft, -t gteid)(e) glttf) gltrf)e geglitfjett be like, D. greifen gretf-ft, -t greif(e) griff griffe gegriffen seize letben (eib-eft, -et leib(e) att ittte qtiitttn suffer rei^en rei§-(ef)t f -t retB(e) rife rifje gertffen tear reiten reit-eft, -et reit(e) rttt rttte gerttten 1 ride frijletdjett fcf)feid)-ft, -t fcf)(eicf)(e) sm% fd)(id)e gefcfjlit^eu 1 sneak fdjneibeu fd)tieib-eft, -et fd)neib(e) fdjnitt Td)rtitte gefdjuitten cut ftfjreiteu jd)reit-eft, -et fd)reit(e) f^ritt fdjritte gefdjritten 1 stride ftreitcn ftreit-eft, -et ftreit(e) ftrttt [tritte geftnttett strive ci te te bieibeu bleib-ft, -t bteib(e) OUeb bliebe geblieben 1 re?nain letfjen (eif)-ft, -t teif)(e) fteJ» Uelje geltefjen lend fdjeinen |d)ein-ft, -t jdjein(e) fcfjten fd)iene gefdjienen shine 2 fdjreiben ftf)reib-ft, -t fdjreib(e) frfvrieb jcfjrtebe gefdjriebeu write fd)reteu frfjrei-ft, -t icfjrei(e) frfjrie fcf)riee gefd)rt'ett cry ftf)tt)etgen jd)tt>eig-ft, -t fdjroeig(e) frfiniteg l'd)intege gefdjttriegen be silent fteigen fteig-ft, -t ftetg(e) ftteg fttege geftiegen 1 climb treiben treib-ft, -t treib(e) trteb triebe getrtebeu drive tjergct^en »er$etl)-ft> -t oer 3 ett)(e) oer^ie^ t)er$iel]e tieratefjen pardon The other verbs of this class are as follows (194): ci i i: fitfj beffetftett, apply yourself ; erbteidjett, expire; 1 Qhittn, glide, slide; 1 frteifett, pinch; freifrfjett, scream; pfetfen, whistle; fd)letfen, whet; fdjletfeen, slit; jdjmetfeen, smite, fling; fpfetfeen, split; ftrcit^en, pass (intr.),i smooth (tr.); ttJeidjen, yield 1 ei ic ie: gebeifyen, thrive; 1 tneibett, shun; preifen, praise; retben, rub; fdjetbett, part (tr.), depart; 1 fpcten, spit; roeifen, show. 1 Inflected with jein (30, 1). 2 Or appear. THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS IV 115 Exercise no, German into English i. ©eftern f)at ein grower §unb meitten jitngften 2kuber in bie §anb gebtffen. 2. £)ie £)anb fdjmer^te tt)n fefjr, unb er fc£)rte laitt; er mollte ftcf) aber nid)t tn3 £)an3 tragen laffen, fon* bent etfte gleicfj in fetrt gimmer. 3. 9Q?eine ©ctjraefter ritt g(eid) in bie &tabt unb lief} unfern alten 9lrgt fommen. 4. Dbgleid) ber Softor ifjn in bie §anb fdntitt, fdjrie ber SUeine gar . nid)t 5. (£r mitrbe mit bent §unbe gefpiett bjaben, aber man (tefj bie- fen gleid) rjinterS §au3 inS gelb treiben. 6. Start ffcielt gent mit £wtben, aber er fyatte biefen nicrjt ftreidjeht fallen. 7- 2H3 ber £)oftor in ba<$ 3^ mmer fd)ritt unb bent ®ar( bie £aare au$ bent ©eftdjte ftricfj, ftieg biefer fdjtoeigenb' aitS bent 23ette ; er mollte nidjt int SBette liegen bletben (112). 8. $)er 5llte aber lief3 ifjtt ntdjt au3ge()en unb nutate ibjn faft in3 35eti ireiben. 9. G£r foil bem S5oftor neqeirjen, roeit ber meift, tva$ ant beften tft 10. 3d) ntbdjte if)n gent feljen, id) I)abe einige SBitctjer mit* gebradjt, bie id) tfjm leifjeu mill. 11. Wix fctjetnt, ber Sunge gteicfjt feinent tapfern SBruber. 12. SSergeitjen ©ie mir! 3d) mill tjier bleiben, bi3 ertier-ft, -t oerUer(e) oertor tierlBre oertorett lose Sicken m-\t, -t Ste^(e) m she gesogen draw 11 a, 6, ft roagen tt)ag-ft, -t tt)ag(e) toog 3 roBge 3 getoogett 3 weigh, tr. betrfigen betrug-ft, -t betrug(e) betrog betrBge betrogen deceive tfigett tSg-ft, -t Ifig(e) tog toge gclogen lie± The other verbs of these classes are as follows (194): ie (Class V): fteben, seethe, boil;* ftieben, scatter; 1 triefett, drip;* ttnegett, weigh (intr.). a, 0, ii (Class VI): $&xen f ferment; 3 \tf)\v&xtn t fester; eribfdjen, 3 go out, be extinguished; 1 ffirett, choose? 1 Inflected with fettt (30, 1). 3 Sometimes weak (172, 4). 2 Or move (30, 1). 4 tell a lie. THE STRONG VERBS, CLASSES V AND VI 1 17 Exercise 112, German into English 1. |)ier finb meine fdjonen 23 lumen, roillft b\x SSaffer barouf gtefjen? 2. (£$ toerbriefjt mid) fef)r, fie nidjt fritter gefefyen gu fyaben. 3- ©te finb geroig fcfjon, unb ba3 gan^e Qimmer riedjt banacf). 4. <*paft bu etntge 23lumen toerloren? 5. Set, jebe3 Safjr berliere id) ein paar. 6. (B friert jegt, unb id) mug bie ©lumen t)om gcnfter fdjteben unb ba$ genfter fdjtie^en. 7. Sm Sinter, roenn bie $ogel nad) ©iiben geflogen finb, jtefjett roir in bie &tabt 8. 2£ir fliefjen nor (Stfjnee unb @& 9. 3m grufc ling after, menu bie flatter fprie^en, gterjen roir roieber auf£ Sanb I)inau§; benn roir lie6en ba§ fitefsenbe 2Saffer, bie gritnen SBaume unb bie SSoget. 10. 3n unferm XSalbt fdjtefjt man M* nen $ogel, aber jebcm bieten roir bie ©elegenljcit, in feinem tvfy len ©djatten ju fi^en ober fpagteren §u geljen. 11. 3m SSinter friedjen feme SSurmer auf ber (Srbe, unb feine $oge( fliegen iiber unfern ®bpfen. 12. £)a<3 Gst3 biegt bie ©pigen ber SBaume, unb bie (Srbe fiefjt au<3, a(3 ob fie fdjtafe. 13. 5lber bu betritgft bid), ntct)t roaf)r, roenn bu fagft, ber SBinter fei nid)t fcfjon? 14. Set* roo()t, bu liigft nidjt, unb id) fage mit bir, ber SBinter ift bod) and) fcrjon. Exercise 113, English into German 15. Have you poured water on all your flowers? 16. It will vex you if you lose some of them. 17. Close the window, please, and push the flowers to it (baran). 18. If it freezes, I can push them from it. 19. When shall you move into town? 20. We shall move when the snow comes. 21. When spring (171, 3) comes, shall you move to the country again? 22. Yes, and you ought to move with us. 23. Mother offers you rooms at our house. 24. Thank you, I hope I shall not lose this op- portunity of seeing (see sentence 10) you. 25. And we shall enjoy (geniefjen) the fields and the woods. 26. I think it will freeze to-night. 27. If it freezes, you will lose your flowers. n8 A GERMAN GRAMMAR LVm. THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS VII (192) Review 22, 1, 28, 1, 30, 1, 2, 32, 1, 2, 72, 1-4, 74, 2-4, 76, 1, 10 1, 1, 101 3 The verbs here are irregular. Some of them are among the most important in the language. Pres. Infin. Pres. Indie. 2, 3 Sing. Impv. 2 Sing. Past Indie. Past Subjv. Past Partic. Meaning Bitten bitt-eft, -et Mtte, me ut bate gebetett beg, ask gefsSren gebter-ft, -t gebier gebar gebare gebdren bear gelj^n 1 geMt, -t geb(e) 0tng ginge gegangen 2 g° gltmmett 3 glimm-ft, -t gUmm(e) glomm glbmme gegtommen glim?ner Imuen bau-ft, -t foau(e) JjteB biebe gef)auen hew, cut ^ci^ctt tyiMW, -t beiB(e) t)te^ fyiefte geljet^ett be called flimmen 3 fUmm-ft, -t flimm(e) Homm fiomme geftommeu 2 cfanb fommett fomm-ft, -t fontm lam fame gefommett 2 co?ne laufen lauf-ft, -t tauf(e) Kef liefe getaufen 2 run liegen iieg-ft, -t liege, lieg' % lage getegeit lie* rufen rilf-fi, -t ruf(e) ricf riefe geriifctt call, cry faufen fauf-ft, -t faitf(e) Mf foffe gefoffett drink b fang en faug-ft, -t faug(e) fog fbge gefogen suck flatten fcbatl-ft, -t f^att(e) frfiattte fcfraflete pfdjaflt fdjoU wm geftfjotfett ring fdmau&en 6 fd)naub-fl,-t fcf)iiaub(e) fdjnob jtf)nobe gefdjttoBen snort fdjmBreit fd)roor-ft, -t fc^mor(e) ftfjumr fd)UsSr fdjmttre gefdjmijrett swear fttjCtt fifrfflft -t m, w f«f fafee gefeffett sit ftefj(e)n 7 W* "* We) ftanb [tdnbe ftihtbe geftanbett stand ftofjen PMef)t> -t Pl(e) fitefj ftiefce geftff^ett push, hit tim tii-ft, -t tS(e) m tate getan do 1 Irregular for gangen (Class I, 108). 2 Inflected with feht (30, 1). 3 Sometimes weak (172, 4). 4 be situated. 5 Of animals. weak (172, 4). 7 Irregular for ftanben (and ftanb for jhmb, Class I, 108). Generally THE STRONG VERBS, CLASS VII 119 Exercise 114, German into English i. SJtem fetiger Setter, ®art Gutter, mnrbe am 15. Suit 1834 gu Berlin ge6oren. 2. 9J?ein ©rofjaater rjiefc grtebrtd) Soulier. 3. 3d) felbft rjeige grtebrtcfy, unb mem altefter ©otm fjetfjt audj griebrid). 4. 3t)r Setter mar fefjr beritrjtnt, rttcfjt matrc? 2)ie a§ £tnb fetner Gutter, she gave the child to its mother. Adverbs generally stand in the order of time, place, ?nanner, those of time commonly preceding direct noun objects; with two or more adverbs of the same kind, the more general (less emphatic) precedes the more definite (see sentence 2). 1 An adverb of degree stands before the word it limits : as, 1. er gab tntr geftern auf ber ©tra^e gleicfj etnett 2tofel, he iimnediately gave me an apple yesterday in the street. 2. e§ ftttg geftern nnt gefjn Ufjr an 2 fefjr ftarl an regnen, it began yesterday at ten o'clock to rai7i very heavily. yiifyt and other negatives are either themselves emphatic and stand after the other modifiers of the verb and negative the verb, or stand before and negative other emphatic modifiers (such as prepositional phrases, predicate adjectives, adverbs of ti7ne, etc.): 1 as, 1. id) gab tl)m ba§ $ud) nid)t, I did not give him the book. 2. fie tft ntrfjt nttt tfym fortgegangen, she did not go away with him. 3. t§ ttrnr nttr nidjt ganj neu, it was not entirely new to me. 4. l)eute r ntrfjt geftern, to-day, etc. ; ntd)t nttd), fonbern bid), not, etc. x Any word may be made emphatic by being put at the beginning or at or toward the end of its clause. 2 See 92, 1-3, 94, 1. THE NORMAL ORDER I 21 When, in indirect discourse, ba$, that, is omitted, the sub- ordinate clause takes the normal order: as, i. er fagt, baf? cr ffet^tg fet, he says that he is diligent. 2. er fagt, er fei ftetfjig, he says he is diligent. Exercise 116, German into English i. (Sin alter ffllcmn tjatte einen 33rtef errjaiten unb foflte i£m beantroorten. 2. Sr fonnte aber nicrjt fctjreiben unb roar barjer in grower SBerlegettljeit. 3- @x ging 511 etnem fetner 9kd)barn, urn itjn urn 9vat 511 bitten. 4, ©em Sftadjbar net iron, 5U bent alien SfteSner §u getjen, benn ber fd)riebe oft SBrtefe fitr anbre £eute. 5. 3)er Sftann folgte bem $late fetne^ 9?ad)bar3 unb ging gum 90tener. 6. SDiefer aber antroorrete : „(£g tut mir leib, aber id) roerbe roorjl rjeute Sfyreu SBrief nicfjt fdjreiben !on- nen, benn id) bin lafjm." 7. £)er 2Ute fagre erftaunt : „anb." 8. £er Slfener erroiberte: „;3ct) aucfj." 9. „9(ber mctne £)anbfd)rift ift ferjr fd)led)t; niemanb a(3 id) felbft !ann fie lefen." 10. „£)te Seutc miiffen nad) mir jdjideu, unt fid} bte Q3rtefe nortefen ftu laffeu." 11. „3dj !ann alfo tjeute Sf)ren S3rtef nid)t frfjreiben." Exercise 117, English into German 12. The poor man had received some letters, but could not answer them. 13. He went therefore to a neighbor and asked him for advice. 14. His neighbor sent (fenben) him to an old sexton, for he himself could not write. 15. The sexton said, "I am lame now and able to write no letters." 16. But the old man answered (errotbent), "A lame man can write letters." 17. "For people write with the hand and not with the feet." 18. "Yes, but people cannot read my handwriting, and must have it read to them" (see 10). 19. And he was not willing to write the letter. A GERMAN GRAMMAR IX. THE INVERTED ORDER In the inverted order the verb stands before the subject: In interrogative or in exclamatory sentences introduced by some part of the predicate : as, i. Ijat er tfjm ba§ 23ud) gegefcen ? did he give him the book? 2. ti)p gab er tfjm ba§ 23ud) ? where did he give him the book? 3. ttmtttt fam er ait? when did he arrive? 4. toa§ Ijat er ittdjt getatt ? what has he not done ? 5. ttite Ijat e£ bodj geregttet! but how it has rained! In imperative sentences : as, 1. tefen Ste ba§ $ud) tttdjt ! do not read the book. 2. feteifc bit 311 ^paufe ! you stay at home (74, 4). In conditional sentences without tuenn (151): as, 1. ttmre fie mtr I)ter! if she were only here ! 2. Ijatte er bid), gefterit gcfitnbett, had he found you yesterday : When any word except a conjunction precedes the subject (cf. 11, 1): as, 1. Ijier Ijat er mtdj gefuttbeit, it was here he found me. 2. gefterit fafj id) tfjtt tm (Garten, yesterday I saw hint in the garden. 3. ba§ SKeffe? fcerlor id) tm ^arfe, the knife I lost in the park. 4. aI3 er juriicffattt, fal) er ttttdj, when he returned, he saw me. 5. fonft Ija&e idj mitt) getrrt, otherwise I was mistaken. 6. bent ^tefie folgettb, fain tdj Ijterfjer, following the thief I came here. In the inverted order, if the subject is a noun or a demonstrative (emphatic) pronoun, it is often separated from its verb by an unemphatic word or phrase : as, 1. gab tfjm bte Srfjiuefter ba§ 23udj ? did his sister give him the book? 2. baitn fattbett fid) tmmer bte ^itfammett, bte „gttt fyrcunb" mit qittattber luareit, then those that were good friends with each other were always to be fowid together. When a word like bod), jebodj / ', or ettbltdj is followed by a pause, the normal order is used (120, 1) : as, 1. bodj fam er ttt3 $au§, nevertheless he came into the house. 2. bod), er fam ttt3 £Qa\X§, still, he came into the house. THE INVERTED ORDER 1 23 Exercise 118, German into English 1. Sn einem £)orfe ttmrbe einmal ein alter Waiter blinb. 2. W\i bem fleinen 2>orfe tnar er genau befannt, unb fo ging er ben ganjen Xag ofjrte giifjrer umfier. 3. Gine§ 2Ibenb3 aber ttmrbe feine Stocfjter pI5$Kdj frcmf, unb aufjer bem Wat raar niemanb 511 §>aufe. 4. 2Hfo mufete er felbft auSgeljett, urn §itfe §u futfjen. 5. SSaS follte er }e|t tun? 6. 9hm ftect'te er etn brennenbe3 Sidjt in eine Sarcrne, nafjm fie in bie §anb unb. ging auf bie Strafje. 7. £a begegnete irjm ein alter SBefannter au3 ber Stabt. 8. @(eid) (jiett il)it biefcr an unb fagte: „©inb <2ie ein fluger SDfann?" 9. „3o lja6' id) immer geglaubt, aber ©ie finb fdjon in ^inbtjeit berfaften." 10. „33cfannf(id) finb ®ie blinb, aber jetjt tragen Sie eine £aterne ntit einem brennenben Sidjte." 11. rr 3l)nen faun e3 roofyt gar nidjt [)elfcn." 12. „3Sa3 fur eine Xorfyeit ift bat?" 13. w @ui folder £or bin id) nicTjt," anhoortete ber 9(ttc, „gfau6en 8ie e3 nidjt!" 14. „SDa3 Sidjt trage id) nidjt fi'tr mid), fonbern firr Sie unb 3tj)re<§g(eidjen." 15. „2)enn fo fonnen ^ie mid) fefjert unb mir au£ bem 3Sege getjen." Exercise 119, English into German 16. In this old village lived two blind peasants. 17. The whole day they could go round alone. 18. But the whole evening they had to remain in their little rooms. 19* One evening one of them (oon ifjnen) became very ill. 20. Imme- diately he wanted to have a doctor come. 21. But how could his blind brother seek help? 22. With a light in his hand he went out into the street. 23. Soon he met one of his old friends. 24. "What are you doing with this light?" asked the friend. 25. "Do the blind (bie 33(inben, 54, 2) carry lights in the street?" 26. "Without this light you could not see me, my good friend," answered the old man. 27. "When you see my light, you can get (gerjen) out of my way" (see 15). 124 A GERMAN GRAMMAR I LXI. THE TRANSPOSED ORDER 1 In the transposed order the verb (in compound tenses the auxiliary) stands at the end of its clause. The transposed order is used in subordinate clauses, after subordinating con- junctions (102, 1, 104, 1), relative or interrogative pronouns {66, 1, 2), and relative or interrogative adverbs (87, 1) : as, 1. tdj fefje, ba% er fjeute Ijter iff, I see that he is here to-day. 2. tri) tocif?, iccr l)eitte Ijter tft, I know who is here to-day. 3. bn£ Bud), tt)orau§ bit jc^t tieft, the book that you now read in. 4. (fief},) ttrie c§ bocf) geregnet fyat I but {see) how it has rained! 2 When two or more infinitive forms stand together in a subordinate clause, the tense auxiliary (fjafiett, 26, 2, 78, 4, or toerben, 32, 1) is not put at the end of the clause, but before the first infinitive or its modifier, according to the emphasis (120 1 ): as, 1. tocnn itf) tt>erbe fcctteut gefyett mitffen, if I shall have to go a begging. 2. uieit er i^n geftertt t\at (or fjat gefiern) fcfjreiben loffen ttioflett, because he wanted to have it written yesterday (80, 1-3). 3 In the future passive and in the future perfect, when subordinate, the auxiliary (roerbeit, 32, 1) stands preferably before the participle : as, 1 . ttieit bie $rtefe tuerben gcf djriefien tocrben, because the letters will be written (the close repetition of roerben is avoided). 2. tijeit er imrb gcf djrte&en ^of»en, because he will have written. 4 In a subordinate clause, when the meaning is clear, the tense auxiliary Ctjaben, 26, 2, or feitt, 30, 1) is often omitted: as, 1. ba§ &au§ t tt)orin,tt)ir gefe&t itnb geliebt (Jjabett), the house, etc. 2. bie $rau, bei ber ttfj geblieben (bin), the woman, etc. 5 In a subordinate clause, if the subject is a noun or a demonstrative (emphatic) pronoun, it is often preceded by an unemphatic word or phrase (cf. 122, 5): as, 1. ttienn biff) bcin $rewtb gefeljeit fyattc, if your friend had seen you. 2, wentt bei ntir bie getuefen ware, if she had been at my house. THE TRANSPOSED ORDER 1 25 Exercise 120, German into English i. ©in ®cmfmcmn fjcttte jtoet Sofme, bon betteti ber erne etn i guter unb fletfu'ger ftnaue mar, ber jeben SOJorgctt urn fecp Uf)r aufftanb. 2. £)er anbre, ber fef)r faul tear, 6Ite6 6i3 gelm Ufjr tm SBette. 3. (SineS Sftorgenl fartb ber ffetfjtge Slnabe bor ber 5£itre be<3 <u fjaft gan^ redjt, $ater." 8. „9(6er mir fcr)eirtt f baft ber, ber ben ©eutel oerloren hat, mie id), tm S3ette fjcttte liegen bleiben fatten, menu er ba$ (Mb f)dtte Befallen tooEen." Exercise 121, English into German 9. Once there was a merchant that had two sons, William 2 and Frederic. 10. William, who was the more industrious of the two boys, rose every morning at half past six. 11. But Frederic did not rise till (nor) ten o'clock if they did not have him waked up. 12. One morning, when William had found a purse in front of the house, the father went up to Frederic's room and found him lying in bed. 13. He waked his son up and said, "You will have to go begging if you do not rise earlier." 14. "See what (roas) your brother has found because he always rises early." 15. "Yes, father," answered the sleepy boy, "but the person (ber) that lost the purse ought not to have risen so early." 16, "Then he would not have lost his money." 126 A GERMAN GRAMMAR LXII. THE GENITIVE CASE (84) As a rule, a noun in the genitive case should stand after the noun on which it depends ; but in proper names, includ- ing words like better, Dttfel, etc., and in poetry or in elevated style, it may precede the noun on which it depends: as, 1. ber $ruber be3 $rau(etn3, the brother of the yomig lady (better than be§ o"fauiein§ SSrober ; but, $ater3 $W§, father's house). 2. einer ^^rer f^reuttbe, one of your friends (cf. 126, 2, sentence 6). 3. bte3 tft tncttt §\\t, unb ba§ ift ber tnehteS SSruberg (or utib fetter tft ntetneg $ruber3), this is my hat, and that is the hat of my brother (or and that is my brother's). The genitive is generally used to express ^/"unless clearness requires a preposition: as, 1 . ein Wlann guteg (or gtttett) 9Jhtte3, a man of good spirit. 2. td) bin ftljver SJfteittung, / am of your opinion. 3. genug ber Srdnett, enough of tears. 4. id) bin ber 2Belt rnitbe, I am tired of the world. 5. fto(§ dllf feitt ^ferb, proud of his horse. 6. einige toon $f)tten, some of you (t>on used with two pronouns). 7. ®imig bott ^reuf?eu, King of Prussia (turn used with titles). 8. bie ©traj?en turn ^ari3, the streets of Paris (44, 4). 9. $txv ^rufeffor SftMer an§ Setpjig, Professor Mil Her of Leipzig. Proper names stand in apposition without inflection (for nouns denot- ing weight or measure, see 59, 1) : as, 1. ber Btabt 9tom, of the city of Rome; ber Stto'nat Wat, the month of May. 2. ber Olocf meine§ 55ruber3 ®att, the coat of my brother Karl. The genitive is used to express the indefinite time within which (cf. 128, 4, 130, 4): as, 1. ehte§ Xage§, one day, some day. 2. Sottntag£ f of a Sunday, Sundays, on Sunday. 3. tnorgctt^, in the morning; abenb3, in the evening; ttfldjtg (or be§ 9?adjt§, although 9fatd)t is feminine), at night, (adverbial genitives) 4. meiue3 2Btffen§, within my knowledge. THE GENITIVE CASE 1 27 Exercise 122, German into English 1. @g toarett ifjrer fieben. 2. 9cacf)mittagg ober and) a6enb§ famen fie oft auf bag ^tmmer meineg £3ruber3, um ^omerS SSerfe §u lefen. 3. ©iner con if)ncn f nameng &, ber ber ^ofjn eineS armen ^aufmanng roar, tear tnir ber Stebfte. 4. SSemt fie gufammen roaren, Bract)te mein Q3ruber metjrere £affen Coffee ober Xee herein. 5. Seber trartf aucfj ein, ^ruei ©lag fjeifce SJftld). 6. Um 20. §0ldrs, roafjrenb roir fo bet Xifdje faften, fam eitenben gufjeg SDoftor Stirctjboff aug 23onn, ^rofeffor ber ^bjlofoprjie art ber Unioerfitat, fjerein. 7. 9Sir atte fprangen auf imb ftartben ba f feineg SSorteg matfjttg. 8. (£r roar aber blofj roegen feineg (Sofjneg gefommen, ber em SD^ttglieb unferg SBereinS roar. 9. 2)er ^rofeffor fagte, bie Scrjroefter beg $naben, ein Slinb Oon fimf^efjn Safrren, retire rticrjt gu |>aufe. 10. &eg Scactjinittagg rotire fie auggegartgen uitb nttfjt ^urutf'gefommen. 11. ©in §ut f ben man im SSaibe gefunben fjatte, roare ber beg Slinbeg. 12. „9iiemanb roeift," fagte er, „ruag aug irjr roerben roirb, unb id) furcfjte fetjr, fie roirb «£mngerg (or oor hunger) fterben." 13. £>er ©or)n eilte nacfj §aufe, unb ein paar feiner greunbe ' gingen mil 14. SBafjrenb ber Dtacfjt fanb man bag Exercise 123, English into German 15. Where do your son's friends live? 16. Two of them live in the larger of those houses. 17. One of his friends lives in Dresden, and one of them is from Paris. 18. Morn- ings they walk in my neighbor's forest. 19. Afternoons they go up to the old castle. 20. Evenings, when they come home, they have a great appetite. 21. They eat three pounds of meat, and each drinks one or two cups of coffee. 22. An- other ((Sin anbrer) of his friends studies at (auf) the Univer- sity of (§u) Berlin. 23. Some day (126, 4) he will be a famous professor at (an) the university. 128 A GERMAN GRAMMAR LXIII. THE DATIVE CASE (86, 90) As a rule, the dative without a preposition is used to ex- press the indirect object unless clearness requires a preposi- tion: as, 1. gi& ntir nteinen (Stotf ! give me my cane. 2. e§ tft ntir angencfjm, it is agreeable to me. 3. fie tft btr treu, she is true to you. 4. er nafjttt nttr ha§ 3fteffer, he took the knife from me (29, 1). 5. tyzx tft eitt SSrtcf an Sttfabetfj, here is a letter to Elizabeth. . 6. Dcrfau'fen Ste ba§ ^pferb an mid) ! sell the horse to me. The dative often denotes the possessor or the person affected: as, 1. id) fyaue mir ben 9lrnt georodjen, I have broken my arm. 2. er faufte Mr hen Sifd), /z* bought the table for you. 3. ttteitt $ater tft mir geftorfceit, my father died on 7ne (to my harm). The dative is used with many intransitive verbs that in English are considered transitive, such as fcegeg'nen, meet; banfen, thank; bienen, serve; fofgeu, follow; gefalTen, please; gtauben, believe; ffetfen, help; rateu, advise; trauett, trust: as, 1. er foirb bir fofgeu, he will follow you. 2. man fiat nth* gerafeu, I have been advised. The dative with a preposition is used to express the definite time at which (cf. 126, 4, 130, 4): as, 1. an bent Xage nad) ber Sdjtadjt, on the day after the battle. 2. in 5tt)et SSodjen, in two weeks. 3. feit brei SaTjrcit tot f dead for three years (cf. 130, 7). 4. tJor oiefen $afjren, many years ago; tor einem donate, a 7nonth ago. When possible, to is expressed by the dative without a preposition (128, 1). Otherwise, of persons and to denote purpose (as, SSaffer 511m Srtnfen; ber SSeg gur (stabt) it is expressed by gu, to, with d.; of countries and towns (the distance of which made arrival uncertain), by the indef- inite nad), toward, with d.; before other objects, by an, to (to the side of ; 90, 3), auf, {up) to (90, 2), auf ♦ ♦ . %\\, toward, up to, or in, into (90, 1), with a. For toward see 86, 3, and gegeit, S8, 4: as, 1. §n tf)rent 33rttber, to her brother's ; auf ifjn 3U, up to him. THE DATIVE CASE 1 2Cj Exercise 124, German into English 1. ($eftertt ging id) 511 ^eing, ber auf feinem 3^ mmer ^ ar ^ x itnb fagte ^u itmt: „§ein3, roiEft bu mit einem meiner greunbe nad) §etbetberg retfen?" 2. „(&§ mare mtr fieb, mitpgef)ett, graulein, aber felt ad)t Xagen ftabe id) etnett better bet mtr." 3. „$Iufjer un£ ^roet Slnaben ift niemanb 311 §aufe." 4. „3n einer 2Sod)e ftnb ^ater unb Gutter roieber §u §aufe, unb mem better totit bann nrieber nad) granted), mo er Dor em paax Safyren geioobjitt bat." 5- „9cadj)ten s Dtontag merbe id) reifen fomten, menu e3 Sfynen angenct)m ift unb mein SBater mir'3 ertaubt." 6. „2)a3 ift mtr ferjr angenefym," antroortete id); „id) roerbe einert 53rief an beinen 95ater (or beiuem 3Sater ei* nen SBrief) fdjreiben, urn ifm §u fragen, ob bu mit barfft" 7. SDarauf fd)rieb id) feinem SBater (or an feineu SBater), unb am nad)ften i^orgen friir) er()ielt id) folgenbe ?(nnnort: „(§& tut mir fefjr leib, mein tiebe3 grdutem, aber ein alter SBefamtter fcrjreibt mir ebcn au£ Spari3, ba£ er urts> (or bei un3) fogteicfj einen Keinen S3efud) mad)en raerbe, raenn e£ wt£ gefdllig fet." 8. „9t6cr nad) biefem 23efudje nrirb ^jeing mitgerjen biirfen." 9. S)ie3 roar feme f)bfltd)e 2(ntroort auf meinen SBrief. Exercise 125, English into German 10. Will you go with me up to the old castle? 11. I 2 have not succeeded (113, sentence 7) in finding my father, to ask him if I may go. 12. He went to Dresden this morn- ing and has not yet come home. 13. But your mother is at home; ask her if it is agreeable to her. 14. I must go to the castle to-day, because to-morrow we shall move to (in) our house in (auf) the country. 15. Well, take (carry) my books up to my room to my brother, and I will go to mother and ask her. 16. Mother says we may go to (an) the old mill (bie TOifjIe) and up to the castle. I 30 A GERMAN GRAMMAR LXIV. THE ACCUSATIVE CASE (88, 90) i Besides the direct object in the accusative, some verbs have a second object in the accusative, as in English : as, 1. er leljrt mid) ©eogra^fjte 7 , he teaches me geography. 2. fie nanntcn tyn ben airmen $an§, they named him poor Jack. 2 Verbs meaning make, choose, appoint, etc., have their second object expressed by the dative with gnm or gnr (jit before plurals or possessive adjectives; 131, sentence 6): as, 1. er nintmt fie $m ftvau, he takes her for a wife. 3 With impersonal verbs the subject (eS) is generally omitted when the inverted order is used (122): as, 1 . mtr tonrbe geraten, / was advised. 4- The accusative is used to express definitely the extent of ti?ne or of space; but it is also used loosely to express the time within which (cf. 126, 4) or the time at which (cf. 128, 4, 45, 1): as, 1. ben folgenben %a$ olieo er Ijier, the next day he stayed here. 2. cinctt Ijatbcn £o£f grower, half a head taller. 3. ben folgenben £ag ging er fort, the next day he went away. 4. Stnfang (September, at the beginning of ' Septejnberj Wxitt $n r ni, in the middle ofjimej (£nbe ^n'lt, at the end of fuly (60, 5). 5 The accusative may stand alone (the accusative absolute) : as, 1. ben $nt in ber £anb ging er ljincm3 f hat in hand he went out. 2. tour finb atte Ijier, nteine Gutter an^genommen, we are all here with the exception of my mother. 6 For the accusative with prepositions expressing to, see 128, 5. 7 Care should be used in translating for : as, 1. mir ttioljnen ijier $af)re ((rtng), we have lived here for years (13, 1). 2. id) uitte Sie nm SBerjei'fjnng, I beg your (I beg you for) pardon. 3. er ift fdjon stoan&iq $aljre (or fett gmangig ^afyren) fort f he has been gone for twenty years. 4. e3 ift gut fiir bid), it is well for you. 5. fdjicfe nad) bem Slr^te! send for the doctor. 6. er gefjt anf brei $af)re fort, he is going away for three years. THE ACCUSATIVE CASE 131 Exercise 126, German into English 1. SStr finb je^t alle f)ier, bie fleirte 9Jtarte au^genommen. 2. ©eib iv)x ben gangen Sag in ber <2d)ule getoefen? 3. 9cein, ben gan^en SDforgen toaren totr ba. 4. £ente nadjmittag finb ttrir §ur alien 9Jtu()te gegangen, mo tote eine ©tnnbe ftfdjten. 5. £>a3 SSaffer tear- gefyn gufc tief, unb nn3 ttmrbe geratcn, bort gn fifdjen, aber ftrir fingen feinen gtjd). 6. ®amt madjten nrir grit* gu nnferm gitfjrer nnb gtngen in ben SSalb f)tnein. 7. SBciljrenb nrir SButnten fammelten, nerloren nrir ben 3Bcg nnb fonnten tfyn nicljt ttrieberfmben. 8. Gntbftd) famen nrir an em lleine^ |)an3 r ba£ tief im 2Sa(be ftanb. 9. £>en §nt in ber §anb nnb bk ©d)n(bM)er nnterm 2frme, flopfte grt| letfe cm£ %ux3)m. 10. (Sine fefyr Heine 2ttte mtt fdjneetoeifjen §aaren matfjte bie Site anf nnb fragte tint, tva§ er tooftte. 11. £)ie 5Ilte fat) fo llein nnb frfjrecflttf) au3, ba§ nrir feinen 5(ugenb(id ftefjen btteben, fonbern in grower (5t(e ba§> 2$eite fndjten. 12. 9H3 nrir enblid) an3 bent SSalbe roaren, fpielten nrir ein llein bijsdjen anf ber SStefe, efje nrir nad) §aufe gtngen. Exercise 127, English into German 13. How many years did you live in Dresden, Miss Miller? 14. We lived there ten years. 15. But we have not lived there for six years. 16. We were advised to go to the coun- try. 17. And so we all live here, with the exception of my youngest sister. 18. On the day that (%n bent Sage, too) we moved here she went to an aunt's. 19. She has lived (13, 1) with (bet) this aunt the whole six years. 20. She has grown so tall that she is a head taller than brother Harry. 21. At the beginning of March we shall have her come heme. 22. She will remain at home for several years. 23. Harry works in town all day; but if you remain here until this evening, you will be able to see him. 132 A GERMAN GRAMMAR LXV. PECULIAR CONSTRUCTIONS The definite article has some peculiar uses : as, 1. ber Sftenfd), ?nan, in a generic (general) sense. 2. ba§ 8fawd)ett ift f)ter berboteu, ;w smoking here. 3. Staffer Sum Srittfett, ««&r {Jit) for drinking. 4. tieim 2Iu5tel)eit, $afjren, Gsffen, w^z'/^ dressing, traveling, dining. 5. smetmal be3 Xage3, /ze/^ # rf^j (distributively). The infinitive without ju (and sometimes the past participle) may be used to express a command (cf . 74) : as, 1. um'fteigen ! change cars ! aufgemerft ! attention! For the infinitive with btetben, ftnben, fU^(en ? t)aoen, tjBren, or fetjen, see 112. $at)ren, tanfen, or reiten may take the infinitive ftoagie'ren, 80, 4; gefjen may take almost any infinitive : as, 1. td) gefye bettetn, ftfdjen, I go (a) begging, {a) fishing. The infinitive is often translated into English by the past participle or the present infinitive passive : as, 1 . er lie \ ba§ $au§ bon mir banen, he had the house built by me. 2. id) t)abe bag oft tnm tljm fagen tjbren, / often heard that said of him. 3. ba§ 23ud) ift bon U\l§ 5U lefett, the book is to be read by us. English words in -ing are seldom equivalent to the German present participle, but are often used to translate clauses or phrases (133, 1): as, 1 . fie f a^ tcf cnb ant $enfter, she was sitting at the window reading. 2. bent ®naben fotgeub, gtng er Ijinein, following the boy he went in. 3. bie Sente, bie an bcr ©ee mofjnen, the people living at the sea. 4. id) fat) it)n f elje id) I)ereinfam f I saw Mm before co?ning in. 5. ba er nidjt tommen fonnte, not being able to conie, he, etc. 6. er gab mir bie ^panb, inbem er fagte, he gave me his hand, saying. 7. fie tjorte auf p fingcn, she stopped singing. 8. t§ getang if)tn f 511 gefjen, he succeeded in going. 9. er mar ftolj barauf, gegangen %\\ fein, he was proud of having gone. 10. an^tatt su fbredjen, gtng er fort, instead of speaking he went away. With getjen or fomnten the past participle is translated by the English infinitive in -ing: as, 1 . er f am (or gtng) gelaufen, he ca7ne (or went) running. PECULIAR CONSTRUCTIONS I 33 ($Hn is sometimes not used where English has a or an: as, I 1. al3 er ©otbat ttmrbc, on becoming a soldier (so of professions). 2. er gtng ai§ ttianbernber Sanger, he went as a wandering minstrel. 3. ai§ 9lr$t mu| er gefjett, being a physician he 7nust go. 4. al3 ber $rteg 511 (Snbe tt>ar, the war being at an end. Exercise 128, German into English 1. ©eftern morgen flopfte eg, unb id) freute mid) fefyr baritber, 2 goljann in ber %wc ftefjen gu fefjen. 2. 2)a er fett langer Qtit ntd)t Ijter getnefen mar, foUte er einige Xage bet un3 bleiben. 3. s 2tber er mu^te fdjon fjeute morgen nad) granfretd) reifem 4. (£r lam fd)tneigenb in3 §au3, unb roafjrenb er Ijier tear, Ia3 er immer bie Qcttungert. 5. ®t fdjten frof), nnfre fdjonen 58il= ber fefjen 3U firnnen. 6. Gsfje er fortging, ftefj er fid) Don mir ein fleineS getter attf feinem 3^ mmer madjen, baran fajs er giuet (Stttnbett lang unb beantroortete SBriefe. 7. Sd} ging mandjmat attf fetn 3^ mmer ni & er §offming, oa & ^J nut ^) m t^itrbe fpre= d)en fomten. 8. 9Iber er fdjidte mid) fort, inbem er fagte, ba\\ er mid) f pater fcbcn nutrbe. 9. 3dj tear fefjr ungufrieben ha* mit, nid)t langer Dei iijm bleiben §u bitrfen. Exercise 129, English into German 10. Now that (ba) we live in the country, I go driving twice 3 a week with a cousin. 11. My cousin has become a doctor and must sometimes come to see my brother. 12. My brother cannot go driving or swimming with us. 13. One day, when the doctor came into my brother's room, he found the poor fellow (ben 5Irmen) writing in bed. 14. He sat down by the bed and remained sitting there (for) an hour. 15. My brother stopped writing and had him read from one of the books lying on the table. 16. While the doctor sat reading, I remained in my room writing (and wrote) letters. 17. Then my cousin and I went fishing (132, 3). 134 A GERMAN GRAMMAR LXVI. THE SUFFIXES i. =&5r, -able, -ible, from the root of geba'ren, bear : as, fyiYMVf curable j ftdjt'fcar, visible. 2. =djett, =Iettt (34, 1), =ltttg (36, 1), generally with umlaut: as, ba§ SBd'terdjett, dear father, papa, daddy j ba§ $rdttleitt, /««jy bet $tttbftttg,jfr«/z^/z>2g7 ber $ritljltttg, spring. 3. =b(e), -t f =(er)ei' f =ljett, 'idt, =frf)aft, -t, =ttttg, generally abstract or collective (141, 3, 4), and generally feminine: as, bte SJZSgb (mogen), maid; bie f^rcubc (freuett), y^yy ba§ (SJetttSFbe (malen), painting; bie (SJrB^e (grofj), great?iess; bie Ofeiteret', cavalry; bie ©djtftt'fjett, beauty ; bie ^rettttb'ttdjfett, friend- liness; bie ^remtb'fdjaft, friendship; bie (^efciirt' (gebS'ren), birth; bie SBar'tutttg, warning. 4. =el, the instrument, almost always masculine: as, ber $etfel, cover; ber $Iitgel (fftegen), a/%. 5. =(e)tt, =ent f -#*, ^ generally with umlaut: -as, golbett, golden; fil&ertt, silver; f}ol§ertt, wooden. 6. =er, =Ier f =tter, the agent, masculine, generally with umlaut: as, ber (Partner, gardener; ber Refiner (teller, cellar), waiter. 7. =cr f uninflected adjectives from names of towns (48, 4): as, ® flitter Coffer, Cologne water. 8. =tjaft (Ijaben), of the natwe of, -ish: as, ftta'&ettljaft, boyish; le&'ljaft, /zw/k. 9- -iflr -J> generally with umlaut: as, ntdcfjttg (bie 9Jcad)t), mighty; gcfdt'ltg (gefal'len), pleasing. 10. =itt, feminines from masculines, generally with umlaut: as, bie QJrtt'ftit (©raj), countess; bte ffij'ttigut, queen. 11. =tfA, sometimes belittling: as, rij'tttifd), Roman; ftttbifdj, childish, babyish (cf. =Udj). 12. =ltdj, -like, -ly, generally with umlaut : as, ftttbltdj, childlike; tttijgttd), possible; rBtttdj, reddish. 13. =n>3, -less: as, freuttblo3, friendless. 14. =tu3, =fdl, neuters or feminines, generally abstract (141, 4)'- as, ba§ (SJeljetttt'ttt^, secret; bie Srub'fat, trouble. 15. =fattt f -some: as, furdjt'fattt, fearsome, timid; lattg'fattt, j/^u'. THE SUFFIXES I 35 Exercise 130, German into English 1. %o& tft eine recite |)an3franenferjre: £a£ feme Unrein- licpeit Oor beiner %i\x auffommen, fonft ttrirb fie btr and) \v& $>au§ getragen. 2. Stegt fie after nor ber %ixi, fo tft fie ge= rot§ and) imnenbig ba^tnter. 3, 2tber in bent SSorte ttegt, je nad)bem man ben 9cad)brucf tegt, ein meljrfadjer @inn. 4. ©agft bn: Slefjre oor beiner Xiir, fo iff 3 eine Serjre ber Dtein lid) kit, banfen^mert nnb inert, ba$ bn fie befolgft, fiebe §au3frau! 5. ©agft bn: Sler)re nor beiner Xitr, fo iff£ fcfyon ettoa<§ einbringltdjer. 6. %ud) r beiner Xitr foltft bn leinen ©rfjmut) laffen, gefd)toeige benn bafjinter. 7. ©agft bn aber: ®ef)re nor beiner %wc, fo fjeifjt'S: ®imtmere bicf) nm anbrer £ente getter nicrjt nnb beffere melmefjr beine eignen! 8. II nb ba ift e3 erft redjt ein golbener 5Ipfel in fitbenter (Srfjale, nnb ba gilt's nidjt bloft ber §an3fran, fonbern nn3 alien. 9. ©3 erinnert nnS an ba$ SSort nnfers £errn, baf} mir erft ben SBalfen any bem eignen 5Iuge gieljen follen, el)e loir anf be£ SBrubers ©plitter beuten. 10. SDcir tnifty oorfommen, al3 foil- ten mir ba$ ©pridjtoort in ber breifadjen iBetonung feiner 3£orte inert fatten nnb befolgen. n. 2)er auftere ®d)mn§ ift allemat ein timber bes intoenbigen nnb fein ^orbote gewifj ! Exercise 131, English into German 12. If we .let uncleanliness thrive before our doors, it will be carried into our houses. 13. The proverb says, " Sweep before your door." 14. But the meaning of this proverb is threefold. 15. If we lay the emphasis on (anf) the first word, then the proverb teaches us cleanliness. 16. Let us lay the emphasis on the third word and try to see the dirt before our own doors. 17. If there is (73, 1) dirt before the door, there is certainly dirt inside. 18. It is better for us (130, 7) first to pull the beam from our own eye (see. 9). I 36 A GERMAN GRAMMAR LXVII. COMPOUND WORDS Compound nouns are formed and accented pretty much as in English. The principal accent generally falls on the ac- cented syllable of the first part of the compound, and the secondary accent on the accented syllable of the last part : as, bct§ SHtt'bermdb'djeit, nurse j ber ^lu^'gang', exitj bte ($a3'beleud)= tangggefett'fdjaft, gas company. When in forming compounds the same consonant would occur three times in succession, one of these is dropped unless the word is hyphened or has a consonant following the repeated consonant. A few words always have one consonant dropped : as, ba§ ^et'tftd), sheet, $ett=titd) ; fttcf'ftnfffret ()iid-)iofc\vei), free from nitro- gen; but, ben'nodj (berm, notfj), yet, still: ba§ ^xWttl (britt, Sett); ber mt'tas (SDUtte, Sag). Compound nouns have almost always the gender and the inflection of their last part : as, bte (Sjar'tenarbett, bte (^ar'tettarbeitett, garden work (ber ©arteit, bte Weit); but, bte Wnt'tvovt (ba§ SBort), ber Mitt'tooty (bte 2Bocf)e). Stems are often joined without change, or, more often, the first stem takes the ending (e)§ or (c)tt of the genitive singular, or er or (e)tt of the genitive plural : 1 as, 1. ber Slp'feUJOum, appletree; ber Q&vofy/tiatZY, grandfather; \M $a'= tuort, consent (yes-word); blttt'felrot, dark red; tttett'ftfjettleer, deserted (empty of people); §e(b= ititb (^ar / tettfriirf|te, field a7id garden fruits j £$tt'genbfuft Ultb 4etb, the joy and sorrow of youth; ber ScfjuFjunge (bte ©cfjute, final e of feminines often being dropped), schoolboy. 2. ba§ 28irt§ljau!§, innj ber (^ebftrr^tag (bte ©eburt / ), birthday; ber Ste'be^brtef (bte Siebe), / ^rau'enflofter, nunnery, cloister. 1 Originally stems were connected by vowel suffixes, which were afterwards dropped, or appear as C or i: as, ber Sa'geMeb, idler; ba§ Se'febucfj, reader; bie ©art'fc^aut, creeps (goose skin) ; ber Srau'ttgam, bridegroom. COMPOUND WORDS 137 Exercise 132, German into English 1. Das Atmen besteht darin, daB unsre Lungen wie ein 1 Blasebalg Luft einziehen und wieder ausstromen lassen. 2. Die Luft, die wir einatmen, soil rein und frisch sein. 3. Sie ist rein, wenn sie keine gesundheitsschadlichen Stoffe enthalt, und frisch, wenn sie nicht zu heiB und nicht zu kalt ist. 4. Ein Bestandteil der eingesogenen Luft wird von der Lunge zuriickbehalten und zu alien Teilen des Korpers hinge- fiihrt. 5. Es ist der Sauerstoff, der sich mit dem Blute ver- mischt. 6. Die ausgeatmete Luft enthalt die fur Menschen und Tiere schadliche Kohlensaure (49, 1). 7. Es erfordert nur ein wenig Aufmerksamkeit, um jeden Raum, den wir bewohnen, der frischen Luft zuganglich zu machen. 8. Vor alien Dingen ist es notig, die Zimmer fleiBig zu liiften. 9. Durch Raucherungen wird die schlechte Beschaffenheit der Luft wohl verdeckt, aber nicht verbessert. 10. Hin- gegen ist das Aufstellen von Blattpflanzen fur das Atmen von Vorteil. 11. Am besten wirkt die Herstellung von Luftzug. 12. Besonders in den Schlafzimmern sollte man auf reine Luft halten (auf. . . halten, be particular about). 13. Deshalb sollte des Morgens beim Auf stehen das erste sein, die Fenster des Schlafzimmers weit zu offnen. 14. Auch sollte man die Decken und Bettiicher einem griindlichen Luftdurchzuge unterwerfen, ehe man das Bett macht. 15. Solche kleine Gesundheitsregeln dienen mehr zur Erhaltung des Wohl- befindens und des Lebens als manche vielgepriesene Mittel. Exercise 133, English into German 16. The air that we breathe should contain no matter 2 injurious to health (see 3). 17. Our rooms should (sollten) be accessible to the fresh air. 18. Before we go to bed, and when we rise, we should open the windows wide. 138 A GERMAN GRAMMAR LXVIII. THE GERMAN SCRIPT 9? J J> A a B b C c D d /E . e F /f 'H //h ^^" s^ K k L w**> d?. Mm No o /? ^p SIT X Q /q R r S ' s t ry U u Y y W w X ^x Y ^y ^ZZ THE GERMAN SCRIPT I 39 A" a" (7 0" o" jf Au Au y Eu ck ' SZ MO A GERMAN GRAMMAR (24^^^p67^4>/z&?^ ^2^^<>^ik^^^^^^^^^^^ ^CJ^/W^tfer C^/^//^^/ ^^^^^^^^^^^7 yOc^>/^y \st^^z?/<7z^^ s^frfPf^r, ^/^/>u sp/&t<^^/^/* J^y, "t^cJ^fz^ /Ptpi^ CJ^^v^o^pd * J-trU^^pcJ^/ OaJ^ ^4<2C s44frtt4/^* / FORMS AND CONSTRUCTIONS SOME ESSENTIALS OF ENGLISH AND GERMAN GRAMMAR Nouns, or Names (34-45, 152-163) A common noun is a name applicable to all of a class of persons, I places, or things. In German all nouns and all words used as nouns are written with initial capitals (for pronouns see 169, 2, 3): as, child, ®utb ; city, ®tabt ; apple, 2ttof el. A proper noun is a name applicable to one person, place, or thing: as, 2 Fred, %x\% ; Berlin, %txi\\\' ; Monday, 9ftontag. A collective noun is a name that in the singular is applicable to a 3 group of objects. In English it takes a singular or a plural verb accord- ing to the sense (see 82, 3): as, The family is (or are not) all here. An abstract noun is a name applicable to a quality: as, beauty, 4 z/ hast loved 3. He loves He has loved 1 . We love We have loved 2. Ye or You love Ye or You have loved 3. They love They have loved 2 Past Indicative (145, 5) Pluperfect Indicative (145, 8) 1 . / loved, I was loving I had loved, etc. 2. Thou lovedst Thou hadst loved 3. He loved He had loved 1 . We loved We had loved 2. Ye or K?# loved Ye ox You had loved 3. 77^ loved They had loved 3 Future Indicative (145, 6) Future Perfect Indicative (145, 9) I. I shall love, etc. 7 shall have loved, etc. 2. Thou wilt love Thou wilt have loved 3. 77? will love He will have loved 1 . £F could, etc., /ztfw /<97/^ 2. K * ,1 \. u r(fo ) 2 ftngt er, fommt 1 er Ijterficr, > Vl ; ' B r if (or whenever, 104, 1) -# ift 1 er fiierfier gefommen, > u J 9 s^uugew, ^"(or whenever, 104, 1) ^ ( (fo) 2 fingt er f if (or whenever, 104, 1) he comes here, he will sing. The Less Vivid Future Condition (cf . 1 50, 4) 1. menu er fiierher fame, ) < (fo) 2 fange er, fame 1 er fiierfier, > ( (fo) 2 toiirbe er fingen, if he came (or should come) here, he would sing $ The Present and Past Contrary to Fact Conditions (cf. 150,5; 77, 1) 1. metm er fiterfier fame, > < (fo) 2 f tinge er, fame 1 er fiierfier, > ( (fo) 2 toitrbe er fingen, if he were coming here (but he is not coming), he would sing? 2. menu er fjterfier gefommen mare, ) ( (fo) 2 fiatte er gefungen, mare 1 er fiierfier gefommen, > 1 (fo) 2 mitrbe er gefungen hafien, if he had come hei'e (but he did not come), he would have sung. itoemt, if, may be omitted, and the inverted order used (122, 1, 3). 2 After a clause of concession (see ofjgIeich / r 104, 1) or of condition, fo is often used to sum the clause up. When toenn is omitted in conditional clauses (footnote 1), fo is regularly used. 3 The less vivid future and present contrary to fact conditions agree in form, and must be distinguished by the context. 152 A GERMAN GRAMMAR THE INFLECTION OF NOUNS (34-45, 152-163) Feminines remain unchanged in singular Classes III and V have no feminines ; Class IV has no neuters Strong Weak Mixed Class I Class II Class III Class IV Class V Singular N. — of masculines and G. D. — § — W* 1 -(e) 2 -(e)S 1 -(e) 2 -(e)* -(e)n -(e)** 1 -(e) 2 neuters A. — — — -(e)n — N. U u e ^_er -(e)n -(e)n G. u u e — er -(e)tt -(e)n Plural of all D. A, <^(n)3 -^-tvn — er -(e)n -(C)tl -(e)n — (c>tt nouns a, o f n sometimes modified a f o, u f an generally modified a, 0, n, an always modified The Gender of Nouns according to their Meanings 4 Masculine: Most large males, large birds, fish, stones, mountains, non- German rivers; days, months, seasons, phenomena of the weather (as, ber ©djnee, snow), points of the compass. Feminine: Most females (except ba§> SSeib, woman, and nouns ending in cfjen and (em); trees, plants, flowers, fruits (except ber Sttofek, apple)-, small birds, insects; numbers ; abstract names; German rivers (except ber £ecfi, ber 9Kam, ber 9cccfar, ber 9?rjem). Neuter: Materials; metals (except ber Starjl, steel)-, the young of ani- mals; countries (except those always having the definite article: as, Me ©c&toeift, Switzerland), cities; infinitives and other words (not denoting persons) used as nouns ; the letters. 1 In nouns of one syllable, writers generally use the ending e§. 2 In nouns of one syllable, writers generally use the ending e except after a preposition or before a vowel. 3 See 34, 3. 4 The gender of many nouns is shown by the form or the ending (153). That of many others must be learned from the dictionary. THE GENDER OF NOUNS BY CLASSES I 53 The Gender of Nouns according to their Classes Class I (34, 35, 152, 154, 155) I Masculine: Most nouns ending in unaccented el, en, er; ber Mfc, cheese. Feminine : bie 9)?utter, mother, Me £od)ter, daughter. Neuter : Some nouns ending in unaccented el f en (including all infini- tives used as nouns, 141, 1), er; all diminutive nouns ending in cfreu, leitt ; most nouns of the form ($e — e. Class II (36, 37, 152, 154, 156) 2 Masculine : Most nouns of one syllable ; all nouns ending in trf), \% ling ; many nouns, mostly of foreign origin, ending in l f n, r, t, and ac- cented on the last syllable. Feminine: About 35 nouns of one syllable; all nouns ending in tunft; some nouns ending in nt3, fol. Neuter : About 60 nouns of one syllable ; most nouns ending in nt3, fat; many nouns of foreign origin (not denoting persons), ending in I tt, r, t, and accented on the last syllable. Class III (38, 39, 152, 154, 158) 3 Masculine : 8 nouns of one syllable ; ber ^rrtunt, mistake, ber OfJetdjtum, riches. Neuter : About 60 nouns mostly of one syllable ; almost all nouns end- ing in titm. Class IV (40, 41, 152, 154, 160) 4 Masculine: About 20 nouns of one syllable; all nouns ending in e denoting males ; many nouns of foreign origin, mostly denoting persons, ending in t, and accented on the last syllable. Feminine: About 75 nouns of one syllable; all feminine nouns of more than one syllable, except bie Gutter and bie Xodjter (Class I) and nouns ending in funft, nt3, or fat (Class II). Class V (42, 43, 152, 154, 162) 5 Masculine : A few irregular nouns ; almost all nouns of foreign origin ending in or. Neuter : A few irregular nouns ; some nouns of foreign origin ending in I, nt. 154 A GERMAN GRAMMAR NOUN How to determine the Class of a Noun fList i, below? Class V (162) ' monosyl- J List 2, below? Class III (158) labic? I List 3, below? Class IV (160) [if not, then Class II (156) ? Class IV (161) ' Class V (162) Class I (155) ' masculine? polysyl- labic ? feminine? . neuter? monosyl- labic ? polysyl- labic ? monosyl- labic ? List 1, below =el, =ett, =cr? -turn? Class III (158) If not, then Class II (156) List 4, below? Class II (157) If not, then Class IV (161) flutter, £orf)ter? Class I (155) J =lttttft f =m8, =fal? Class II (156) [if not, then Class IV (160) List 5, below? Class V (162) List 6, below? Class III (158) If not, then Class II (157) polysyl- labic ? =ef f =en, =er, =d)ett, =Iein, @e — e? Class I (155) -m§, =fal? Class II (156) List 5, below? Class V (162) List 6, below? Class III (158) If not, then Class II (156) List 1 : Masculines, Class V (162): SSauer, 9cad)6ar, ©djmerg, See, ©taar, Strati, SSetter. List 2: Masculines, Class III (1 58): ©eift, ©ott, Sei6, Warm, Drt, Otcmb, 2Balb, 23urm. List 3: Masculines, Class IV (160): S3ctr, SBurfd), Shrift, fjfelS, giirft, ©raf, §etb, £err, .Spirt, 3Jlenfdj, SJcolrr, Starr, CcfjS, $rm$, Spa§ f £or. List 4: Feminines, Class II (157): 9lngft, 9lrt, S3cmf, SBraut, 93tufi, fyauft, grudjt, ©cm§, §anb, gjaut, ®raft, M), ®unft, Suft, Sufi, Sttadjt, 9Jcagb, SKauS, Stodjt, SRot, 9fotfj, ©tabt, 2Banb, SSurjt List 5: Neuters, Class V (162): Shtge, Sett, (htbe, £>emb, Cf)r. List 6: Neuters, Class III (158): Stmt, S3ab, SBanb, SBitb, SBlatt, SBrett, SSucf), 3>adj, Sorf, (Si, fyncf), Safe, 8^, © e ^» ©entatf)', ©entuF, ©efrfjiedjt', ©eitdjt'; ©efpenft', ©ettxmb', ©Ta§, ©lieb, ©rab, ©ra§, ©itt, £aupt, #au§, £olg, £)orn, ftofpitat', £ufjn, £aI6, £mb, £teib, £orrt, £raut, Samm, Sanb, Stcfjt, Sib, Steb, Sotf), 3Rauf, 9£eft, partb, «ftab, Dtegtment', 9£ei§, Otinb, ©djilb, (2ct)lo^, ©djroert, SpttaP, Sal, Sucfi, =tum, s #otf, 28am§, 2Set6, Sort. NOUNS: CLASS I, STRONG NOUNS: CLASS I, STRONG (34, 35, 152, 154) 155 Masculine : Most nouns ending in unaccented e(, en, er ; ber $Sfe, cheese. Feminine : bte Gutter, mother, bie Xofyttt, daughter. Neuter: Some nouns ending in unaccented el, en (including all infini- tives used as nouns), er ; all diminutive nouns ending in d)en, letn \ mos t nouns of the form $e — e. this wagon the mother the painting the 7iame btef er SSagen bte Gutter ba§ (SJemaVbe ber 9?ame(n) e3 § ber Gutter be§ ©emaVbe^ be3 9?amett3 em ber Gutter bem ©emSl'be bent 9?amen eit bte Gutter ba$ ©emSt'be ben 9?amen e bte ^iitter bte (^emat'be bte 9?amert er ber Gutter ber ©emSFbe ber Seamen Ctt ben s Mttern ben ©emal'ben ben ^amen e bte Gutter bte ©emSi'be bie 9?amen The following masculines have a, 0, tt modified in the plural (34, 2) : ber liefer liefer y?anb ba§ Safjr bag ©eljetfn/nig e SSaum e bte .ilf £mfe hoof ber ©toff ©tone stuff ber £tmb £mnbe dog ber =fucf| =fiid)e seeking ber Saut Saute sound ber Sag Sage day ber Wlonb s J3tonbe 3 7noon ber Sljrott Srjrone thro?ie ber £rt Crte 4 place ber SSerlttfi' SBertuft'e loss 1 Before case endings the § of tti§ is doubled. 2 But, in compounds, =briicfe. 3 But, Sftortben, months. 4 £)rte, places, connected; Drter (158, ^.places, separate. 5 As, Sefiitty, visit ; one neuter, ba% ®e\ud)', request. NOUNS: CLASS II, STRONG 157 The most important feminines of one syllable are as f ollows : bie Sfttgft tngfte anxiety bie Ihmft Mnfte art bie Stjt fljte ax bie Suft Sitfte air bie 33anf SBcmfe * bench bie Suft Sitfte pleasure bie 23raut SBraute bride bie Wad)t 9JMd)te might bie SBruft SSriifte breast bie 901 agb 9Jl8gb'e maid bie $auft gaufte fist bie 9ttaug SJftaufe mouse bie grudjt griidjte fruit bie 9cad)t 9cdd)te night bie ©ang ©anfe goose bie 9J6t Stote need bie Jpanb §dnbe hand bie 9cuB 92iiffe nut bie £>aut §dute skin bie ©tabt ©tSbte city, town bie Sraft Mfte force bie 28anb SBanbe wall 2 bie £uf) Sfifje cow bie SBurft SBifcfte sausage The most important neuters c f one syllable are as follows : bag SBeet SBeete bed bag $aar $.aare pair ba§ 93eil . SSeile hatchet . bag $ferb $ferbe horse ba§ SBein SBeine leg bag ^Sfunb ^funbe pound bag SSrot SBrote bi-ead bag s £uit $utte desk bag Sing 3)tnge 3 thing bag 9ied)t 3?ed)te right bag fyelt SrcHc hide bag 9tcidj Dieidje kingdom bag fteft Sfefte feast bag 9tof)r Sftofjre reed bag ©ift ©ifte poison bag Otofc • SRoffe steed bag £>aar ^aare hair bag Sdjaf ©dfiafe sheep bag ipeer £eere army bag ©djiff ©djiffc ship bag £eft ©cfte notebook bag Sdnoein ©djtneine hog, pig bag $at)r Sa^re year bag Sett Seile ?'ope bag Sod) 3od)e yoke bag Spiel ©piele play bag £hm £inne chin bag Stiicf (Stiicf e piece bag £nie £m'e knee bag Xitx Si ere animal bag Sog Sofe lot bag Xor Sore gate (160, 4"\ bag Wlal SKale time bag SBerf SBerfe work bag s Ma$ 9JJ5Be measure bag s £*ort SSovte 4 word bag SDfeer 9fteere sea bag Belt £elte tent bag 9?e£ %e|e net bag ${d Biete aim iSSanfert (161, 2), banks (for money). 2 0f a house. 4 3&orte, words, connected; SBbrter (158, 5)> words, separate. 3 Cf. 158,5. 158 A GERMAN GRAMMAR NOUNS: CLASS III, STRONG (38, 39, 152, 154) 1 Masculine : 8 nouns of one syllable ; ber ^rrtftm, mistake, ber Otettf)= liim, riches?- Neuter: About 60 nouns mostly of one syllable; almost all nouns ending in rum. 2 This class has no feminines. this man the Terror the house the antiquity biefer Wlann ber Saturn ba§ §au§ bU 2fl'tertum t§ c§ bl§ SrrTum^ be3 |>auje§ bt§ SlFtertum^ em c bem S^Ttim bzm |>aufe btm Sfl'tertiirrt en btn ^iT'rurrt ba§ £mu§ ba§ SUTertum e bann- er bie ^rrTitmer bie £)tiufer bk SlITertiirrter er er ber ^rr'tumer ber §aujer ber ^FtertCmer en em btn ^rrTumern ben £>aufertt ben SttTertiirrtew c er bie 3 rr/ tumer bie ftaufer bie ^J/tertvimer The masculines are as follows : ber ©ei[t (Mfter 3 spirit ber Otartb fRartber edge ber ®ott ©otter god ber SSalb SSalber foi^est ber Set 6 Seiber body ber 2$urm SSiirmer worm ber 9)cann Scanner 4 man ber ^rrtum ^rrtumer error ber Crt Crter 5 place ber 3f\etd)tum 9reicrj turner wealth The neuters are as follows: bo§ Stmt Gutter office bU SSilb S3ttber picture ba§ S3ab SBSber bath ba§ 93fatt S3 (alter leaf bag SBartb ^Banber 6 ribbon ba§ $rett SBretter board 1 ber 53o / felntd)t, rascal, has the plural So'fettricrjter or 93o / fetr>tdjte (156); ber SSor'tmmb, guardian, has SSor'munber and SSor'munbe (156). 2 This important list of monosyllabic masculines may be remembered by the sentence, The spirit of God is at every place, from the body of man to the worm at the edge of the forest. 3 ©etfte (156), spirits (as of turpentine). 4 2ftatmen (160), vassals. 6 Orter, places, separate; Orte (156, 3), places, connected. 6 But, 53anbe (156), bonds ; ber 33anb, 33dnbe (156), volumes, of books. NOUNS: CLASS III, STRONG 159 bag 23itrf| 585ct)er book bag £irtb Sinber child bag ®acf) ©ftdjer roof bag Sieib Sieiber dress bag Senf'tnal ©enf'mSler 1 monument bag $orn £orner . corn, grain bag Sing Singer 2 tiling bag £raut tranter herb bag S)orf ©orfer village bag Samnt Satnmer lamb bag (Si (Sier e gg bag Sanb Sanber n land bag gad) gadjer specialty bag 2id)t Sid)ter 12 light bag ga& gaffer cask bag Sib fitber lid™ bag §elb f$elber field bag Sieb Sieber song ba§ ©eib ©elber money bag Sod) Socher hole bag ©emacf/ ©emdcfi/er 3 roo7n bag 2Raf)t 9Hf)ter 14 meal bag ©emuV ©etmVter feeling bag 9Xcau( hauler mouth bag ®efcf)ledjt' ' ©efd)lecf/ter 4 sex bag 9Zeft defter nest bag ©eftcbt' ©efid] / ter 5 face bag s $fanb $Pfanber pledge bag ©efpenft' ©efpen'ftet ghost bag 9tab DiSber wheel bag ©erpanb' ©erocin'ber 6 ; garment bag Regiment 7 ffi^vmxi'izx™ regiment bag ©lag ©fafer glass bag Dteig Dxetfer twig bag (Meb ©lieber limb 7 bag 9£inb iRinbcr neat bag ©ra6 ©rSber grave bag 8cf)i(b <3d)i(ber 16 signboard bag ©rag ©rSjer grass bag ©cfitofj ©tf)toffer castle bag ©At ©liter estate bag ©djtoert @d)roerter sword bag £>attpt £>dupter 8 head bag 2 pita V ©pitS'ter hospital bag £mug §aufer house bag 2a t 25ler 17 valley bag Jpolg £>i)I§er wood bag Sud) Silver 18 cloth bag £>orn Corner 9 horn bag Sot! SBolfcr people bag SofpttaK $ofpit3'(er l0 hospital bag s 23arrtg SSftmfer jacket bag £mhn ^u^ner hen, fowl bag 23ei6 SSeiber woman bag Salb £dt6er calf bag SSort Sorter 19 word 1 Or SenFmate (156). 2 Singer, with contempt, creatures (157, 2). 3 Or ©emacf/e (156; poetic). 4 OrSefdjledj'te (156; poetic). h %t\\fy it {\zfi), visions. 6 Or ©enmn'be (156; poetic). 7 Or member. 8 But, 311 §aupten be§ 23ette§, «/ the head of the bed. 9 iporne (156), £z'#a?j 0/ horn. 10 Or §ofpita r te (156). 11 Sanber, countries (definitely bounded) ; Sanbe (156), lands (indefinite regions ; also poetic). ^Sidite (156), candles. 13 Generally, Stu'genttb, eyelid. 14 Or 9Ra*jle (156). 15 iRegtmen'ter, in speaking of the army ; otherwise, 9tegimen / te (156). 16 But, ber £tt)i(b, (SdjUbe (156), shield. 17 Or 2a(e (156 ; poetic), 18 £ucfje (156), kinds of cloth. 19 Sorter, words, separate; SSorte (157, 2), words, connected. i6o A GERMAN GRAMMAR NOUNS : CLASS IV, WEAK (40, 41, 152, 154) Masculine : About 20 nouns of one syllable ; all nouns ending in c denoting males; many nouns of foreign origin, generally denoting per- sons, ending in t, and accented on the last syllable. Feminine: About 75 nouns of one syllable; all feminine nouns of more than one syllable,! except bie Sfttttter and Me Xotfyttv (Class I) and nouns ending in fnnft, ttt§, or fat (Class II). This, class has no neuters. this fool the boy the feather the queen bief cr Sor btt Stmge bie $eber bie SB'nigm e£ en be3 ^ungen ber $eber ber ^B'nigin em en bem ^ungen ber $eber ber £3'nigm en en bm Sungen bie $eber bie ^B'night e en bie Sungen bie Sebertt bie £6 / nigmncii 2 er en ber Sungen ber $ebern ber SB'nigmnen en en ben ^ungen ben f^ebern ben ^B'ntgmnen e en bk 3 un 9 ett bie fjcbem bit S'o'nigumen The most important masculines of one syllable are as follows: ber 93 Sr 95Sren bear ber trt(e) grirten shepherd ber 93urfdj(e) 23urfdje(n) fellow ber SOtenfd) 5)tenfc6en 5 ?nan 6 ber (Shrift Kfirtften Christian ber 90cofjr SDlofiren Moor ber f$el§ 3 Self en. rock ber Tcarr ■Warren fool ber fyiirft ^iirften prince ber Cd)§7 Ccfijen ox ber ®raf ©rafen COU7lt ber ^rm$ ^rtngen prince 8 ber $etb £)elben hero ber ©pat* &pa$m sparrow ber £>err 4 §erren master ber %lt Soren fool (157,2) 1 This includes all nouns ending in tV, \t f , if; in, ion 7 ; fiett, !eit; fdjaft, ung, tat 7 ; and most nouns ending in I, UK'. 2 Before case endings the n of in is doubled. 3 Or ber gelfen (155). 4 Singular irregular: ber £>err, be§ £>errn, bem §errn, ben £errn. 5 Also, ba§> SDtenfcf), SD^enfctjer (158), hussy. 6 mankind, mortal, as distin- guished from the lower animals. 7 Or ber £>ti)fe. 8 See ^ring in the general vocabulary. NOUNS: CLASS IV, WEAK 161 Among the important polysyllabic masculines are the following : ber 3(buolat ' StbootVten lawyer ber Some SBroen lion ber Stffe Slffen ape ber 9ceffe S^effen nephew ber S3ote 33oten messenger ber 9$ ate $aten godfather ber 3)eutfct)e Seutfdjen German (54, 2) ber ^oef SPoe'ten poet ber Srbe Srben heir ber ^reufje ^reufjen Pritssian ber gatfe fallen falcon ber Dftabe O^aben raven ber grango' [egrango'fe a Frenchman ber Otiefe IRtef en giant ber |mfe ^afett hare ber ©djulge ©dnilgen mayor 1 ber £)eibe §eiben heathen ber ©d)urfe ©cfatrfen wretch ber ^mfar' ^mfS'ren hussar ber ©flaoe ©flatten slave ber $itbe Svlbert Jew ber ©of bat' ©olba'ten soldier ber Sunge Sungen boy ber Jiirfe Siirlen Turk ber Snabe $naben boy ber Ulan 7 Ula'nen lancer The more importa nt feminines oi one syllable are as follows : bie ftrt Irten kind bie ^ffitfjt $f listen duty bie 23at>n 58ar)nert road bie $ oft ^ often post office bie 23anf 33anfen 2 bank bie £htat Cuaten tor?nent bie 33urg S3urgert castle 3 bie ©d)ar ©d)aren crowd bie gatrrt garjrten passage bie ©dtfdjt ©d)id)ten layer bie gee geen fairy bie ©d)(ad)t ©d/lad)ten battle bie glut gluren field, plain bie ©thrift ©draften writing bie glut gluten flood, tide bie ©d)ulb ©djulben debt bie gomt gormen for?n bie See 4 Seen sea bie gratf)t gradjten freight bie ©par ©puren trace bie grau grauen w 07n an bie ©tirn(e) ©tirnen forehead bie grift griften time, respite bie Eat Saten deed bie $agb ^agben chase bie Sour Souren tour bie Soften costs bie Sur(e) Efiren door bie Baft Saften burden bie Ufjr Ltrjren clock 5 bie Sift Siften cunning bie SSaljt SSarjien choice bie Wlaxl s I>carfen boundary bie SBBelt SSelten world bie ?0larfcr) Sftdrfcrjen marsh bie 35f)I ^arjfen number bie 3feuH 9cutten naught bie Qdt 3etten time 1 Of a village. 2 53cmfe (157, 1), benches. 3 stronghold. 4 ber ©ee (162, 4), lake. 5 Or watch. l62 A GERMAN GRAMMAR NOUNS: CLASS V, MIXED (42, 43, 152, 154) Masculine : A few irregular nouns ; almost all nouns of foreign origin ending in or. Neuter : A few irregular nouns ; some nouns of foreign origin ending in f, m. This class has no feminines. this peasant the state the doctor the museum. bit) er SBauer ber Stoat ber Sof'tor bM SJhife'um t§ 3 be3 StaateS bU Sof'torS bU 9Kufe'umS cm btm Staate bem SDof'tor btm Sftufe'um Ctt ben ©tacit ben Softer ba§ SKitfe'itm c n bk Staaten bte %nlWxvx bie SDhtfe'en 1 er n ber (Staaten ber Softo'rett ber ^Dcufe'en en it ben Staaten ben %&WxtVL btn SOfafe'en e it bte Staaten bie Softo'ren bte Wlufi'tn 4 The most important masculines and neuters are as follows: ber S3auer beg 23auerg 2 ber 9cacf)6ar beg 9?ad)6arg 3 ber Srf)mer§ beg Sdjmer^eg ber See (cf . 161,2) beg Seeg ber ©tout beg Staateg ber Strati beg Strafjleg ber better beg SBetterg ber ©of'tor beg $of tor§ bag 2iucje bag 93ett bag (Enbe bag foerrtb bag SntereHe bag €f)r bag Stu / btum bag ^coterial 7 1 Nouns ending : Sofft'lken, fossil. bH Stugeg beg Setteg beg ©nbeg beg §embeg beg .^nterei v feg beg £f)reg bU Stu'btumg be^ s Fcaierialg / bie 93auern bte 9cad)6ant bie Sdjmergen bie Seen bie Staaten bte Straiten bte SSettem bte Softo'ren bte Slug en bte S3etten bie Ghtben bte £>emben bte ^ntereffen bie Cljren bte Stu'bten bte Sftateria'Iien 1 neighbor pain lake state 7'ay cousin doctor eye bed end shirt interest ear study ?naterial O.V and IV have the plural in ien : as, ba§ ^offfF, bte 2 Or be§ Saltern. 3 Or beg Stadjoarn. NOUNS: PROPER NAMES 1 63 NOUNS : PROPER NAMES (44, 45, 47, 1, 49 1 ) Proper names of persons not preceded by Mefer-words or fein-words (io 1 , 20 1 ) are inflected in the genitive ($ r en3; but see 44, 3, 4), and titles (except §err, Mr., and added titles like ber Ch'fte, First, which are always inflected) are left uninflected : as, 1. ^Srittj ^>einrirf)3 Snefe (cf. tnit ^rtn$ ^etnrirf); 33riefe an ^rmj ^einrid)) ; £>errn ^rofeffor ^ottor Start Sftfillerd 2h*iefe ; £aijer §riebridj 2$UljeIm3 be3 (Srften 23riefe; fyrennb 9ftttfler3 SBricfe ; ®avt§ nnb 9)Zarie3 SBrief e ; 8avte unb 9)Zarie3 $reunb (but see 163,4)- As a rule, proper names of persons preceded by Mefer-words or fem- words (io 1 , 20 1 ) are left uninflected unless depending on nouns that stand after them; but even then they are left uninflected if ending in an s-sound or a vowel: as, 1. &te SSriefe ber Gttfafcetlj ; bic $riefe eine3 $oettje (in a generic sense; cf. ber, 132,1); bie Srtefe be§ grofjen ^riebrid). But, be3 grofjen $riebrtd)3 SBricfe; be3 ^errn ®arl %)lMtv$ 23riefe (cf. ttttfetrS (2of)ue3 &axl 23rtefe f the name $arl being in apposition with (5of)ne3 and left uninflected) ; bie SBrtefe ^fjrer $raulcin £od)ter (cf. 169, 1, sentence 5). 2. bie $riefc be3 gro^eu Qtoetfje; be3 grofjen ©octlje Sriefe. When titles are preceded by biefer-words or fein-words (io 1 , 20 1 ), the titles are inflected unless considered a part of the proper names (but §err is always inflected, 163, 1), and the proper names are left uninflected. When there are two or more titles, only the first is inflected : as, 1. be§ ^>erm ^rofcfforS Soulier ^riefe (but, be3 £errn WiMcr§ 23ricfe) ; bit Sriefe be3 ^rinsen ^etnrttf) ; bie SBriefe be§ $rciu= hin§ Gutter, 2. bie SSriefe unferS Softor Martin Sutfjer; an $orb be§ ftiirft %\§mavd. 3. bie 83riefe be3 ^rofeffor^ (or, be3 ^perrtt ^rofeffor) ^oftor Ravi Gutter. When proper names are joined in authorship or in ownership, only the last name is inflected, as in English: as, 1. SJtetier unb 9)Znflcr3 SBudj'ijanblung, Meyer and Miller's bookstore. When t)0tt is used to denote locality (that is, a person's descent} the word before Don is inflected ; but if the turn is honorary, the word after tion is inflected: as, 1. 9Ue£anberS Don £mmfio(bt $rtefe; be3 £imtg3 toon (Sngfanb ^Briefe. 2. ^ricbricf) Don 8djifler3 SBriefe. 164 A GERMAN GRAMMAR ADJECTIVES: CLASS I, STRONG (46,47) long, cold winter long cr, fait er 23 inter 1 cu, en em, em en, en e, e er, er en, en e , e good old friendship gute alte fyreunb'jdjaft gtltcr alter ftreunb'jdjaft guter alter ^reunb'fdjaft gute alte a-reunb'jdjaft gute alte fyreunb'jdjaftett guter alter ^reunb'fdjaftett guten alten Srreunb'fdjaftett giltc alte ftreimb'jdjaftett I cold water gtlte^ falteS Staffer gfiteit fatten SSafferS gittem faltem Staffer gitteS falter 23affer gute !alte SSaffer guter falter SSaffer guten fatten SSafferti gute falte SSaffer cold, biting winter falter, fdjnei'benber SSinter fatten, fcfjnet'benben 23tnter3 faltem, fdjnei'benbem ^Sinter fatten, fdjnei'benbeit 2$tnter falte, fdjuei'benbe Winter falter, fdjnei'benber SBtnter fatten, fdjnet'benben 23intern falte, fdjuei'benbe 28inter ADJEC TIVES : CLASS II, WEAK (48, 49) this long, cold winter the good old friendship btef cr tang e, fait e 28 inter bie gute alte fjreunb / fc^aft e3 en, en § ber guten alten f^retmb'fdjaft em en, en ber guten alten greunb'fdjaft en en, en bie gute alte fjfreunb'fdjaft e en, en bie gitten alten Sreimb'fdjafteti er en, en ber guten alten fyreunb'ftfjaftett en en, en n ben guten alten f$reunb / fc^aftcn e en, en bie giiten alten tfreunb'fdjaftctt 1 Cf. rot unb gelfie ©latter (=rot / get6e ©latter), orange (red-yellow) leaves (rote unb get6e S&[atttT=red leaves and yellow leaves). 2 Some strong forms like gutei 3Jfute§ still occur. ADJECTIVES: CLASS III, MIXED ADJECTIVES : CLASS II, WEAK (continued) 165 the new Berlin knife //zr neue£ 5^rcS ueuett Jljrettt ueuett Sfjr neuc3 S^tc ueuett Silver ueuett Sfjren ueuett 5^rc ueuett Berlin knife SBerlt'tter SOtcffcr SBcrl^ner 9tteffer3 SSerlt'tter SKeffer Serfi'ner Sfteffer 5BerIt / ner Sfteffer Serlt'tter 9fteffer SSerlf'ner SKeffertt SBerli'tter SKeffer your affectionate friend beiu btcf) lie / 6enber $reuub betne3 bid) tie / 6euben ftreuttbeS beiuettt bid) lie / 6enbett $reunbe beinctt btcf) lie / 6eubett ?yreuub beinc btcf) lie'benbett greunbe beiucr btcf) tie'benbett fyreuttbe betuett bid) lie'benbett fyreunbett beinc btcf) lie'benbett fyreuttbe 1 66 A GERMAN GRAMMAR ADJECTIVES: THE Cardinal Numbers (58, 59) 9M 1 naught 1 ein§ one (58, 3) 2 greet two (58, 2) 3 brei three (58, 2) 4 bier 5 fihtf 6 fecfjg 7 fieben 8 adjt 9 neutt 10 gerjtt 11 elf 12 gtoolf 13 bretgerjtt 14 t)ierger)rt 15 fiinfger)ri 16 fedjgeljtt* 11 fiebgetjn 3 18 aerjtgefjn 19 neungefjn 20 gmangtg 21 etmmbgroartgig (58, 3) 22 gtDeiunbgtocmgig 30 brei^ig 3 40 biergtg 50 fihtfgig 60 fecfjgig 3 10 fiebgig 3 80 arf)t S tg 90 neungtg 100 (ein)rjrmbert 4 101 rjtmbertimbetrt§ 121 fjunbert eimmbgroangtg NUMERALS (58-61) Ordinal Numbers (60, 61) ber, b ber, ber, ber, ber, ber, ber, bi ber, ber, ber, ber, ber, ber, ber, ber, ber, ber, bi ber, ber, ber, ber, ber, ber, bi ber, ber, ber, ber, ber, ber, ber, ber, ber, bag erfte 2 the first (60, 2) bag groeite the second bag brifte the third (60, 2) bag bierte bag fiinfte bag fetfjfie bag fte6ente bag acfjte (60, 2) bag neunte bag gefjnte bag elfte bag grootfte bag bretgefjnte ba§ btergefjttte bag fixnf§er)nte bag fect)§er)nte 3 bag ftebgerjrtte 3 bag actjtgerjttte bag neurtgefjnte bag groangigfte bag eimtrtbgroangigfte (58,3) bag gruemrtbgiDangigfie bag bretfjigfte 3 bag btergigfte bag fimfgigfte bag fedjgtgfte 3 bag fiebgigfte 3 bag acrjtgigfte bag neungtgfte bag rjunbertfie bag tjimbert unb erfte bag ljunbert emunbgroangigfie e, bag 1 Me 9?utt, bte Mullen (40, 1), naught, cipher, zero. 3 Irregular. 4 See 167, 2 2 See 167, 1. ADJECTIVES: THE NUMERALS 1 67 200 groetrjunbert ber, bie, ba§ ^roetfjunbertfte 1000 (ein)taufenb (167,2) ber, tie, ba§ taufenbfte 1001 taufenbunbeinS (167,2) ber, bte, ba§ taufenb unb erfte 1904 (em)taufenbneunfjunbert ber, bte, ba§> taufenbneunrjunbert unb unb tier or neunjebns bterte or neunjefjnfiunbert bunbert unb bier (1 67, 2) unb bierte 2142 5n)eitaujenbein^unbert= ber, bte, bag §tr>eitaufenbembunbert= gttetunbbiergtg gtoemnbbterjtgfte 100000 (ein)fjunberttaufenb (167,2) ber, bte, ba§ fiunberttaufenbfte 1000000 eine Million 7 ber, bie, ba§ miffion'fte 2000000 groei SMio'nen ber, bie, ba§ gweimittion'fte $er, bte, ba3 erfte, etc., or erfter, erfte, erfte§, etc. (46, 1) : as, I 1 . erfte3 ^abtt'el, jweiter $er3, first chapter, second verse. ©in as a numeral is used only in the sense of one (58, 3) : as, 2 1. em Ijunbert, one hundred; but, fiunbert nub etn Xage or $afire (masc. or neut.), a hundred and one days or yea7'sj Ijunbert unb etne %latf)t (fern.), a hundred, etc. 2. ba§ $afir etntanfeubneunljunbert (or neunseljnfiunbert), the year igoo; but, taufenbneunfiunbert, a thousand, etc. (of anything). The predicate superlative adjective with am (52, 4) is used in com- 3 paring one object (or group of objects) with itself under specified con- ditions, or in comparing different kinds of objects with each other. To compare several objects of the same kind with each other, the definite article should be used : as, 1. bie £age ftnb ant langften tm Stt'tti, the days are longest (at their longest) in June. 2. er fiat #bfel, ^fiaumen unb SHrfcficn; bte 2(bfe( ftnb am fieften, he has apples, plums, and cherries ; the apples are {the) best (of all). 3. turn btcfcu £uaben tft $rttj ber ftetnfte, of these boys Fred is the S7nallest (boy). In comparing the qualities of a single object, or in comparing adjec- 4 fives not used attributively (46, 48, 50), the adverbs mefjr, am meiftett, ttiemger, am rocntgften, etc. (56, 1, 54, 1) are used: as, 1. er tft mefir ftug aW fietfjig, he is more clever than diligent. 2. fie tft ntdjt im minbeften fdj ulb, she is not in the least guilty. 1 68 A GERMAN GRAMMAR THE PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS (16, 17) / you he she it N. G. D. A. itfj meiner mir mid) / of me to ox for me me bit b enter bir bid) er fie feiner iljrer il)m iljr ifjn fie e3 feiner iljm e3 N. G. D. A. mir unfer un3 un3 we of us to ox for us us ifyr Ste euer 5^er end) $ljnen end) ©ie fie they fie they fie they iljrer iljrer iljrer iljucn ifjuctt iljnen fie fie fie The uninflected intensive pronoun feftift, self is used for emphasis in all genders, persons, and numbers: as, ber &n nnb bein $remtb mart ba t you a?id your friend were there. Two or more subjects (especially pronouns) are often summed up in a single pronoun before the verb : as, i. id) nnb bn, mir moren \>a, you and I were there. 2. bn nnb er (or bn nnb ®arf), iljr wart ba, you and he (ox you and Charles) were there. When the subjects are disconnected, and often when they follow the verb, the verb agrees with the nearest subject (whether plural or singu- lar): as, i. meber id), nod) bn fannft geljen, neither I nor you can go. 2. marft bu Uttb 2Bitt)eun ha ? were you and William there? THE PRONOUNS 1 69 Pronouns agree in gender with the nouns to which they refer (whether I denoting persons or not), except that with such nouns as ba§ $ratt(etn f young lady, ba§ Sbfjndjctt, little son, they are more likely to take the natural rather than the grammatical gender, especially when they stand at some distance from the nouns : as, 1 . mo tft ntetn $nt ? where is my hat ? er (not e§) tft b(J, it is there. 2. oa§ 9)Hbd)ett, ba§ f)ter tt>ar, ift fort, the girl who was here is gone. 3. ba§ SDlcibrijen ift nirfjt Ijter, fie ift fort, the girl is not here j she is gone. 4. ba& TObdjen lieot tljren (or fehtett) $ater, the girl loves her father. 5. $l)re fyrantein £od)ter, your daughter ($fjre agrees with Xodjter instead of with $ranlein)» In writing letters, the personal pronouns bit and tljr and the corres- 2 ponding possessive pronouns bcttt and eiter (168, 1) are usually written with initial capitals (cf. 141, 1): as, 1. abzt ^u Ijdltft ntd)t 233ort, but you do not keep your word. In antiquated style the personal pronouns er and fie (third person 3 singular) and tljr (second person plural) and the corresponding pos- sessives fctn, tljr, and eiter (168,1) are used in address and written with initial capitals (cf . 6, 2) : 1 as, 1. f)at (£r Semen $rennb oerloren ? have you lost your friend? 2. %\i tjabt @nent fyrcnnb oerloren, you (plural or singular, in formal address, like Sic, 6, 2) have lost your friend. The possessive pronouns are formed from the genitive of the personal 4 pronouns (168, 1). See 62, 63. In titles of high rank are found the following possessives, the verb being third person plural (cf. Ste finb, 6,1,2): 1. (£tu, (= Ghter 2 or (Sure) ^et'ltgfeit gernfjen, Your Holiness deigns. 2. @ttJ. (= ©iter 2 or (£ttrc) SDkjeftii'tcn, Your Majesties. 3. Se. (= Seine) or <&x. (= Seiner g., d.) 2Wajeftiit', His Majesty. 4. Sljre (or $f)ro 2 ) 2Rajeft8t', Her Majesty. 5. $ljre SKRajefta'ten, Their Majesties. 1 Sometimes a noun is used in address : as, toomit farm tct) bem §errrt bierten ? with what can I serve the gentleman (= you) ? 2 An old gen. pi., uninflected, followed by the weak form of adjectives. 170 A GERMAN GRAMMAR For the demonstrative pronouns, see 64, 65, 170, 2. Before relative pronouns or names with uott, the genitive plural is berer (not beren) : as, 1. ettt a§ ®efd)(ed)t berer oon SBiUott), the family of the von Billow. For the relative and interrogative pronouns, see 66, 67, 142, 4, 5. Of the relative pronouns, ber is generally used instead of twlcfjer in the spoken language, and is commoner in the written language, 'Ser'jentge, metdjer, he who, is a clumsy book expression for ber, ber (or mer, ber, 66, 5 ; or simply ber) : as, 1 . berjetttge, metdjer feittett $rettttb fjat, ift arm (= bcr, bcr feittett $rettttb fjat, ift arm ; or mcr fetttett $rettttb f)at f bcr tft arm), he who has no friend is poor. 2. bic (= biejettigett, meftfje) \>a marett, fatten ttid)t3, those that were there had nothing. 3. btejeittgett Settte, meldje (or bic) arm fittb, geoett Otel, people who are poor give much. Instead of relative pronouns in expressions of time, place, 7nanner, or quality, al§, ba r or memt (of time), too (of time or of place), ttrie (of man- ner), at§ (of quality) are generally used (cf. 87, 1): as, 1. an bem £age, al§ (ha, or mo) cr ftarb, on the day that he died. 2. gtt ber $cit f menu mir jttttg fittb, at the time when we are young. 3. fettttft bit ba§ Sattb, mo bte gitrottett oftifyett? know est thou the la?td where the citrons bloom ? 4. foldje Stttttbett, mic id) je^t oerfeue, such hours as (142, 4) / now pass. 5. foldje Xatett, at$ oei end) gefdjeljett fittb, such deeds as (142, 4) were wrought in you. For the indefinite pronouns, see 68-71. To the indefinite pronouns belong also ir'gettb, tr/gettbettter, or ir/gettbmeldjer, any at all; plural, tr/gettb or tr/gettbmeldje: as, 1. biefe (£tabt ift grower al§ trgettbettte (or irgettbmetdje) attbre, this city is larger than any other. 2. biefe te fittb grower aW irgenb (or irgettbmetdje) attbre, these cities are larger than any others. THE DEFINITE ARTICIE, ETC. \J\ THE DEFINITE ARTICLE (10, 20,2); PUNCTUATION (12,3, 74,4) For some peculiar uses of the definite article, see 132, 1 : as, I 1. Jttiei Wlavt ben $u£, two marks afoot (distributively, 132, 1). 2. jttieitttat ba§ $afjr, twice a year (distributively, 132, 1). 3. fie fit^te t!jm bte $anb f she kissed his hand (20, 2). In Southern Germany and in the German classics the definite article 2 is common (often in a possessive sense, where Northern German uses a possessive adjective, 20) in such expressions as ber $ geroe'fen b,abt feib b,abt feib fyaben jmb Ijaben jfnb J Past Pluperfect &2dT w^j- ^# ^/ had had been IjStte roar b,attc " mar f)2tte[t roarft b,atteft roarft t)atte id or rjatte t ~Y., ^ar > gebabt' > geroe'fen fatten roaren fatten roaren tyffttet roart ijdttet roart batten roaren batten . roaren _ Future Future Perfect shall have shall be shall have had shall have been roerbe roerbe roerbe roerbe intrft lutrft nnrft trjtrft roirb roerben \ baben roerben > fein roirb tuerbeti geljSbt' ttrfrb fyaben roerben geroe'fen fein roerbet roerbet roerbet roerbet roerben , roerben njcrben roerben IMPERATIVE INFINITIVES have be (%x£) fjaben, (A?) (311) fein, (to) be t)aht (Mi)! fet (bu)! have ffabt (tt)r)! fcib (tljr)! gefyabt' (35) fyaben, geroe'fen (git) fein, fyaben @ie ! feten @ie ! (to) have had (to) have been PARTI CIPLES fja'benb, having fet'enb, being gefyabt', had geroe'fen, been THE TENSE AUXILIARIES 175 The Tense Auxiliaries: fjaben, have (26, 2); feitt, be (30, 1) SUBJUNCTIVE Present Perfect may have may be may have had may have been fjabe fei tjabt fei 1 rjabeft feieft fjabeft feieft Ijabe fyaben fei feien fyabe fyaben uxm f et > gerjtfbt' , feien • geroe'fen fjabet feiet Fjabet feiet tjaben feien fjaben J feien Past Pluperfect might have might be might have had might have been rjStte roare rjatte 1 roare " tjatteft roareft fjattefl roareft tjatte fatten roare roaren ijatte fatten roare >ger)abt' roaren > geroe'fen fjattet roaret rjattet roaret fatten roaren fatten roaren Future Future Perfect shall have shall be shall have had shall have been roerbe roerbe roerbe roerbe roerbeft roerbeft roerbeft roerbeft roerbe irerben • tjdben roerbe roerben • fein roerbe roerben gebjcfbt' tnerbe ' t)aben roerben getne'fen 'fein roerbet roerbet roerbet roerbet roerben , roerben roerben. roerben. CONDITIONAL Present Past should have should be should have had should have been trurbe rourbe 1 murbe roftrbe rourbeft trjUrbeji rofirbeft rourbeft rorlrbe rourben > rjaben rourbe rourben ► fetrt rourbe rofirben gefjabt' rrjfirbe " rjaben rourben geroe'fen fein trjurbet rofirbet roUrbet rourbet rourben tofirben roftrbert. rourben. 176 A GERMAN GRAMMAR The Tense, Mood, and Voice Auxiliary: wcrbcn, become (32, 106) INDICATIVE Present become inerbe * (see 1061) ttrfrft * trjfrb * tuerben * luerbet * tuerben * Perfect have become bin * 1 Hit * 1ft * ftnb * feib * ftnb * . 'getuor'ben Past became tuiirbe (or tuarb) * ttmrbeft (or tuarbft) * ttmrbe (or tuarb) * tuitrben * luui'bet * tuuiben * Pluperfect had beco?ne mar * ■ roarft * War * tuaren * mart * toaren * - getosr'ben Future shall become tuerbe * tufrft * tofrb * tuerben * tuerbet * tuerben * » tuerben Future Perfect shall have beco tuerbe * " tutrft * tntrb * irjerben * tuerbet * irjerben * me getuor'ben fein IMPERATIVE become tuerbe (bu) * tuerbet (ir)r) * tuerben @ie * INFINITIVES * ($u) tuerben, {to) be- come * getoor'ben (5Q) fein, {to) have becorne PARTICIPLES * tuer'benb, becoming * geiuor'ben, become THE TENSE, MOOD, AND VOICE AUXILIARY 177 The Tense, Mood, and Voice Auxiliary: foerben, become (32, 106) SUBJUNCTIVE Present Perfect may become may have become tnerbe * fei * ] tnerbeft * feteft * tnerbe * tnerben * fet * feien * ►getnuVben tnerbet * feiet * tnerben * feien * Past Pluperfect might beco7ne might have become toitrbe * tuSre * \ toiirbeft * tuttreft * toiirbe * tniirben * tu&re * tuSren * ^getnnVben tniirbet * tnSret * tniirben * tuaren * . Future Future Perfect shall become shall have become tnerbe * ] tnerbe * ] tnerbeft * tnerbeft * tnerbe * trjerben * • tnerben tnerbe * tnerben * getuor'ben fein roerbet * tuerbet * tnerben * tnerben * CONDITIONAL Present Past should become should have become tniirbe * 1 tniirbe * - tniirbeft * tniirbeft * tniirbe * tniirben * ► tnerben tniirbe * tniirben * getuor'ben 'fein tniivbet * trjiirbet * miirben * - tniirben * 1/8 A GERMAN GRAMMAR Weak Verbs: fagen, say; folgen, follow (172, 4) INDICATIVE Present Perfect say follow have said have followed fage fotge t)a6e 6m fagft • foigft f,aft btft fagt fagen folgt folgen I)at t)56en - , *f* 9eW fmb >gefolgt / fagt folgt fyaht feib fagen folgen l)a6en fmb Past Pluperfect said followed had said had followed fagte folgte fiatte ] toar fagteft folgteft rjatteft toarft fagte folgte fjatte toar ^gefagt' gefoigt' fag ten folgten fatten toaren fagtet folgtet f)attet mart fag ten folgten fatten toaren , Future Future Perfect shall say shall follow shall have said shall have followed toerbe toerbe i toerbe toerbe nrirft tofrft tofrft tofrft tofrb tocrben tofrb ►iaqett toerben ► folgen tofrb toerben gefagt^ tofrb ^a6en nierben gefolgt^ fetn toerbet loerbet toerbet loerbet roerben toerben toerben toerben ^ IMPERATIVE INFINITIVES j^y follow (ail) fagen, {to) (git) folgen, {to) fage (b B) ! folge (bit) ! say follow fagt (if r)! folgt (tt>r)! gefdgt / (5u)!ja6en, gefoigt' (5u)fein, fagen S e ! folgen Sie ! {to) have said {to)have followed PARTICIPLES fa'genb, saying fol'genb, following gefagt', said gefotgt / ', followed WEAK VERBS 179 Weak Verbs: fagett, say; folgen, follow (172, 4) SUBJUNCTIVE Present Perfect may say may follow 7nay have said may have followed fage folge fjabe fei ' fageft folgeft t)abeft feieft fage folge fjabe fa ^qefagt' . . .gefotgt' fag en folgen tjaben b ' b feten faget folget t)abet feiet fag en folgen t)56en feten _ Past Pluperfect might say might follow might have said might have followed fagte folgte tjtitte , tocire fagteft folgteft fjatteft toareft fagte folgte J)atte mare Igefagt 7 > gef otgt' fagten folgten fatten toaren fagtet folgtet fyattet toaret fagten folgten fatten toaren J Future Future Perfect shall say shall follow shall have said shall have followed ttterbe 1 toerbe toerbe " toerbe roerbeft toerbeft toerbeft tnerbeft toerbe toerben toerbe >faqen toerben > folgen toerbe toerben gefagt' toerbe 1)5 ben toerben gefolgt" fetn toerbet toerbet toerbet toerbet toerben j toerben j roerben toerben j CONDITIONAL Present Past [lowed should say should follow should have said should have fol- toitrbe -^ toitrbe ^ toiirbe ^ toiirbe -^ toiirbefi toiirbeft toiirbeft toiirbeft toiirbe toiirben toiirbe •fagen « tourben > folgen toiirbe tniirben gefagt' toiirbe f)aben rourben gefolgt^ feirt toiirbet toiirbet toiirbet toiirbet toiirben- toiirben - toiirben J toiirben J i8o A GERMAN GRAMMAR Strong Verbs: ftngen, sing; finfen, sink (172, 5) INDICATIVE Present Perfect sing sink have sung have sunk ftnge finfe tjabe "J bin ] fingft finfft w 6!ft fingt finft fjat ge= tft ,ge= ftngen fin fen f)a Ben fung'en ftnb funf'en fingt ftnft f)a6t feib ftngen finfen Ijaben ffnb J Past Pluperfect sang sunk had sung had sunk fang fan! f}atte i mar -1 fangft fanfft Ijatteft roarft fang fan! Ijatte ge= nmr ge= fang en fan!en flatten fung'en roaren funf'en fangt fanft pttet mart fang en fanfen fatten J roaren J Future Future Perfect shall sing shall sink shall have sung shall have sunk trjerbe ] trjerbe toerbe roerbe ttrfrft trjtrft totrft "^ ttrfrb tntrb ttrfrb P rofrb ge= merben htnqen roerben >fin!en roerben Munq'en toerbet ►junf'en toerbet roerbet iuerbet iem merben toerben . roerben , roerben j IMPERATIVE INFINITIVES sing sink (Sit) fingen, {to) ( S u) finfen, (A?) finge (bit) ! finfe (bu) ! jzVzg - .rz>z/£ fingt (tf)r) ! ftnft (tljr) ! gefung / en(5u)f)a6en,gefunf / en(5ii)fein r fingen ©te ! finfen ©ie ! {to) have sung {to) have sunk PARTI CIPLES fing'enb, singing finf'enb, sinking gefung'en, sung gefunf'en, sunk STRONG VERBS Strong Verbs: fmgcn, sing j firtlett, sink (172,5) SUBJUNCTIVE Present Perfect may sing may sink may have sung may have sunk firtge ftnfe fjabe fet ftngeft finfeft f)56eft feteft ftnge ftnfe f)abe ge, fei ^ ftngert finfen fjaben ftmg'ett fetett funf v ert ftnget ftnfet fmbet fetet ftngen finfen fjaben feiett Past Pluperfect might sing might sink might have sung might have sunk fange fdnfe f)dtte - tudre fangeft fanfeft fjdtteft toareft fange fanfe ^atte ges todre fi& fang en fanfeit rjdtten 'fimg'en tuarett 'futtf'ett fanget fanfet r)Sttet tudret fang ett fdttfen fjiittert - tudrett - Future Future Perfect shall sing shall sink shall have sung shall have sunk trjerbe tnerbe - trjerbe trjerbe toerbeft toerbeft tuerbeft tuerbeft lucrbe tuerbe trjerbe ? e= . tuerbe ge= tuerbett hmqett tuerbett • finfen: merbett gutter en ^abett m " ben tuerbet >fnnf^en ruerbet tuerbet tuerbet tuerbett tuerbett . nierben tuerbett _, CONDITIONAL Present Past should sing should sink should have sung should have sunk tuitrbe - tuitrbe ■ tuitrbe - tuitrbe ^| tuiirbeft tuiirbeft tuiirbeft tuiirbeft roiirbe tuitrbe tuitrbe 9 e= tuitrbe ge= hJiirbert • ftngett ruiirben > finfen tuitrben fitnq / ett r . t ,-r tnnrbett funf'en tniirbet tuitrbet tuitrbet baben r , t tuurbet fettt tuitrben. tuiirben- toiirbett- toitrben- A GERMAX GRAMMAR The Passive Voice : tic ben, / geliebt' jet feien geiiebt' toorben luerbet feiet trjerben feien Past Pluperfect might be loved might have been loved toiirbe " roare ] nmrbeft toSreft ttmvbe ttmrbert > gettebt' roare roSren geliebt' roorben toiirbet tt)8ret ttmrbert . toaren Future Future Perfect shall be loved shall have been loved roerbe * roerbe rrjerbeft tuerbejt trjerbe getiebt' trjerbe geUebt' trjerben ' Herbert trjerben toorben fein iuerbet roerbet tocrben trjerben CONDITIONAL Present Past should be loved should have been loved ttriirbe toiirbe - trjitrbeft toiirbejr tuiirbe gettebt' toiirbe geliebt 7 tofivben tnerben toiirben toorben fein roiirbet roiirbet toiirben toiirben j 184 A GERMAN GRAMMAR Reflexive Verbs: fid) freueit, rejoice (18, 3) INDICATIVE Present Perfect rejoice have rejoiced id) freue mid) id) t)a6e mid) " bii freuft bid) bu f)aft bid) er freut fief) er f)at fid) > gefreut' nur freuen un3 totr fiaben un§ fljr freut eud) tin* t)a6t eud) fie freuen fid) fie t)56en fid) Past Pluperfect rejoiced /m^ rejoiced id) freute mid) idj rjatte mid) -1 bii freuteft bid) bu fiatteft bid) er freute fid) er rjatte fid) - gefreut trjtr freuten un§ rotr fatten une ttjr freutet eud) irjr t)attet end) fie freuten fid) fie fatten fid) J Future Future Perfect shall rejoice shall have rejoiced idj merbe mid) ' id) merbe mid) " bit trjfrfi bid) bii rofrft bid) er hrfrb fid) toil roerben un§ > freuen er rotrb. fid) nur merbenun§ gefreut ' rjaben ffjr tnerbet eud) fljr merbet eud) fie roerben fid) fie merben fid) IMPERATIVE INFINITIVES rejoice fid) (§u) freuen, (to) freue (bit) bid) ! rejoice freut (Ujr) eud) ! fid) gefreut / (jfl) fjaben, freuen <3ie fid) ! (/ gefreut' ttjr freue t eud) ti)r tjabet eud) fie freuen fid) fie tjaben fid) Past Pluperfect might rejoice might have rejoiced id) freute mid) id) t)dtte mid) -1 bu freuteft bid) bu flatten bid) er freute fid) mir freuten un§ er t)dtte fid) nut fatten un§ ► gefreut' tfjr freutet eud) tl)r t)dttet euct) fie freuten fief) fie r/itten fid) J Future Future Perfect shall ?-ejoice shall have rejoiced idj merbe mid) " id) merbe mid) ' bu merbeft bid) bu merbeft bid) er merbe fid) iDtr merben un§ ► freuen er merbe fid) mtr inerben un§ gefreut' " i)56en tfjr merbet eud) tf)r merbet end) fie merben fid) _ fie inerben fid) j CONDITIONAL Present Past should rejoice should have rejoiced id) miirbe mid) -» icf) luiirbe mid) -] bu miirbeft bid) bu miirbeft bid) er miirbe fid) mtr miirben un§ ■ freuen er miirbe fict) mtr miirben un§ gefreut / t)56en tr)r miirbet end) tt)r miirbet eud) fie nmrben fid) - fie miirben fid) J 1 86 A GERMAN GRAMMAR The Mood Auxiliaries : biirf cit f nay; fonnen, can; mogen may; miiffen, must; fotten, shall; wotten, will (78, 80, 148, 200) INDICATIVE Present barf !ann mag mufe foil HJtfl barfft fannft ntagft mu|3t fottft nrittft barf fann mag mufj foil toitt biirfen fonnen mogen miiffen fotten rootten biirft fonnt mogt miif3t fottt mo (It biirfen fonnen mogen miiffen fotten rootten Past burfte fonnte modjte mufjte fottte roottte burfteft !onnteft mocfjteft mufeteft fottteft toottteft burfte fonnte mocrjte mufcte fottte moltte etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. Perfect Pluperfect r)a6e 1 etc. , geburft', gefonnt', f^atte " fjatteft Ijatte etc. geburft', gefonnt', gemodjt', gemufst', gemody/, gemuBt', gefottV, geiootlt/ gefottV, gemottt' Future Future Perfect roerbe roerbe 1 tofrft biirfen, fonnen, mogen, tofrft ! geburft' fjaben, lofrb miiffen, fotten, rootten tofrb gefonnt' f)56en, etc. etc. etc. 1 IMPERATIVE INFINITIVES mode (bii) ! The other five (5Q) biirf en, fonnen, mogen, etc. luottt (ftjr) ! verbs have no geburft' ( ju) Fjaben, gefonnt' luotten ©ie ! imperative (&) S iben, etc. PARTII :iples biir'fenb fbn'nenb mb'genb miif / fenb foWenb tool'lenb geburft' gefonnf gemodjt 7 gemufet / gefottt' geroottt' THE MOOD AUXILIARIES IS? The Mood Auxiliaries : biirfen, may; fontten, can; mogen, may; miiffen, must; foUen, shall; ttoflen, will (78, 80, 148, 200) SUBJUNCTIVE Present biirfe fomte moge miiffe folle toofle biirfeff fonrteft mogeft miiffeft fofleft toolleft biirfe fonne moge miiffe folle tootle biirfert fonnen mogen miiffen follen tootten biirfet fonnet moget miiffet follet toollet biirfen fonnen mogen miiffen foffen toollen Past biirfte fonnte modjte miifjte follte tooHte biirfteft fonnteft moci)teft miiBteft fotlteft toollteft biirfte fonnte modjte miiJ3te foate toollte etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. Perfect Pluperfect tjabe ptte ] tjabeft geburff, gef onnt' gemodjt', ptteft geburft^gefonnf ^emocrjr', rjabe gemufct', gefott ' ' , getoollV tjatte gemuftt', gefollt' , geioouY etc. etc. Future Future Perfect toerbe toerbe tuerbeft biirfert, fonnen mogen, toerbeft geburft' Ijaben, toerbe miiffen, foffen, toollen toerbe ' gefonnf tjaben, etc. etc. etc. CONDITIONAL Present Past toiirbe ] toiirbe toiirbeft biirfert, fontten mogen, toiirbeft geburft' l)aben, toiirbe miiffen, foffen, toollen toiirbe gefonnt 7 fjaben, etc. etc. etc. A GERMAN GRAMMAR Separable Verbs : luic'bcrfagcn, say again (92) INDICATIVE Present [age ... 1 « ... fagt . . . etc. (178, 1) nrie'ber Perfect fjafee ... l w . . . • ,. - f)at ... [ ^i^bergeiagt etc. (178,1) Past jagte . . . toie / ber etc. (178,2) Pluperfect fjatte . . . ttue'bergejagt etc. (178,2) Future ttjerbe . . . ttne'berjagen. etc. (178,3) Future Perfect jrjerbe . . . mie'bergejagt fjafcen etc. (178,3) IMPERATIVE jage (bit) . . . ttne'ber ! etc. (178,4) INFINITIVES irjie / ber(5u)fagen etc. (178,4) PARTICIPLES ttne'berjagertb, etc. (178,5) SUBJUNCTIVE jage jagejt jage etc. roie'ber ( l 79>*)\ fyabt . . . r)a6eft ... | f)a6e ... I etc. (179, i)J ttrie'bergefagt lagte etc Past . . nrie'ber Pluperfect f)dtte . . . nri e' berg e jag t etc. (179,2) tocrbe etc Future . . . ttne'berjagen (i79>3) Future Perfect toerbe . . . nne'bergefagt fjaben etc. (179,3) CONDITIONAL tuiirbe etc. Present „ . . tnie'berjagen (i79>4) ttmrbe . . . nne'bergefagt T)aben etc. (1 79, 4) IMPERSONAL VERBS Inseparable Verbs : entfa'gen, renounce (94) INDICATIVE Present entfa'ge Perfect : ^a6e entfagt' etc. (178, 1) etc. (178, 1) Past: entfag'te Pluperfect: f)atte entfagt' etc. (178, 2) etc. (178,2) Future : toerbe entfa'gen Fut. Perf . : toerbe entjagt' f)56en etc. (178,3) etc. (178,3) IMPERATIVE INFINITIVES entfa'ge (bu) ! (tfi) entfa'gen etc. (178,4) etc. (178,4) PARTICIPLES entja'genb, etc. (178, 5) SUBJUNCTIVE Present : entja'ge Perfect: I)5be entjagt' etc. (i79>0 etc. (179, 1) Past: entjag'te Pluperfect : fjatte entfagf etc. (179, 2) etc. (179, 2) Future : toerbe entja'gen Fut. Perf. : toerbe entjagK f)S6en etc. (179, 3) etc. (179, 3) CONDITIONAL Present : toiirbe entja'gen Past : toiirbe entjagt' n,a6en etc. (i79>4) etc. (179, 4) Impersonal Verbs: H rcgnct, it rams (172, 4, 5) INDICATIVE Present : eg regnet Perfect : eg r)at gereg'net Past: e§ reg'nete Pluperfect : eg Ijatte gereg'net Future : eg totrb regnen Fut. Perf. : eg toirb gereg'net f)a6en SUBJUNCTIVE Present : eg regne Perfect : eg t)a6e gereg'net Past: eg reg'nete Pluperfect : eg t)dtte gereg'net Future : eg toerbe regnen Fut. Perf. : eg toirb gereg'net l)a6en CONDITIONAL Present : eg toiirbe regnen 1 Past : eg toiirbe gereg'net f)a6en 190 A GERM AX GRAMMAR Weak Verbs with Peculiarities in Inflection (72, 1,2) PRESENT INDICATIVE wait talk breathe ope?i blame wander toar'te rFbe afme off'ne td'bte roan'bre toar'teft re'beft at / meft bff'neft ta'betft man'berft luar'tet re'bet at / met off'net ta / belt nmn'bert toar'ten re 7 ben at'men bff'nen ta'beln nmn'bern toar'tet re'bet afmet off'net ta'belt toan'bert roar'ten re'ben at'men off'nen ta'beln faan'bern PAST INDICATIVE toar/tete re'bete at / mete bff'nete ta'belte man'berte toar'teteft re'beteft at / meteft b'ff'neteft ta'betteft man'bcrteft toar'tete re'bete at'mete off'nete ta^belte nmn'berte inar'tetcn re'beten at'meten bff'neten ta'.betten nmn'berten tnar'tetet re'betet afmetet off'netet ta'beltet nmn'bertet tuar'teten re'beten afmeten bff'neten ta'belten man'berten PAST PARTICIPLE geroar'tet gere'bet geat'met gebff'net geta / bett geroan'bert Strong Verbs with Peculiarities in Inflection (72 3,4) PRESENT INDICATIVE run hold help see give take Icmfe Ijalte fjetfe w gebe netjme taufft ^altff fitlfft \m gfbft, gttft nfmmft lauft ptt fitlft m gibt, gl6t nfnvmt laufen fallen r^etfert feljen geben nefjmen lauft pallet Wt mt g'ebt nefymt laufen fallen ljelfen fetjen geben nel)iuen IMPERATIVE (74, 2) taufe (bu) Ijalte (bu) m (bu) ! ftec) (bu) gtb, g!b (bu) ! ntmm (ba) ! lauft (tf)r) battel (tljr) ijelft (t()r) ! fefit (i$r) g'ebt (ti)r) ! uefjmt (tr)r) ! laufen ©ie tjalten ©ie . rjelfen ©te ! feljen ^ie geben ©ie ! net)men©te! IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS IQI Irregular Weak Verbs (172, 4) Six weak verbs and their compounds are inflected regularly (178, 179), but have a change of stem vowel in the past indicative and the past participle: Past Subjv. brennte fennte nennte rennte fenbete tuenbete Pres. Infin. Past Indie. brennen bronnte fennen fannte nennett nannte renttett rannte fenbett fanbte ttenben toanbte Past Partic. gebrannf btirn gefannf know genannt' na.77ie \\i gerannt' run gefanbf send getoanbf turn Three verbs have a change of stem vowel (and modification) in the past subjunctive, also ; and they suffer consonantal changes in their principal parts, as in English. In the present indicative (191, 3) ttuffen is inflected like the mood auxiliaries (186, 1): bringert bradjte bradite gebracbt' bring, take benfen bad)te bacbte gebacbt' think tmffett ttuftte nroJ3te geitmjjf know PRESENT INDICATIVE bring e benfe ir»eiB bring ft benfjt roeifjt bring t ben!t lueiB brtngen benfen tniffen bring t benft toifet bring en benfen tuiffert PAST INDICATIVE brachte bad)te inuBte brad)teft badjteft JDUBteft bracfrte bad)te nmjjte bracf)ten badjten itmfsten bradjtet bacbtet nmjjtet bracfjten bad)ten ttmfjten PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE bring e benfe nriffe bringeft benfeft teiffeft brtnge benfe ttnfje bring en benfen njtffen bringet benfet toiffet brtngen benfen toiffen PAST SUBJUNCTIVE brachte bdebte luiiBte brdd)teft barfjteft roiijjteft bracbte bdd)te roitBte bradjten bdaiten ttriifsten brarfjtet badjtet ttmfjtet bradjten bddjten tuitfjten 192 A GERMAN GRAMMAR The Strong Verbs classified according to their Vowel Changes 1 Class Pres. Infin. Past. Indie. Past Partic. No. of Verbs I a f i 1 iC [ u a 18 II c f a 1 a li 38 III i a C 21 IV ei (!. a 38 V ie 21 VI a, o r it 8 VII Irregular Forms 20 2 Class I: Root Vowel a 1. a i a: fangen, fjangen. 2. <* ie a: Blafen, Braten, fallen, 2 fallen, faff en, raten, fd)lafen. 3. a u a: Bacfen, 2 fafjren, graBen, laben, fdjaffen, 2 fdjlagen, tragen, tt)ad)ien, tbafdjen. 3 ' Class II : Root Vowel e 1. e a c: effen, 3 freffen, geben, gene'fen, geftfjeTjen, lefen, meffen, fefjen, treten, bergef'fen. 1 For an alphabetical list, see 194. These classes are for drill work in giving principal parts and meanings. After being recited, the principal parts should be written on the blackboard, in columns : as, fang en l)alt en eff en I i I I ie I I afel ge| a |en ge| a |cn ge|gcffeit 2 For the past indicative, see 194. 3 For the past participle, see 194. THE STRONG VERBS 1 93 2. c ft OJ befefj'Ien, berften, bredjen, embfeti'tert, erfdjred^en, 1 gelten, fjel= fen, nefjmen, 1 fdjelten, jpredjen, ftedjen, ftefjlen, fterben, trejjen, 1 berber/gen, herber'ben, inerben, tuerfen. 3. t ot berrje'gen, fed)ten, flecfjten, Ijeben, melfen, queflen, fdjeuen, fdjmelgen, fcfyneu'en, toeben. Class III : Root Vowel i I 1. t ft OX begm'nen, gennVnen, rinnen, fdjnrimmen, ftnnen, fpinnen. 2. i ft it: binben, finben, bringen, geling'en, flingen, ringen, fdjlingen, fd)tt)inben, jcfjttungen, fingen, fmfen, fpringen, trinfen, nrinben, jroingen. Class IV: Root Vowel et 2 1. et t it fid) beftet'^ett, beitfen, erbtei'djen, gteid)en, gfciten, 1 greifen, 1 fneifen, 1 freiftfien, tetben, 1 pfei'fen, 1 reiBen, retten, 1 fd)leid)en, fdjleifen, 1 jdyteiBen, fdnneiften, fdjnetben, 1 fdjrettett, 1 fpleifeen, ftreid)en, ftreiten, 1 meidjen. 2. ettcie: Metben, gebei'^en, lei^ert, metben, £retjen, retben, fdjeiben, foremen, jdjreiben, fc^reien, jdjiueigen, jpeien, ftetgen, treiben, t>er5ei / tjen f toeifen. Class V: Root Vowel te 3 te : btegen, bteten, ftiegen, f(tet)en, [He^en, frieren, genie'fjen, giefjen, fvted)en, riedjen, fd)ieben, fdjieften, fdjUeften, fieben, 1 fpvieBen, ftieben, triefen, berbrie'feen, rjertie'ren, ttuegen, ^k^en, 1 Class VI : Root Vowel a, o, ft 4 ft,o,it 0: betru'gen, erto'jdjen, garen, furett, tugen, fdjinarert, ioagett. Class VII: Irregular^ e bitten, gebci'rett, get)(e)n, glimmen, fynten, ^ei|3ert r ftimnten, fdtnmert, lew* fen, ttegen, riifen, faufen, fangen, flatten, jdmauben, fcfyuoren, ftt^en, fteij(e)n, fto^en, tutu 1 For the past indicative and the past participle, see 194* 2 These verbs are to be learned from the alphabetical list, 1 94. Some of them are among the most important in the language. 194 A GERMAX GRAMMAR An Alphabetical List of the Strong and Irregular Verbs (108-119) Pres. Infin. Pres. Indie. 2, 3 Sing. Impv. 2 Sing. Past Indie. Past Subjv. Past Par tic. Meaning barfen bdtf-ft, -t barf(e) but bufe gebarfett bake bcfehlcn befieb>ft, -t befiebl bcfobl befobte 1 bcfoljlcu command licflct^cu befleif5-(ef)t, -t befleifte bem befliffc bcfiiffcit 2 bcgtuucti beginn-ft, -t beginn(e) begarnt begonne 8 begonnen begin betfjcu beiB-(ef)t, -t beife(e) m biffe gebtfjen bite bergeu birg-ft, -t birg barg biirge 4 geborgeu hide bcrfrcH birft, birft birft barft borfte 1 geborften 5 burst beroegen 6etr>eg-ft f -t beroeg(e) bcniog betooge bett»5gen induce biegeu bieg-ft, -t bteg(e) bog boge gcbogen bend btcten biet-(e)ft, -et biet(e) bot bote gebotcn offer btnben binb-eft, -et binb(e) banb bdnbe gcbunben bind bitten bttt-eft, -et bitte, 6ttV bat bate gebeten beg, ask btafcu 6lSf-(cf)t, -t bla§, biafe blie3 btiefe gcblafert blow btetbeu bletb-ft, -t bleib(e) blicb bliebe geblicbctt 6 remain bratett brat-ft, brat brat(e) briet briete gcbratett roast brccfien brid>ft, -t brid) bracfy bradje gebrodjen break bremten brenn-ft, -i bremte bramtte bremtte gebrannt burn brtngert bring-ft, -t brirtg(e) brarfjte brtid)te gebradjt bring benfen benf-ft, -t bertfe borfjte bdd)te a,tbad)t think brefdjett brtt"c^-(e)ft, -t brifd) braftfj 6 brofdie 1 gebrofrfjett thresh briitgett brtng-ft, -t brirtg(e) broug brdnge gcbrungcit 5 press biirfen barf-ft, barf burfte biirfte geburft may emttfeblcn empfieb(-ft, -t empftebl em&fafit empfoble 1 cmpfofilctt commend erbletdjeit erbteid>ft, -t erbleidje erbletcfite erb(eid)te erMeidjt 6 turn pale erbttd) erblidje erbtifhen 5 expi?-e edofdjert erlifd>(e)ft, -t erttfet) 7 ertof eft 7 erlbfdje. erlofrheu 7 go out 5 erfefiretfen erfd)rid-ft, -t erfd)rid erfdjrof erfdjrafe erfefcrorfen 5 be terri- fied effert iff-eft, iK iB-t iB 56 atfe gegeffert eat ffibren fSfir-ft, -t fabr(e) fufif fubre gcfaljren 5 go, drive fallen faU-ft, -t faU(e) fid fiete gefatfeu 5 fall faugen fartg-ft, -t fang(e) ft«Jl finge gefangen catch ferfjteit ftd)t-ft, fid)t fidjt W fbdjte gcfrjtfjtcn fight 1 '6 or ii distinguishes the form from the present. 2 Reflexive, apply your- self (18, 3). 3 The u represents an earlier ii (cf. 194 1 ). 4 0r biirge (194 1 ). 6 Inflected with fein (30, 1). 6 Orbrofdj. 7 Sometimes weak (172,4). THE STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS 195 Pres.Infin. Pres. Indie. 2,3 Sing. Impv. 2 Sing. Past Indie. Past Subjv. Past Partic. Meaning fhtben ftnb-eft, -et fhtbe fanb fonbe gefnnben find fiecfyten fUcfit-ft, fltdjt fUcbt fluent flbcbte geflorfjtcn braid fCtegett flieg-ft, 4 ftteg(e) Pg floge gefldgen 1 fly fttefjen fttefi-ft, 4 fliefj(e) ffl ftofje geftofyen 1 flee fltefcen fUeB-(ef)t, 4 fftefe(e) m Pffe geftoffen 1 flow frcffen friff-eft,2 frife-t frifc fraf? frctfse gefreffen eat* frieren frter-ft, -t frier(e) - fror frore gefrorett freeze gttren gar-ft, -t gfire gor 4 gore 4 gegoren 4 ferment gebSren gebter-ft, 4 gebtex gebar gebare geboren bear geben gtb-ft, gib-ft, 4 gib, g{b 966 gabe gegeben give gebetljen gebet^-ft, 4 gebeU)(e) gebtelj gebiefie gebieljen * thrive gefj(e)n ge>ft, 4 gefj(e) gt«s gtnge gegangen 1 go geltngen , gcltng-t gelang gelange getungen 5 succeed gelten gilt-ft, gilt gilt gait gblte 6 gegolten be worth genefen genef-(ef)t, -t genefe gena3 genafe genefen 1 recover genieften genie£-(ef)t, -t gemejj(e) genofj genoffe genoffen enjoy geftf)ef)en , gefdjiefj4 — gefdjal) gefcr)at)e geftfjefjen 1 happen geroinnen genrinn-ft, -t getmtm(e) genmnn getobrtrte 7 geroonnen win gtefjen gieMef)t, 4 giefe(e) 9*1? 00 lie gegoffen pour gletdjen gleidj-ft, 4 gtetcfj(e) gltdj gtidje geglicfjen be like gieiten gleit-eft, -et gtett(e) gittt glittc geglitten 1 glide glimmen gltmm-ft, 4 glimnt(e) glomm 4 glbmtne 4 geglom= men 4 glhmner graben grab-ft, ' 4 grab(e) gru6 gritbe gegraben dig gretfen greif-ft, 4 greif(e) griff Qnffe gegriffen seize fiaben m, -t fja&e f)fitte Ijatte gefjobt have fatten fjalt-ft Salt balt(e) fjielt fiielte geljaltett hold fjangen Jjang-jr, 4 f)ang(e) f)tng binge geljangen hang 9 fatten fjau-ft, 4 f)au(e) f)ieb ^tebe geljanen hew, cut fieben r}e&-ft, -t fjebe, Ijefc' bob bobe 9 geljoben heave, lift fjciften f)etB-(ef)t, 4 beij3(e) W% biefee geljei^en be called ^elfen $ufo 4 *Uf Half plfe 6 geljolfen help 1 Inflected with fein (30, 1). 2 0r frife-t. 3 0f animals. 4 Sometimes weak(i72,4). 5 Generally impersonal, with d. (195 1 ). 6 b or it distinguishes the form from the present. 7 The b represents an earlier it (cf. 195 6 ). 8 Intransitive. 9 0r pbe (195 6 ). 196 A GERM AX GRAMMAR Pres. Infin. Pres. Indie. Impv. Past Past Past Meaning 3, 3 Sing. 2 Sing. Indie. Subjv. Partic. fcnitcit fenn-fr, -t ferine tannic fcitntc gefannt know 1 fltmmcn tlimm-ft, >t flimm(e) tiomnx 2 ftommc' 2 gcflom= men 2 climb* flingen fting-ft, -t ffing(e) flnng flange geftangen sound fitcifcu bteif-ft, -t fneif(e) fniff fniffe gefmffen pinch footmen fomm-ft, -t fomm-ft, -t fomm ffim fame gefommen 3 come tinmen fann-ft, faun fottutc fbnnte gefonnt can fretfd)en freifa)-(e)ft, -t freifa)(e) frifdj frifdje gefrijdjen scream fncrfjcn frted>ft, -t frierfj(e) frorf) rrotfje gefrodjen 3 crawl rnrcn fur-ft, -t Hire for 2 fore 2 geforen choose laben lab-ft, -t fab(e) tab lube gelabcn load inbcn lab-eft, -et (ab-ft, -t tab(e) labete tab labete lube geldben invite Ittffcn laff-eft, t&H -t fofj m liefce gelaffcn let, allow (aufen lauf-ft, -t lauf(e) lief tiefe gelaufett 3 run leiben fetb-eft, -et (eib(e) lift (itte gelitten suffer leifjen IeUj-ft, -t fetf)(e) ltcli liefje geliefjen lend tefcti Uef-(ef)r, -t lies m (afe gelefcn read uegen Ueg-ft, -t liege 4 lag [age gclegcn lie lUgen lug-ft, -t lilg(e) log I3ge getagen lie 5 meibett meib-eft, -et meib(e) mieb miebe gemtcben shun melfen melf-ft, -t melfe melfte melfte gemclft milk milf-ft, -t molt mblfe gemolfen meffeit miff-eft, mitf-i, -t miB mfifc mafje gemeffen ?neasure mtftlmgen , mifettng-t miftlang mtfjlange mtfcumgen 6 fail mOgen mffg-ft, mtfg motfjte modjte gemorfjt may, like mitfjen muB-t, mufj mnftte miirjte gemufet must nefjmen nfmm-ft, -t ttltnnt naljm nSfmte genommen take ncnnen nenn-ft, -t nennc uamtte nennte genannt name pfeifen pfetf-ft, -t pfeif(e) m Pfiffe gepftffen whistle- preifcn preif-(ef)t, -t preife 7 prtc§ prtefe gepriefen praise 1 be acquainted with. 3 Inflected with fein (30, 1) 6 Often impersonal (144, 2), with d. (196 3 ) Sometimes weak (172,4). Or Keg'. b tell a lie. 7 Or prei». THE STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS 197 Pres. Indie. Impv. Past Past Past Pres. Infin. 2, 3 Sing. 2 Sing. Indie. Subjv, Partic. Meaning qneflen quiH-ft, -t quid gnofl qubUe geqnoften 1 gush rateu rat-ft, rat rdt(e) riet riete gcraten advise rctben reib-ft, -t reib(e) neb rtebe gerteben rub rcijjen xei&-(ef)t, -t tetB(e) rife rifle gcviffen tear reiteu reit-eft, -et reit(e) ritt rttte gcritten 1 ride remteit rerm-ft, -t rertrte rannte rermte gerannt 1 run rtedjen riedj-ft, -t rted)(e) rod) rodje gcrodjen smell ringen rirtg-ft, -t ring(e) rang range gemngen wrestle 2 rtnnen rirtrt-ft, -t rtrtn(e) rami ratine geronnen 1 run riifen raf-ft, -t ruf(e) rtef riefe gcnlfen call, cry faufen fcmf-fi, -t fauf(e) i*ff fop gefoffen drink fang en faug-ft, -t faug(e) foO foge gefogen suck ftfjaffen fd)aff-ft, -t fd)aff(e) frfjUf fdiiife gefdjaffen create fdjaflcn fd)all-ft, -t fd)alt(e) ftt>U 3 fd)bae 3 gef pollen 3 ring fdjctbcu fdjetb-eft, -et fd)eib(e) fdjieb fdjiebe gefdjieben paiH fdjctnen fd) eirt-ft, -t fdjeirt(e) frfjteit fdjiene gefdjtenen shine frficlten fdjilt-ft, fdjitt fdjilt fc^alt febbtte 5 gefdjotten scold fdjeren febier-ft, 3 -t 3 fdiier 3 fdjor 3 f dj ore 3 gefdjoren 3 shear fdjteben fdneb-ft, -t fd)ieb(e) mb fdjobe gefdjoben shove fdjiefjen fd)te£-(ef)t, -t fd)ie|(e) frf)6H fcpffe gefdjoffen shoot fdjtnben febinb-eft, -et fd)trtb(e) fdjnnb fd]iinbe gefdjnnben flay fcfjlafen fefdaf-ft, -t fd)taf(e) frfjticf fdjliefe gefdjiofen sleep fdjfagcn fcfjISg-ft, -t fctjlag(e) fdjlitg fdjluge gefdjlagen strike fc^lctc^en fcbleid)-ft, -t fcb(eid)(c) frf)ttd) fd)ltd)e gefdjitdjen 1 sneak fdjletfen rawf-ft -t fcbteif(e) Wiff fd)Uffe gefdjUffcn whet fdjtetften fdjleife-(ef)t, -t fcb/tei£(e) fctiiif? fcbliffe gefdjttffen slit fd)Uc£en fc£)tteB-(ef)t, -t fd)Uefe(e) frf)l^ fdjloffe gefdjioffen shut fd)lingen fdjlmg-ft, -t fd)lirtg(e) fd)iang fcrjCange gefdjtungen sling fdjmetfjen fdjmetJ3-(ef)t, -t fd)meiB(e) fd)tntfe fdimtffe gefdjmiffen smite fdjnteljen fd)milg-(ef)t r A fcbmila f^molj fcQrrtblse gefdjnu){= Sen 1 melt fdjnanben fd)ttaub-fr, -t fdinaub(e) f djnob 6 fdjrtobe 6 gefd)no6en 6 snort fdjnetben fdjrtetb-efr, -et fdjneib(e) fd)nitt fdjrtttte gefdjnirten cut fdjranben fdjraub-ft, -t fdiraub(e) f djrob 3 fdjrobe 3 gefdjroben 3 screw 1 Inflected with feirt (30, 1). 2 0r zvring. 3 Sometimes weak (172,4). ^divide; depart (197 1 ). 5 b or ii distinguishes the form from the present. 6 More often weak (172, 4). 198 A GERMAX GRAMMAR _ . . Pres. Indie. Pres. Infin. 2,3 Sing. Impv. 2 Sing. Past Indie. Past Subjv. Past Partic. Meaning frfjretucn fdncib-ft, -t fd)reib(c) fdjricu fdiriebe gefdjrieuen 7.77/6' fdjrcicn fdirei-ft, -t fd)rct(e) fdjrie fdjriee gcfdjrt'cn c?y fdjretten f dire it- eft, -et fdircit(c) fdjritt fdmtte gcfdjrtttcn 1 stride fdjMjfircn fdjttrier-ft, 2 -t 2 fd) truer 2 fcfjttior jd) tcore gefrfjworen Wester fd)tnetgen fdjtoeig-ft, -t fdjtoeig(e) fdjttucg fdjtoiege gefdjuncgen be silent fdjrocUcn fdmuU-ft, -t fd) trull fdjtooU fdirobtle gcfcfjttJottcn 1 swell fd)«)im= fdinnmm-ft, -t fd)trumrn(e) fcfjttmmm fd)tt)bm= gcfd)tt)om= men me 3 men 1 swim fdjnnnbcn fdnrmib-eft, -et fd)trunb(e) fd)foanb fdnodnbe gefd)tuun= ben 1 vanish jdjnringen fdjtoing-ft, -t fc^toing(e) fdjttmng fdjtoange gefd)ttmn= gen swing fdjwBren fdjtoor-ft, -t fcrjroor(e) fdjtour 4 fdjtoure gefdjworen swear feljcn itefH't, -t ftelj 5 m ffifje gefefjen see fctn 6i-ft, if-t let war mare getnefen 1 be fcuben fenb-eft, -ct fenbe fanbte 2 fenbete gefanbt 2 send jtcben fieb-cft, -et fieb(e) fott 2 forte 2 gefotten 2 seethe jtngen ftng-ft, -t firtg(e) fang fctnge gefnngen sing finfen finf-ft, -t firtf(e) fattf fdnle • gcfnnlen 1 sink finnen jinn-ft, -t firtrt(e) fann fartne 6 gefmuten think fitjen fi|-(ef)t, -t ftfce, ftfc' m jSf3e gefeffen sit fallen foU-ft, fott foflte foffte gefoflt ought fpcien fpet-ft, -t fpei(e) ftie fptee gefot'en spit ftonnen fptnrt-ft, -t fpinn(e) fpamt fpbrtrte 3 gefponnen spin jplct^cn fpMJ3-(ef)t, -t fpletfj(e) im jp till e gefttfiffen split tyred) en fpritt>ft, -t fprtd) fprad) fprSdje gefprodjen speak fprie^en fprtcB-(ef)t, -t fprtetf(e) fordfj fproffe gefproffen 1 sprout fpringen fpring-ft, -t fprtng(e) fprong fprange gefprungen 1 spring fie d) en fttd)-ft, -t frtdj ftad) ftactje geftodjen prick )tcl)(t)\l m-% -t m$ ftanb ftartbe 7 - geftanben stand ftcljleu fttef)t-ft, -t fticfjl" fW ftofjte 8 geftDljten steal ftcifjen fteig-ft, -t ftcig(e) ftteg ftiege gefttcgen 1 climb fterben ftiro-ft, -t fttrS ftarb ftitrbe 9 geftoruen 1 die ftieuen ftieb-ft, -t ftteb(e) ftob ftobe geftooen 1 scatter 1 Inflected with fein (30, 1). 2 Sometimes weak (172,4). 3 Theb represents an earlier ii (cf. 199 3 ). 4 OrfdUnor. 5 Or, exclamatory, fie f)(c) ! look! 6 Or forme (198 3 ). 7 0r ftihibe (199 3 ). 8 Or ftatUc (199 3 ). 9 See 199 3 . THE STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS I 99 Pres. Infin. Pres. Indie. 2, 3 Sing. Impv. 2 Sing. Past Indie. Past Sufcjv. Past Partic. Meaning fta^cit ftoB-(ef)t, -t ftoB(e) « ftiefse gefto^en push ftretdjen ftretd)-ft, -t ftretd)(e) find) ftxtcfje geftrttfjeit stroke ftretten ftreit-eft, -et [treit(e) ftrttt frritte gefiritten strive iragen rrSg-ft, -t rrag(e) triig tritge getragcit carry ireffen rriff-ft, -t trtff traf trfife geireffen hit treiben freib-ft, -t treib(e) trieb trieb e getrteben drive rreten trttt-ft, trttt trftt trat irate getreten 1 step triefen trtef-ft, -t trtef(e) troff 2 rroffe 2 getroffen 2 drip trinfen trtnf-ft, -t trmf(e) tran! tranfe getrmtfen drink triigen trug-ft, -t trug(e) trbg trBge getrogen deceive trot tit-ft, -t tit(e) m iate getan do oerber= ben berbrie= berbirb-ft, -t berbtrb 2 berbarb 2 berbiirbe 3 berborben 2 spoil berbrtefj- berbrie= bcrbrof? bexbroffe bcrbroffen vex \vx W, -t 1(e) bergcfjen bergtjy-eft, 4 -t bergifj bergaf? bexgftfje. bergeffen forget tocrlieren berlier-ft, -t berlter(e) berlbr berlore tier lor en lose nmdjfeu toad)f-(ef)t, -t toacfife 5 \vM)$ toucfjfe gettJodjfen 1 grow miigen hmg-ft, -t toag(e) tobg 2 totfge 2 gewbgen 2 weigh maftfiett toafcb-(e)ft, -t toafct)(e) ttmfd) toufdje getoafrijcn wash toeben toeb-ft, -t toeb(e) tobb 2 toobe 2 gemoben 2 weave metdjen toetcfj-ft, -* toetcf)(e) U5td) toidje gefotdjen 1 yield tueifen toeif-(ef)t, -t toete 6 ttrieS toiefe geintefen si WW toenben toenb-eft, -et toenbe wanbte 2 to en bete gemanbt 2 turn toerben totrb-ft, -t mir 6 ttmrb toiirbe 3 geworben site ttJerbcn tolr-ft, toirb toerbe ttiiirbe 7 toiixbe gembrben 1 become merfen tottf-ft, -t totrf ttwrf toiirfe 3 gemorfen throw nriegen toteg-ft, -t toieg(e) tobg tooge getobgen weigh ttrinben totnb-eft, -et toinbe tuanb toartbe gemuuben wind ttrifjen toeifs-t, tnetB totfi'e nutate ttmfjte getting know ttjollen britC-ft, toill tootle ttiolite too ((te Qttvoiit will jeifien 8et$-fc -t 3etfj(e) Stefj- Stefje geate^en accuse Steven 8fe$-ft -t 5te^(e) 500 5oge gejbgen draw 3h>ingen gtohtg-ft, -t atotng(e) gttmng gtoange gcjmungen force 1 Inflected with feitt (30, 1). 2 Sometimes weak (172, 4). 3 or it distinguishes the form from the present. 4 Or bergifi-t. 5 Or ttmdjs. 6 0r toeife. 7 Or marb (24, 3). 200 A GERMAN GRAMMAR THE MOOD AUXILIARIES AND Sttffett (78, 80/147,7, 148, 186) The forms of the present indicative of the mood auxiliaries (78, 2, 186) and of luiffeu (82, 2, 191,3) are old forms of a strong past indicative (28, 1), and are called praeteritopraesentia, past presents. The principal parts of biirfen, for example, were originally biirfett, barf, biirfen (without ge, 80, 1 ; cf. 28, 1). For faff en, see 202, 3. The following is a synopsis of fonnen with an infinitive (80, 1): 1. er faun geljen, he can (is able to) go; er fann gegangen fetn, he can have gone. 2. er lountc geljen, he could (= was able to) goj cf . er f bnnre gcfyen, he could (= would now be able to) go. 3. er ttrirb gcf)en fonnen, he will be able to go. 4. er fjat geijcn fbnucu (not gefonnt, 80, 1), he was able to go. 5. er fjatte gel)eu fonnctt (80, i),he had been able to go. 6. er mirb tjaucn geljen fonnen, he will have been able to go. 7. er roiirbe gei)cn fonncu, he would be able to go. 8. er niiirbe Ija&en geljen fonnen (such awkward expressions are avoided by using the pluperfect subjunctive: er I)atte geljen fonnen), he could have gone (= would have been able to go) ; cf . er fottttte gegangen fetn, he could have gone (= was able to have gone). biirfen, burfte, gebnrft, may, be per?nitted, of possibility determined by others; hence, usually expressing permission ox prohibition : as, 1. barf id) (or er) nidjt fommcn? may /(or he) not come? 2. bn barf ft itjnt alle§ fagcn, you may tell him everything. 3. $tnber biirfett md)t afte3 fjarett, children must not hear everything. 4. z (take hold of). 72, 3 aVgeneljm, agreeable. 128, 1 an'fyalten, f;telt an 7 , aVgefjatten, hold to, stop. 72, 3 aVfamnten, tarn an', ift dVgefimt* men, arrive 5tnna, bte, Anna. 171,2 ait3 = an ba3. 10, 2 ait'ftatt or ftatt, prep, with g., in- stead of 84, 1 3lnt / tt»ort f bte, Sint'roorten, answer, gender irregular, 134, 3 aut'toortett, ant'roorteie, geanfwor* tet, answer aVjieljett, sog an 7 , aVgejogen, dte-w (draw on) 2tyfe(, ber, #pfef, 0^/*. 155, 3 Styrtf', ber, 4^rz7. 171,3 9(r / 6eit, bte, 2(i v beiten, work ar'&citen, ar'beitete, gear'beitet, work arger, worse. 56, 1 2trm, ber, Sfrme, arm. 1 ^6, 3 arm, poor (52, 2) ; ber 2(rme, /^ ^a§, bit. 70 bttte, please ( = id) bttte, / beg) bitten, bat, gebeten, ash, beg: bitten nnt (a.), ask for Sla'febalg, ber, Sla'febalge, bellows blafcn, bites, geblafen, blow. 72, 3 blaft, pale Slatt, M§, flatter, leaf f&iatt'pfiaiitfr bte, Slatt^flan^en,/^- liage plant bfan, blue. 52, 1 btetben, blteb, ift geblteben, remain, stay. 112 bltnb, blind. 88, 4 bloji f merely, simply Slftmc, bte, ^SiumtYi, flower Stftt, U§, blood Sonn, ba§, Bonn, a city Sih'fc, bte, Sorjen, purse bM or bBfe, wicked,. angry "**OtC 208 bit it> 5 1 c , bcr, Soten, messenger brnteit, brict, gebraten, r yours (54, 2) bcnf'cit, bad)tc, gebadit, //*/>/£ (82, 2): benfen an (a.), //m«£ 0// benfen t»dn (d.), have an opinion of benn, conj., y»r (iooj; adv., ///£//, _^ray (100, 3) ber, bie, ba§, />&?. 10, 20, 2, 39, 1 ber, bie, ba§, /fta/. 64, 65, 1 ber, bie, bas, that, who, which. 66 beVjemge, bie'jenige, bffs'jenige, that. 64, 170, 3 berfefbe, biefel'be, bagfet'be, ///*? same. 64 be^fjalb', 071 that account beft'o, jre3bett, ba3, Dresden bu, thou, you. 16 buntm, stupid. 52, 2 ^unFelljeit, bie, darkiiess burcf), prep, with a., through, by (88) ; adv., through (88, 2) burtfj'brittgettb, piercing (of the cold), soaking (of rain) burdjbrinc^enb, piercing, shrill burdj'fjattett, fiteb buret) 7 , burch'ges ftauen, ttrft, ber, A&zVj/ bitr'ftett, biir x ftete, gebiir'ftet, impers., be thirsty. 16, 5, 144, 2 burftig, thirsty efiett, y«j/ ebel, noble. 52, 1 e'fje, conj., before. 102 e'fjer, adv., before, sooner. 56, 1 @fjre r bte, Gftren, honor @t, ba§ f GsHer, ^ r ^ eigen, tfsew. 20 2 ©tie, btc, haste etlett, etlte, ijt geeilt, hurry, hasten eitt, m£?. 92, 1 cut, eirte, em, a, an (20); 0/^(58, 3) enter, eine, em(e)e, 0//*. 68, 1, 2 eiucm'ber, 07ie another ; each other. 18,2 ettt'atmett, at'mete etn / , ein'gearmet, breathe in eitt / bfittgttrf), impressive, forcible ei'tttger, et'nige, ei'nige^, some, jo, 1, 7h 1 eht'Iabcn, lub ein', ein'gelaben, m- *z/zV& a thing. 70 ty\tf) t you,yotiselves. 16, 18 euer, cure, euer, jtfz/r. 20, 3 eurer, eure, euer§, yours. 62 (Juro'pa, ba^, Europe fafjrcu, fufjr, ift gefaljren, ^0, drive, ride. 72, 3 fatten, ftel, ift gcfaHen, fall. 72,3 $ ami 7 tie, bte, tfanu'lien, family. 141,3 fangcu, fhtg, gefangen, ££/£/*. 72, 3 fa ft, almost fauf f £7.27 Jyc'bruar, ber, February. 171,3 $ct)(cr, ber, %lty.tx, fault o frcucn Tvctb, bav«, J$t\btc, field Jycuftcr, baz f ^venucr, window fertt(e), far, distant fertig, finished, ready ftft r fast, firm. 92. 1 Jycucr, bnc, %tVLtt,fire fiubcit, fanb, gefunben,j£«dT; reflex., be found 1 106, 41. 112 finger, ber, finger, finger finfter, dark $tfd), ber, %\\ti\z, fish fifteen, fifdjte, §t\\\&\\, fish fytfrfjer, ber, %\\S)tx, fisherman ffcijjig, diligent, industrious ftiegen, flog, ift geftogen,^ ftietjen, fiof], ift geffoljen, ./&£.* fttcfjen tor (p.), flee from ftiegen, floft, ift geflofien, _/?a$ t #\iiuteui, young lady, miss ftrci'tag, ber, Friday. 171,3 $rembc(r), ber, stranger. 54, 2 freffen, fra|, gefriffen, eat, of animals. 72,3 frcucn, freute, gefreut,jW 2 frof}, ^/^. 5 2 , 1 friif), ^«r/j/ .* morgen frill), to-morrow morning frtif)(e)ften3, «/ #^ earliest, not be- fore. 56, 3 ^rUfjling, ber, grrii^ltnge, spring. 171,3 fiifjtcn, fiifjtte, gefiifilt,/^/. 80, 2, 1 12 ffiljrcn, ffiljrte, geffiljrt, /*a*f ^Sfircr, ber, gfi^rer, /^awfe/* \\\\\] f five. 58,2 fiinfte(r), tex, fifth. 167, 1 fiinfunbsttmn^ig, twenty-five fiinfotyn, fifteen fiir f prep, with a., for. 88 fiirrf)ten, fiirdjtete, gefiircfrtet, y£#r/ reflex., &? afraid (18, 3) ftiif?, ber, ftutfe, _/^.' 3" &% a§. Q5e6du / be, building geben, gab, gegebert, give. 72, 3, 4, ©ebir/ge, ba3, ©ebtr'ge, {cJiain of) mountains. 94 ge&a'rett, for«. See gelrn'rett ©ebidjt', bag, ©ebicb'te, poem gebrurft 7 , pressed, printed GJefaljr', bie, ©efafj'ren, danger gefal'tett, gefiel', gefal'len, with d., please gefaFiig, with d., pleasing gefal'ttgft, if you please. 56, 2, 4 ©efaitft/ttid, ba$ r ©efang'tuffe, jail gegen, prep, with a., toward, against. 88, i, 4 gegcnu'ber, prep, with d., facing, opposite, generally following the dative. 86 gel)(e)tt, gtng, ift gegangen, go, walk. 22, 4, 132, 3 gep'rett, getjBr'te, gefjbrt', with d., belong ®eift, ber, ©etfter, spirit. 158, 4 Qtefb, bad, ©elber, money (SJele'gentjeit, bte, (Me'genfieitett, opportunity gefing'eu, gelang', ift gehmgen, impers. with d., succeed gelten, gait, gegotten, be worth : ed gilt, with d., it concerns (SJemaYbe, ba§ f (SemaTbe, painting (malen, paint) gcmaf? 7 , prep, with d., according to. 86, 2 genau / , exact, exactly, welt genie^en, genofj', geno] v jen, enjoy genitg', enough. 70, 1 ©eogra^ljie', bie, ©eograplji'en, geography gera'be, straight, just, exactly gern(e), gladly (56, 1): gernJjabett, like. 57, 1 ©efanb / te(r) r ber, ambassador. 54,2 ©efdjenf', ba$ f Oejdjenf'e, present gcjdmcbcn &eer gcirfiric'ben, written. See frfjrcibcn gefdjtoei'geu, gefcfarieg', gefcfarie'gen, be silent about : flcfri)lUCt r gc bcuu, ( / ) say nothing about ©eftdjf, b&£, ^kudVlcw face geftcru, yesterday: geftcru ntor= gen, yesterday morning; geftcru a' I) cub, last night gcfunb', healthy, well ©efunb'fattgregel, bic, @efunb'$eit& regeln, rule of health gcfunb'faitofcfablirfi, injtirious to health genrin'nen, getoann', geraon'nen, win, gai?i gcuiiff', certain, certainly gettJor'ben, become. See roerben gie^icn, gofe, gegojjen, pour <&la&, ba£ f ©Icifer, glass. 59, 1 glauben, glaubte, gegfaubt, believe, think gleicf», colloquial for fogteid)', at once, immediately gteicfan, glid), gegltdjen, with d., be like glia;nten, glomnt (or glimmte), ge= glommen (or geglimmt), gliminer ®lorfe, bie, QMocfen, bell gtittflirf), happy ©oetfa, ber, Goethe, the greatest of the Gennan poets. 3 2 golbcn, golden ttott, ber, ©otter, god, God. 158, 4 $raf, ber, Gkafen, count. gretfen, griff, gegriffen, seize $rete (diminutive of ^largare'te), bie, Margery: Okct'djen, ba^ r Gretchen, Madge. 171, 2 grofjf great, tall (of people). 54 ©ro^untcr, bcr, (Srojj'&ftter, grand- father. 155, 3 gr.ut, j??w# griutbltri), fundamental, thorough Qntj_good, well (54, 1): mic geljt f8 3facn? how are you? banfc, C3 geljt nur gut, thank you. I am well; ct'llMv @Htte£, something good 1 54, 2). 88, 4 (Mtc, bie, goodness QJtjmna'ftum, ba£, ©ijtnna'ftett, £K*«- nasium, a German training school for the university. 42, 3 £mur, ba§, ^aare, hair fallen, tjatte, gef)2bt, fe'ciufer, house $ftu£'frau, bic, Jpaus'fvauen, house- wife ^au^frnucntcfac, bie, ^auS'frauetts (efaett, precept for housewives faben, bob, gefaben, Jieavc, lift .£>c~cr, t;av, Jpecvc, army £etbelberg 213 Ptfft ^et'bet&erg, H§, Heidelberg Ijeiltg, holy: £eilige(r), ber, saint (54, 2) Ijcim, /eilt5, ber, Harry, diminutive of ^einridj, Henry. 44, 3, 171,2 Jjeift, /W ^ctf^ett, fyetf, geljetBen, &/, crater (80, 2); be called j mean $elb, ber, ^etben, hero Jpelfeit, fyiif, gdjolfen, with d., fo#. 72, 3, 4 , 80,2 l)er, /^rer&ft, ber f .Sperbfte, autumn. 171,3 Ijercut', m //^;r. See Ijer Ijereut'fommcn, mm fjerein', ift §er= ein'gefommen, ^w//* z>z ^perr, ber, ^erren, master, lord, gen- tleman, Mr. 12, 4, 40, 3 ^eVfteflwng, bie, ^er'ftetfungen, restoratio?i Ijerffber, over here. See fjer Ijerifberfotttmett, fam fjeru'ber, ift berll'bergef ommen, come over ijeritnt', round, about ^erftm / ge^(e)n f gmg fjeritm', ift Ijers um'gegangett, go rotmd Ijeritttt'ttierfett, to arf fjeritm', tjerihn'* geroorfen, throw round tjertttt'terfatlen, fief fjerun'ter, ift ljer= un'tergef alien, fall down. 72,3 fyertJjjr'&rmgett, fcradjte fjerbor', fjers bor'gebradjt, bring forth £erg, ba§, foergen, heart. 34 s fjeittc, to-day: fjeute ntorgen, ^w- -morning; fjeute ttadVmfttifg, Mz> afternoon; IjeHte a'bettb, //h> evening, to-7iight ^pejc, bie, §eren, wzM t)ier, here IjierfjeV, hither, here £ilfe, bte, grilfen, ^^, «£/.■ 511 Jptlfe fommen, come to the aid of ^ptmmel, ber, pummel, sky, heaven fjttt, there, a separable prefix or suffix, implying motion from the speaker or the writer in his real or his assumed position (cf. Ijer) tytiumf , up there. See Jjitt JjtttttttS', out there. See Ijftt Ijuutud'gelK^n, gmg IjfnauS', ift Ijftts aus'gegangen, go out ffinan&'$itfyn t §og Qmaus', ift Ijtits au^'gegogen, »z^z/dd)fte!t$ 214 Sfatfet JiBrfi 'ftcnS, at most, at bi st. 5 6,3,4 ^of, bcr, Mote, courtyard, farm, court Jjoffcn, iioffto, getjofft, ^'A IjBfiid), courtly, polite (.s>of). 88,4 ^c>off / niinfl f bic, $offmmgen, /w/^ fyolcu, lioltc, geljott,./^^ $ol§, bite, vuH^ev, wood Ijoljmt, wooden ^ol^fjaucr, bcr, ftol/fiauer, wood- cutter ^pomcV, ber, Homer, the world's greatest poet. 171,2 Ijbrett, prle, gefyBrt, /ziite, >to £iirte, bte, £mtten, hut id), I. 16 tf)m, tfjn, him. 16 tf)r, ye, you. 1 6 tfjr, /z^r, M*zV. 20 3>f|r, S^c, £j$t, j*?^. 20 tfjrcr, tfyre, it)re§, /z£z>z£- ^B / Jtigitt, bie, ^omtahmen, queen fimuen, fonnte, gefonnt, can, be able, may. 78, 80, 200 ^mtjert', ha§ f ^onger'te, concert ®Opf, ber, St'opfe, head ^opffdjmerjeit, masc. pi., headache ^ijrfcer, ber, £orper, body Shaft, bit, &m\iz, force Jranf, ill, sick. 52, 2 ^rauj, ber, Grange, wreath fried) en, frod), ift gefrodjen, creep, crawl &rieg, ber, £riege, war SiH), bie, Mfje, cow IUJ)(, ^0/ fUm'mertt, fihn'merte, gefihn'ntert, reflex., trotible youi'self. 18,3 mr5, short. 52,2 fiuft'ne, bie, Shiftmen, cousin (fe- male) Iiicf| / e(tt, ISdj'elte, getcidj'eft, j;«//i? tadien, ladjte, geladjt, laugh laben, rub, gelaben, load; invite. 72,3 lafjnt, /«^. 52, 1 Sanb, ba3, Sanber, to^.- auf bem fiattbe, m /■//* country; auf3 Sanb, /orte3 madjtig, incapable of speech SDZabdjcn, bo§, 2Mbdjen, ^/r/ mag, may, //£*. 78, 80, 200 %)lai, ber, May. 171, 3 9KajeftaY, bie, 3JlajeftS / ten, majesty 9Wa(, ba3, decile, /!m«* ntol (for einntal'), ./wj/, only, pray SDiama', bie, mamma. 171,2 man, eine§, einem, etnen, a/*, ^0*, //?£>>, people, somebody, often used to avoid the passive voice. 68, 1, 106, 4 Mtandj(er), mandj(e), mand)(ee), «««y a, a good many. 70, 1, 71, 1 mand/mal, sometimes, frequently SRattn, ber, TOnner, man, husband. 158,4 ^nr'bad), ba$, Marbach, a village Sttnrgare'te, bie, Margaret. 171,2 SKart'e or tf.ttaric', bie, aftart'efr)^ Marie, Ma?y. 171,2 . 9ttarf, bie, Waif, mark (24 cents) s JDitir3, ber, March. 171, 3 Wlauev 217 nadjft Matter, bie, Sftaitertt, wall (stone) $)la£ r ber, Max. 44, 1, 171,2 mefyr, more. 54, 1, 56, 1, 70, 1 VXltyxtXt, several. 54,1, 70,1, 71,1 ttteljr'fad), several fold. 58,6 mein, metne, mem, my. 20 meinett, meinte, gemeint, mean meiner, meine, meine3, ?/zz>z^/.- Weber , , . ttod), neither . . . nor (100, 1); ttod) (citt), another (= one morej see attbrcr, 70, 1) ; ttod) eitt'tttal, 0/2^ more; ttod) ttidjt, not yet ttb'ttfl, necessary ^JoDcm'bcr, bcr, November. 171,3 mitt, ;zcwy «/*// (129, 15) ltttr, /. See ttid)t ttiir . . . , fott= bent oud), 100, 1 6 ! or o() ! O, oh 6b f whether, if in indirect ques- tions. 104,1 o'bcrljatb, prep, with g., above. 84,3 obglctd)', ofcfdjon', obtoofyV, or menu . . . aud) (6'7/^;/ . . . if), although. 104 £d)£ or Cdjfc, ber, Cd)ien, ox o'ber, ^r.- cttt'iocbcr . . . b'ber, either . . . or. 100, 1 Cfett, bcr, Cfen, j/fcw. 155, 3 bff'ucn, b'jf'nete, geoff'net, open oft, often. 52, 2 bfjne, prep, with A., without. 88, 1 Of)r, ba3, Cfjrcn, *#r. 42,4 Cftb'ber, bcr, October. 171,3 Cnfei, bcr, Cnfel, ««*•/4 fdjmcrsen, fdnnerste, gefctimerjt, pain Stfimnfc, ber, ^W Sd)nee, ber, j«0«/ fdjnee'roeift, snow-white fdjnetben, fdntttt, gefdjnitten, cut Sdjuctbcr, ber, ©djneiber, tailor fdjnell, quick fd)im, already, of cou?se. 13,1, 15,1 fdjouen, fdjonte, gefdjont, with g. or A., spare fd)Bit, beautiful, pretty: et'ttm^ 3d)Bne3, something pretty (54,2) SdjBu'Ijeit, bic, Sdiou'fjeitcn, beauty fdjBitfteit!?, ^^7 much. 56, 3, 4 fdjretf'lid), tej-rible fdjretbcn, fdjrieb, gefdjriefcen, write frf)rctcH, fd)rie, gefdjrt'en, cry, scream fdjrcitcn, fdjritt, ift gefdjritten, stride @ri)ub„ bcr, 3d)itl)e, shoe. 1 56, 3 fdjlll'big, guilty fenfcen 3ri)iile, bie, Bdmlcn, school: in tor auf) bcr 3rf)ulc, at school; in bic 1 or sun Sdjiilc, to school Sdjtirbutf), bo*?, Sdnll'bfldjer, school- book frfjniad), «/#z£. 52, 2 fd] roars, black. 52, 2 fdjrociflcn, fdmrieg, gefdjroiegen, be silent (cease speaking): fdjroct= genb, silent Sd)roei$, bte, Switzerland. 171, 3 fdjroellen, fdirooll, ift geid)motIen, j-^^//. 72, 3 fd)tt)er, heavy, difficult, hard Sdjroert, ba§, 3diroerter, sword 3djroefter, bie, ©djroeftern, sister fdjroimmen, fdjroamtn, tftgefdntiommen, swim fd)roBren,fdirour(orjd)mor),ge)d)rooren, swear fed|3, six. 58, 2 SFe, ber, 8een, lake. 42,4 See, bie, 8een, sea. 161, 2 fefjen, fat), gefefjen, see. 72, 3, 4, 80, 2, 112 (Sefin'fudjt, bie, longing (feljen, fiicfjeri) fefjr, -z'^ry, wry. much. 56, 1 fein, mar, ift geiuefen, £*. 30, 1, 174 fein, feme, fein, his, its. 20 feiiter, feine, feine§, his (62, 1) : bti§ Seine, what is his (54, 2) feit, prep, with D., since (86, 1); conj., since (102, 1) fcitbent 7 , conj., since. 102,1 3cite, bic, Seiten, side felbft, self even. 16, 3, 168, 2 fclifl, blessed, deceased, late fenben, fanbte, gefanbt, send messen- ger or message. 82, 1 geptembet ^ttmme ©eprem'ber, ber, September. 171,3 fe^ett, fetrte, gefefit, j you. 6, 2, 16 fiebett, seven filbertt, silver. 134 fittgett, fang, gefungett, sing fatten, fan!, ift gefunfen, sink Sinn,' ber, ©inne, j*«j* finnen, fann, gefonnen, think, medi- tate [on, itber, with A.) fttjen, fafj, gefeffert, sit ©ftaoe, ber, ©flatten, j/a^ fo, J6>, thus ; often used to sum a clause up, and then not to be translated: fo fottge, bt3, until (see bt3, 102, 1); tm $af)re fo unb fo, in the year blank j for fo etn, cin fo, f etn fo, see 65 1 fobalb 7 , as soon as. 102, 1 ©o'fa, ta§ t ©o / fa§, sofa fogleid)', immediately ©of) it, ber, ©oqne, sou fotang / (e), so long as, as long as. 102, 1 fo(tf|(cr), folate), foldj(e§), such (64, 1, 4, 65 r ); fo tt'tuag (instead of foIdje§), such a thing. 71,1 ©olbat 7 , ber, ©otba'ten, soldier foK, shall, am to. 78, 80, 200 foltett, fottte, gefoltt, shall, am to, ought, is said to. 78, 80, 200 ©ontmer, ber, ©omtner, summer. 171,3 fon'bern, but; nidjt nur . ♦ ♦ , fonbertt and), not only . . . but also. 100, 1 ©onn'abenb, ber, Saturday. 171,3 ©ottne, bte, ©onnen, sun ©onn'tag, ber, Sunday: (be3) ©0tttttag§, of a Sttnday, Sun- days (126, 4). 171,3 fottft, otherwise fpttt, late fpS'teften^, at the latest, not later than. 56, 3, 4 fpaftte'ren, fpastex'te, fpagtert', walk: fpU5ie / ren faljren, go driving; ftoaste'ren geljen, go walking; fjmgie'ren lanfen, go running; fpajie'ren rettett, go riding ©$)tel, bft3, ©piete, play, ga?ne fptelen, fptette, gefpiett, play fpimtett, fpann, gefpomten, spin ©ph?e, hit, ©pttjen, point ©plttter, ber, Splitter, splinter fpredjen, fpradj, gefprodjen, speak. 72,3 ©pridj'roort, ba§, ©prtrfj'toorter, proverb f$jrief?en, fprofe, ift gefproffen, sprout fpringen, f prang, ift gefprungen, spring ©root, ber, ©taaten, state. 42, 3 ©tabt, bte, ©tSbte, city, town: nad) ber ^tat>t, to town (86, 3) ftarf, strong. 52, 2 ^tatt, prep, with G., instead of. 84 ftecfen, ftecfte (or ftaf), geftecft, sticky transitive or intransitive ftel)(e)n, ftanb, geftanben, stand fteljlen, ftafjl, geftofjlen, steal; with d., steal from (29, 1). 72,3 fteigen, ftteg, ift geftiegen, climb ©tetu, ber, ©tetne, stone fteflen, ftettte, geftellt, place, put ©teFtnng, bte, ©teFlungen, place, situation fterben, ftar6, ift geftorben, die. 72, 3 ©timme, bte, ©ttmmen, voice «tiruc 222 iiberfcftcn 3rmt(c), t»ic r Sttrnen, forehead 3roff, bcr, Stojfe, matter. 156,3 fiol*,, proud (of nuf, with A.) ftojjcii, jriejj, geftojjen, $ush 3trnf?c, bic, SlTajjen, street. ftrci'rficln, ftrei'djelte, geftrei'djelt, stroke, as an animal ftrctdjcn, itvirii, geftridjen, w^w, stroke, as hair from the face ftrcttcn, ftritt, geftrttten, strive 3troli, bete, straw 3trom, bcr, StrBrae, stream 3tubc, bic, Stiiben, ?v^w Stubcnt', bcr, Stuben'ten, student ftubtc'rcit, ftubter'te, ffubiert 7 , study. 172 3 [42.4 Sru'bium, M$, (Btu'bi'-zn, study. 3tiif|(, bcr, 3tfit]le, chair 3tuubc, bte, 3tunben, /w«r furijcn, fucfite, gefucrjt, seek, look for 3itben, ber f south fiift, sweet ia'beftt, ta'belte, geta^Deft, blame Xag, ber, Xage, dfoy. 126, 4, 156, 3 tSgftrf), daily (-lag) %ai, ba§ t X5(er, valley Xante, bte, tauten, aunt tatlfttn, tanjte, getanjt, dance. 106,3 tnpfcr, brave Xnffc, bic, Staffen, cup. 59, 1 Xar, bic, Xalen, erftt3 / teit, *m/- versity un'redjt tjafien, r)atte rtrt^redfjt, ifrt's rerfjt geliabt, a$, SBier/tel, quarter: etn $iertc( auf fiinf (or etn $ierre( nad) bicr) f a quarter past four; brei $iertc( auf fiinf (or ein SBicrtel bor fiinf), a qnai'ter of Jive. 58, 7 Sier^tger, ber, SBter/gtger, a man between forty and fifty : In ben ^ier^igern, in the forties ^o'gel, ber, ^o'gel, ^^- 155, 3 $o(f, bfiy f SSMfer, people (nation) boll, full. 96, 1 bon, prep, with d., of from, by (of agency, with the passive voice). 86, 1 bor, prep, with d. or a., before, in front of from (because of). 90, 1. See $ierrel borbet 7 , by, past. 58, 7 SBoVbore, ber, tSdx'bottn, forerunner bbVfomntcn, font nor 7 , iji Dor 7 ge= fotrtmert, occur, appear bbVfefeu, la* bor', tior'gdejen, with d., mzrt 7 /c? [(fore part) SBbVteil, ber, ^or'tetle, advantage boril / ber, past, gone macfjfen, wildjZ, ifi geraadjjen, grow. 7 2 , 3 SBagen, ber, 2B5gen, wagon, car- riage tuafjr, true : nirfjt mafyr ? is it not so? maft/rcnb, prep, with G., during within the time of, 84, 1); conj., while, whereas (102, 1 1 SBafjr'fjeit, bic, ©aftr'fjeiten, truth 2Balb, ber, 23alber, forest. 158, 4 23Sanb, bte, SScinbe, wall tuan'bern, man'berte, ift geroan'bert, wander maun, when? mar, was. See fein marb, toarbft, became. 24, 3 tt) arm, warm. 52, 2 S^ar'nung, bte, ©ar'mmgen, warn- ing mar'ren,- ttar'tete, gemar'tet, wait: marten auf (a.), wait for maritm', why? tt>a3, what? tva§ fttr (ein), what kind of? 66, 4 ma£, what (that which). 67, 2 ttm3 (colloquial for et'ma^), some- thing. 70, 1 mafrijen, tvu)d), geroajcfien, wtfj/z. 72, 3 SBafjer, ba§, SBaffer, water me'bcr . ♦ ♦ nad), neither . . . nor. 100, 1 2Beg, ber, Sege, way meg, a$, s 2£ei6er, wife mcil, because. 104, 1 3S>ci / mar, ba3, Weimar, a city mcife, wise meijj, know. 82, 2 mcifj, w/«'^ ttieit 225 itJoKett tBtit,*wide, far : M§ 2$ette filcfpett f take to your heels (54, 2) inciter, farther. 92,1 toeltf)(er), rnelcfj(e), irelcf)(e§) r which, what? 65, 1, 66, 1 toeldjer, tnetdje, tuelcfieg, zVW, w/z Ben totr fjente ? what day of the nio nth is it? 61, 1 SBittjelm, ber, William. 171,2 tottf, will, want. 78, 80, 200 toiflcn : urn . . . tottfen, with G.,_/»r ///od)e, bte, SSndjen, «/**£ tonbnrcn/, by which. 87, 1 toofjeV, from where? See Ijer too^tn 7 , whither? where? See Ijttt tonf)(, well; perhaps, probably, I suppose. 33, 1 3Bnt)r6eftnben, ba§, good health toofjnen, mnfjnte, getnofjnt, live (dwell) tonflcn, tonllte, getonllt, will, wish, am going to, mean, assert, pre- tend. 78, 80, 200 U> on; it 226 Shiifdjctt toomtt', with which. 87, 1 n>o(r):, where. 74.5, 87,1 roorftii', at which, at what. 87, 1 ttJoranf, on which. 87, 1 woriit', in which. 87, 1 a»ort, b&8, Tcwv/.- pi., SBorte (157, 2 , words 1 connected), SSorter (158, 5), words (singly) nnmVbcr, over which or what? about which or what? 87, 1 ttJODon', of which. 87, 1 ttmn'bmt, tmm'berte, genmn'bert, reflex., wonder or £., A', 0/ (86,1) after the dative, toward (86, 3) ; with the present participle, 49, 2 ; Mlf (A.) . . . 5U, toward \ 128, 5); 5U mtr, />k ?;/t'. 75,1 5U, adv., /to? 3ng, ber, 3"^ train (jiefjen) git' gang (id), accessible 5ttm = 5u bcm. 10, 2 Su'madjcn, mad)te %vJ , sii'gemadjt, £/#.$•£, jvh// §itr = jit ber. 10, 2 SnriicF, &zr£. 92, 1 Snriid'&efjaftcn, bereft juriid', $a* ritcPoefjalten, £<^ to£. 72, 3 jttrittf'fefjren, fe forte guriicf, ift 51U ritcf gefefjrt, return. 92, 1 Surueffommen, fam jurucP, ift gu= riicf'gefommett, come back pfastl'mett, together. 92, 1. jitmrbcr, prep, with d., z« defiance of after the dative. 86, 2 gttmnstg, twenty 5tt)et, fte/0. 58, 2 SttJc^f c(n f gtoei'fette, gejhjei'feft, doubt $mzVmoi f twice. 58, 6 5toci / erlct, two kinds of. 58, 6 5ttmtgen, jtoang, gejnmngen, /^rar, compel gttrifdjen, prep, with d. or a. t between. 90, i ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY a, an, euu 20 [186 able : be — , fonnen, f otutte, gefonttt. accessible, gtYgiingttd) (d.) account, =tt)egett, 84, 2 acquainted with: get — , fettnett ternen, terttte fettnett, fettnett ge= lernt (or lernen). 80, 2, 3 advice, diat f ber advise, raten, net, geraten (d.) affair, ©adje, bte, ©ad)ett afraid: be — , fid) fiird)tett, fiirdjtete fief), fid) gefirrtf)tet. 18, 3, 19, 1 after, conj., nadjbettt (102, 1) ; prep., nadj (d., 86, 1) afternoons, nariymtttag^. 126,4 again, ttuVber against, ttu'bcr. 88, 1 agreeable, aVgenetjltt (d.). 128, 1 air, Sufi, bte, Siifte all, alter (68), gan$ (51, 1); at — , gar ntdjt; — that, afte§ f ttu13 (67, 2) almost, faft ^/^;/^, a Hem' already, fdjdtt <^/^, and) although, oligtctay. 104, 1 always, tmmer ambassador, ®efattbtc(r), ber. 54, 2 America, ^tme'rifa, ba§. 44, 2 among, nttter (D. or A.). 90, 1 and, Uttb. 17^5 animal, £ter, bag, Jiere Anna, Qtnna, bic. 171, 2 answer, ant'tuorten, attt'roortete, ge= ant'ir.ortet (intr.), Deant'morten (tr.) >-, et'nm^ 70, 1 ?, Sln&ettf, ber, ^petfte «^/*, 2ltofet, ber, 9lpfef. 155,3 «r^, 61ft, ftnb. 6, 1 urbe, ift getoorben. bed, %ttt f ba$ f 53etten (42, 4) ; in — , tm SBette ; to — , 511 S3ett before, conj., Debar 7 or e'fje (102, 1); prep., bar (d., 90, 1) beg 228 beg, bet'tefn, 6et r telte, gebeftelt beggar, Settler, ber, Settler begin, oVfnngcn, ftrtg an', ai^^c- fangen. 7 2 , 3 beginning, ^In'fang, ber. 130,4 behind, ijintcr (D. or a.). 90, 1 believe, glanben, glanbte, gegtaubt below, nn'terljalb (84, 3), nnter«(D. or a., 90, i) Berlin, ^crlttt', ba3. 44, 2 beside, uc6eit (d. or a.). 90,1 besides, an^er (d.). 86, 1 best, tint beften (54, 1) ; my — 5 ntetn *Befte3 (54, 2) better, beffer. 54, 1 between, gtutfrfjeit (p. or a.). 90, 1 bird, $ijgel, ber, 95SgeL 155,3 bit, btft'djen, ba§. 70, 1 bite, betften, bifi, gebijfen black, frijroarj. 52, 2 blame, ta'befn, ta'belte, geta'bclt blind, Mittb. 88, 4 blow, blafen, blie§, geblajen. 72, 3 boatman, ©d)iffer, ber, 8d)iffer &w£, 33ite^i f baS, SBxid)er born, gebo'ren both, bei'beg. 68, 1 boy, £nabe, ber, .ftnaben bread, $rot, ba$ t 33rote break, bredjen, brad), gebrod)en. 72, 3 breathe, at'men, at'mete, geat'met; ein'atnten, 92, 1 [82, 2 bring, brtngen, brad)te, gebrad)t. brother, 23ritber, ber, 93rSber. 155,3 building, Qdtb'au'bt, ba§, ©ebciu'be but, a'ber, ailmV, fon'bern. 100, 1 buy, fanfen, femfte, gefanft by, an or neben (d. or a., 90, 1), t»on (D., 86, 1) ; by and by, nttd)ften£ (56, 3, 4) ; by my watch, nad) ntiincr W)r cup C call: be called, Ijctftcn, f)ietf , gebettfen. 22, 4 £•#;/, fonnen, fonnte, gefonnt. 186 carriage, s j!£ngcn, ber, SBagett carry, tragen, trug, getvagen. 72, 3 ^j-//^, Sdjfoft, ba3, ©djlo^er a£ matfjft bit ? doctor, Sof'tor, bcr f 35 ofto / ren (42 4), 3trgt f ber, trgte d&g-, £uttb, ber, ^unbe. 156,3 ^r, £ftr, bte, stiirett dream, trauntett, traumte, getrdumt Dresden, ^re^bett, bag. 44, 2 «&rjj, $tetb, ba§, £leiber drink, trutfett, tranf, getrunfen drive, f aljrett, fu^r, ift gefafjren. 72,3 during, ttJttfj'rettb (G.). 84, r each, jebcr, jebe, jebe§. 8 *?#^ other, einatt'ber. 18, 2 ^r/j/, frftlj. 52, 1 ^^r«, gettnn'nen, geroann', getuon'nen earth, drbe, bte, (Srben. 41 1 easily, letdjt *?#/, effett, aB, gegSffen, freffen, fr5f$, gefreffen (of animals). 72, 3 «£#/, afyt Elizabeth, ©Iff abetfy, bte, 171,2 emperor, ®atfer, ber, ®aifer emphasis, Stfad)' brucf, ber end, (Snbe, ba3, (Snben. 42, 4 enough, genitg'. 70, 1 evening, STbettb, ber, Wbenbe; this — , fjeute abettb ; — s, abenb3 every, after (68), jeber (8) everything, afle3. 68, 1 [72, 3 examine, befe'ljett, 6efa^, befe'tjen. exception. See 131, sentence 1 exist. See 73, 1 erren. 40 3 geography, QJeograMie', bic Gentian, beutfd). 141,9 Germany, $)eurfd)lanb, bag. 44, 2 £*/ (= beco?ne), merben, itmrbe, ift gemorben. 1 76 £*tf »/, ouf / ftc^(c)n f ftanb auf, ift aufgeftanben ^*7/anb, bie, §tinbe ; — writing, £anbftf)rtft, bie, ^anbfdjriften happy, gtfitf'ttrf). 52, 1 hard, difficult, frf)tt)cr Harry, §ettt$, ber. 44,3, 171,2 hat, £iir, bcr, .sulfite have, ^at)cu, Ijatte, gefiabt (1 12, 1 74), Idffcu, 1 i e f 3 , gelaffen (80,2); — to, miiffcit, muBte, gemuijt (186); — do, read, etc., (off en (106, 4) he, er. 16 head, £opf, ber, ftobfe hear, IjSren, fjorte, ge()5rt. 80, 2, 112 heart, $ev%, ba§, Jperjen (34 2 ) ; by — , an^roenbig help, Ijelfen, fjatf, gefjolfen (d.), 72,3, 4; £ilfe, bic, £)ilfen Henry, ^pein'ridj, ber. 171,2 her, tljr (20); tljrer, it)r r fie (16, 1) here, Ijier, fyierljeV hero, £elb, ber, ^etben him, feiner, tfjm, it)n. 16 himself, feflift (16, 3), feiner (18, 1) his, fein (20), beffen (64, 3) home: at — , p £anfe; go — , nad) ^trofe gefjen hope, Ijjffen, fjoffte, gefjofft horse, ^Sfcrb, ba§ f $ferbe &?/, ^ei^ ^0«r, ©tunbe, bic, Stunben house, £>an3, ba§ f Jpaufex how, n»ie? — many, niic btete? — are you? mie geljt e3 5f)nen? mie befinben ©ic fin) ? however, aber (postpositive, 120,1) hungry : I am hungry, c§ Ijnng'ert midj, eg tjung'erte mid), U fjfit mid) gef)ung / ert. 17 1 , 144,2 hurry, etten, cilte, ift geeilt /, trf). 16 [(104, 1) if, ttcnn (104, 1); (= whether,) bb ill 231 middle z'//, fruttf* 52,2 immediately, fogfeid)', gteidj z>z, m/tf, ut (d. or a.). 90, 1 industrious, ffet'jgig. 52, 1 inside, in^ttiCttbig instead of, Ott'ftatt, ftott(G.). 84, 1, 4 interesting, ttttereffuttt'. 52, 1 invite^ ein'laben, tub ein ; ', cin / geta* ben. 72, 3 z>, ift 6, 1, 174 //, er, fie, U. 16, 169, 1 /<&:£, $an§, ber. 44, 3, 171,2 /^/z, ftofjamt', ber. 171,2 journey, Oieife, bte, fReifen /«»^, ^it'ttt, ber. 171,3 £;#;&, =erlet. 58, 6 £«#*, SDleffer, ba3, SReffet knocks flopfett, ftopfte, gello^ft know : (= A? acquainted with,) femteu, fannte, gefannt (82, 1) ; (= £#00/ as a fact,) ttriffen, nmfete, gettmftt (82, 2) &£*, ©e2, ber, Seen. 42, 4 /#*«£, laljm land, Saxibf ba§ f Sanber large, gr% 54, 1 last: at — , enb'lidj laugh, lateen, ladjte, geladjt ; - - at, (adjen fiber (a., 90, 1) lay, legen, legte, getegt lead, fUfjrett, ffi^rte, gefu^rt leant, lernen, lerute, gelernt leave, (affen, fiefj, gelaffen. 72, 3 lend, leifyen, lief), geliefjen less, tue'niger. 70, 1 lesson, SHuf'gabc, bie, Stuf'gaben let, laffen, ttefj, gelaffen. 72, 3, 80,2 letter, JBrief, ber, S3riefe /z>, tiegen, lag, gelegen light, 2td)t, ba3, Sifter like. See 57, 1 ; she would like best, 81, 2, sentence 4 &?», SUttie, ber, Stftoen little, Hem (52, 1), toe'niger (70, 1) live, leBeu, lebte, gelebt ; (= dwell,) ttdfjnen, luofmte, gerooljnt long, tang (52,2) ; (=a—time,) fange look for, fitdjen, fud)te, gefiidjt lord, $err, ber, £>erren. 40 3 lose, Derlie'ren, berlor', berlo'ren Lou, Swiften, bft3, 171,2 love, lieben, liebte, geliebt /j^z^, ftegenb. 49, 2 M ;;z#/&?, madjen, tnacfyte, getnadjt ;^a^, SOZann, ber, banner. 158,4 many, tneler, 70, 1 March, Wit$ r ber. 171,3 Marie', Mary, SDtarte', SWart'e, SKarieS', < $ftaxi / e(n)3, bie. 171, 2 master, £err, ber, £erren. 40 3 J/^^r, 9JZa£, ber. 44, 3, 171,2 amy,, biirfen, bnrfte, geburft, fonnen, fonnte, gefonnt. 186 me, nteiner, tmr, mid). 16 meaning, (Sinn, ber, ©inne meat, $(eifdj, &&? w^/, begeg'iteit, begeg'nete, tft be* geg'net (d.). [teute merchant, ^auf'mantt, ber, ftauf's middle, Wiitti f bie. 130, 4 milk 232 milk. Wi(rf), btC Miller, Mullet; Wittier, bcr. 171,2 mine, mcincr. 62 minute, StttmVte, btc, SKtnu'tcn miss, ^roVleitt, ba$, graVletu mistaken : be — , fid) trrctt, irrte fid), ftrfj gcirrt. 18,3 Monday, Won 'tag, bcr (171,3); — night, WoVtag a'&cttb money, ®clb, bfi3, 65etbcr month, Wd'nat, bcr, TO'nate more, 52, 1; meljr (70, 1) morning, 9)Zorgett, ber, ^ftorgen; this — , fyeute morgen; — s, ntor= gettS (126,4) ?;z^/ (52,4); the — , btc mciftClt (54, 1); at — , f|6tf)fteit3 (56, 3, 4) ?nother, Gutter, bie f Gutter. 34, 2 mountain, Serg, ber, 23erge move, Steven, 509, ift ge^ogen much, met. 54, 1, 70, 1 [42, 3 muse'iun, Witfe'itm, ba§, ^Jhtje'en. music, SDhifil', bte ^z/j/, muff en, mufete, gemufjt. 186 #zj, meiu. 20 ?nyself, fcttft, 1 6, 3 N name: be named, tjet^eu, Ijiefj, ge= beifeen. 22, 4 /zm/, braudjen, braucfyte, gebraud)t neighbor, 9Jad)bar, ber, ^adjbarn. 42,4 neither, f enter, 68, 1, 69, sent. 15 nephew, Sfteffe, ber, 9teffen never, ttie «^7£/, neu. 52, 1 /«■£■/*/, 9Zac^t f bte, ^ccidjte; last — , gefteru a'bettb «/^, neutt. 58, 2 «#, adv., ttetit; adj., feitt (20) nobody, nic'maub, memanb(e)8. 68, 1 none, fctncr, fcine, !ein(e)§. 68,1 not, mrfjt ; — yet, nod) nidjt. 1 20, 4 nothing, nid)t3 now, jetjt o'clock, ttljr, bte, 58, 5 October, Dfto'ber, ber. 171,3 of, the genitive (126, 2); oon (86, 1) <7^r, bietett, 6ot, geboten often, oft. 52, 2 old, alt 52, 2 0/z (= upon), auf (d. or a., 90, 1) ; {= beside,) an (D. or A., 90,1); — it, bar auf' (87, 1) once, ehtmaT (postpositive) ; at — , fogkirf)', gfetrf) one, etner. . 68, 1 only, nitr open, bffuett, bff'nete, geoff / net, auf'= ntadjen, mad)te auf', auf'gemadjt opposite, gegenft'ber (d.). 86,. i or, o'ber. 100, 1, 171, 5 other, attbrer. 70, 1 ought, foflen, folite, gefoflt. 186 our, uttfer. 20 out of, an§ (d., 86, 1) ; — it, batan$' (87, 1) outside, an'fterljalb (g.). 84, 3 over, it'ber (d. or a.). 90,1 own, beft^ctt, bejaf}', befef'fen ; adj., ctgett painting, GJemoTbe, bft3, ©emSl-'be Paris, ^avW, bftS. 44, 2 park, ^§arf, ber, qSarfe past 233 past. See 58, 7 (35icrtel and fjatb); (of time,) ttarf) (d.) peasant, $aner, ber, 93auern. 42,4 people, Seute (pi.), man (106, 4); (= nation,) $ol:f, ba3, golfer perhaps, btetfetd)t / [burft. 186 permitted: be — , biirfen, burfte, ge* persuade* nuerre'ben, fiberve'bete, Sfeetre'bet. 106, 4 piercing, bnrrfjbrtng'enb //#>/, f^iclcn, pelte, getyiett; ©piel, ba§, Spiele; ©tiitf, ba3, ©tiicfe please, oitte; frenen, freute, gefreut (impers., with a.); gefaffen, ge= fief, gefal'len (72, 3 ; d.) poem, ©cbid)^, ba§, (Stebidj'te polite, ffi'litf). 88,4 [(54,2) /rtd) / = punish, ftrafen, ftrafte, geftraft purse, $cntel, ber, SBeutei, SBiirfe, bie, SBorfen ^j/£, frfjieben, fdjob, gefdjoben ^«/, fteflen, fteUte, geftelit quarter, SBicrtet, ba3, SSiertet. 58, 7 queens ftS'ttigin, bie r fto'mgumen nzzVz, reg'tten, reg'nete, gereg'net rather: had (or would) — , JttiJdjte fteoer read, fefen, 153, gelefen. 72, 3 ready, fer'ttg really, fotrf'Ud) [7 2 ,3 receive, erljal'ten, err)telt r , erljat'ten. ra/, tot, 52, 2 [112 remain, oletben, btieb, ift geblieben. repeat, ttricberp'len, roieberljol'te, ttneberljott'. 96, 1 Rhine, 9ttfjetn, ber. 171,3 r^, retdj. 52, 1 rw&, reiten, ritt, ift geritten ?-z>£ (of the sun), anfgef)(e)tt, gmg auf 7 , ift auf'gegffngen ; (of persons,) a»f / ftc^(c)tt / ftanb auf, ift aufge= ftanben river, %\v$, ber, ^litffe room, dimmer, bft3, dimmer round, umtjcr 7 run, lanfen, lief, ift getaufert (72, 3) ; (=flow,) rumen, rarm, ift geronrten sad, trau'rtg [84, 1 sake: for the — of ftttt ♦ ♦ ♦ ttrifletu same : the — , berfeFoe. 64, 1, 2 Saturday, ©onn'afienb, ber. 171,3 say, fagen, fagte, gefagt. 75, 1 saying. See tnbem', 102, 1 Schiller, ©duller, ber. 45 1 , 171,2 school, ©tfjule, bie, ©djulen; at — , in (or ,auf) ber ©d)iile ; to — , in bie (or 5itr) ©djitle schoolhottse, Sdjule, bie, ^ctjuten sea, See, hit f Seen seat, %\&% ber, ^(a|e see, feljen, falj, gefefjen (72, 3, 112); — again, nuVberfefjen (92, 1) seeing that, bii. 104, 1 seek, fudjen, fucfyte, geffidjt see?n, fdjeinen, fcrjiert, gefctjienett send 234 sword send, fdjitfen, fdiirfte, gcftfiirft ; — a person fit to act, fcnben, fanbte, gefanbt (82,1); — after or for, fdjirfcn nod) (d.) servant, Xicncr, ber, Wiener set (of the sun), un'tergelj^n, gtng linger, ift un'tevgegangen seven, fiebcu several, mcf^rcrc. 70, 1 sexton, 3Re§ner, ber, 9#e§ner j/W/, see 146, 3, 5, 32 ; fallen, fotlte, gefoat (186) she, fie* 16 shoe, Sdjnf), ber, Sdjufje. 156, 3 jv$0?r, Ufer, ba§, lifer short, fnrj. 52,2 [fotft (186) should, see 77, 1 ; foflen, follte, ge= j/W, setgen, ^eigte, ge^eigt jaafe .■ 071 this — of, bie^ / feit(§) (g., 84, 1) ; on that (or the other) — of ptffeit(S) (g., 84, 1) simpleton, ein^falttger SDZenfdj. 58,6 since, conj. (of time), fett. 102, 1 •s-zVz^-, ft'ngen, fang, gefungen sister, Sdjtoefter, bie, Sdjioeftent j-z'/, ftt^en, fafj, gefef'fen; — down, fid) feijen, feftte fid), ftcf) gefefct jz>, fed)3, 58,2 j/^z^, Sflaoe, ber, ©flatten j-/^, fdjlafen, fdjltef, gefdjlafen. 72, 3 sleepy, fdjlSf'rtg small, fleilt, 52, 1 Smith, Sdjmibt, ber* 44, 1 .stz^w, Sdjnee, ber j-tf, f ; — . . . as, f8 ♦ ♦ . al§ or toic (53, 1, 105, 1); — long as, folang / (e) (102, 1) soldier', Sotbat', ber, Solba'ten some, ein'tger, cin paax, tt'toaS. 70, 1 something, tt'W&S. 70, 1 sometimes, mandj'mal. 58, 6 son, @of)n, ber, 33(nte song, ttict), ba$, Cieber soon, bail) (56, 1) ; as — as, fotmlV (102, 1); as — as possible, ntBg /= lidjft balb (56, 2) sour, fauer. 52, 1 [72, 3 jr^£, fpredjen, fprad), gefprod)en. splendid, pradj'tig. 56, 2 spoil, oerber'ben, berbarb', berbor 7 ^ ben. 72, 3 spring, ^rutyitng, ber, $rub/tinge; fpringen, f prang, ift gejprnngen stand, ftel)(e)n, ftanb, geftanben start, atVfafiren, fiir)r W, ift ab'ge= fafjren (72, 3), ab / gel)(e)tt, gtng 56', ift ab'gegangen stay, bleiben, blieb, ift gebueben; — after school, nadVfttjen, fafc nad)', naaYgefeffen step, treten, trat, ift getreten. 72, 3 stop, auf'liBren, fjbrte anf 7 , auf'geljort stove, Cfen, ber, £fen. 155, stream, Strom, ber, Strome street, Strafe, bie, Strain; in the — , auf ber Strode strong, ftarf. 52, 2 study, fhtbie'rett, ffubier'te, ftubiert 7 (i72 3 j; Stibium, $>a§, ©tiVbi=en (42,4) suddenly, JjIb't^Ud) suffer, leiben, litt, getitten [171,3 summer, Somnter, ber, Sommer. sun, Sonne, bte, Sonnen Sunday, Sonn'titg, ber. 171,3 suppose. See 33, 1 sweep, Jeljrcn, fefyrte, gefefjrt sweet, frtfd) (of milk, etc.), ftift. 52, 1 swim, fdjtoimmen, fd).Mnrm, ift ge= fdpommen Switzerland, bie @d)tt>et3. 171,3 sword, Sdjwcrt, bftS, (2d)tuerter table 235 table, £tftfj, ber, Stfdje /!a^, tteljmett, nafjm, genommett (29, 1) ; — fl^mj, tt'oerfeijett, fefcte 5'ber, Q'bergefettf (96, 1) talk, ftoredjen, fyrad), geforodjert (72, 3) ; re'bett, re'bete, gere'bet tall (of persons), groft. 54, 1 tea, £ee, ber, £eee /^^, leljreit, lefjrte, gelefjrt. 130, 1 teacher, Seljrer, ber, Sefyrer tear, £rchte, bie, SrSttett tear, retftett, rift, gettffen ten, geljtt. 58, 2 than, ai§. 53, 1 thank, battfett, bcmfte, gebanft (d.) that, ber (64, 1), jetter (8), ba$ (6s, 1), baft ; (= who,) bcr (66) ; (= so that,) battttt' (104, 1) the, bcr (10, 171); — . . . the, je ♦ . . beft'o (102, 1) theater, Xljea'ter, ba3, S^ea'ter; at the — , tttt Xljea'ter; /tefc, ber, S)iebe M/#£, bettfett, bad)te, gebadjt. 82, 2 //ford 1 , brttte(r). 167, 1 thirsty : lam — , t$ bitrftet ttttdj, 1 7 x M*y, biefer (8), i>it§ (65, 1) those, jene (8, 2), ba3 (65, 1) three, brei; —fold, brei'fadj (58,6) thrive, auf'fommett, fam auf, ift auf'gefommen through, bttrrf) (A.). 88, 1 /*'//, bt3 (a., 88, i) ; not — ,erft (56,2) time, gett, bie, ^eiteit Ar^ (orfer W ze/#// (y&r), toar'tett (auf, a.), rear's tete, geroar'tet w^ ?//, aufroetfen, roecfte auf 7 , aufgercecft «/#/£, f^te'ren ge!j(e)n, gtng fpa= gie'ren, tft fpajie'ren gegangen wander, ttmn'bern, toan'berte, ift ge= roan'bert wa?it, molten, tooUte, getooftt. 186 warm, tt»arm. 52, 2 was, war; were, waren. 174 wash, umfdjen, roufcf), geroafdjen. 72,3 watch, Uljr, bte, Ufyren water, Staffer, ba3, SBafjer we, ttJtr. 16 w^r, tragen, tritg, getrdgen. 72, 3 weather, SBetter, t>a$, ^Setter week, 2$orf)e, bic, SSodjen a/*//, roof)!, gut (22, 4), nittt (129, 15) were, toarft, fear en, to Br eft, etc. 1 74 what, tva§ ? at — ti?ne, tint ttnetjieF Ufjr? urn toetrfje £tit? — day? See 61, 1 «/^«, ai§ or toenn (102), toann? whenever, toemt. 102, 1 where, too; — from? toofjcV? (78, 5) whether, 00. 104, 1 which, toeldjer ? (8) ; £>/ — , tooburay (87, 1); 0/"— , motion 7 (87, 1) while, toSty'renfe. 102, i white, tocift. 52, 1 w/^, bcr ; toer ? 66 w/W*, ganj. 51,1 (see after, 68, 1) whom, ben, bie. 66, 142, 4 whose, beffen, beren. See ber, 66, 1 wide, tteit. 52, 1 wz'//. See 146, 3, 5, 32, 78, 1 William, SBiltyelm, ber. 171,2 wzW, 233inb, ber, SStnbe window, gfenfter, ba3, #enfter winter, Winter, ber, SSSintet, 171,3 wish, molten, tuottte, geroottt. 186 with, mtt (d.) ; (= near,) fret (D.). 86 without, ofjne (A.). 88, 1, 3 woman, $rau,. bie, ^rauen, S33et&, t>a§, 23et6er «/ort, ba§, 23ovte. 157 * wcr^, ar 7 oetten, ar 7 6eitete, gear's beitet; 5(r / 6cit, bie, 2(r 7 6eiten; 2£erf, bag, SSerfe awWtf, 233ett, bie, SSelten would. See 77, 1 write, fdjretben, frfjrie6, gefefyrieben ; in writing, see tnbem 7 , 104, 1 wrong, un 7 redjt ; do — , un'redjt tim, tat un 7 red)t, un 7 red)t getan year, $af)r, ba§, 35^re j^, ja ; — indeed, jatoo!)! 7 yesterday, geftern ; — morning, geftern ntorgen you, bit, ttjr, 6ie, 16 young, jung. 52,2 jK0«r, bein, euer, !5f)r. 20 yours, bcittcr, eurcr, !5f)rer. 62, x yourself, felbft. 16,3 j^«M, ^ifgenb, bie INDEX after, ioo, i, 171,5 ^Ib'Iaut, vowel change, 108 absolute, ace, 130,5; superl., 56,2 abstract nouns, 134,3, 141,4 accent, foreign words, 36, 1, 40, 1; compounds, 136, 1 accusative, 8, 130, 143, 2; absolute, 130,5; extent of time, space, 37, 1, 1 30, 4 ; future time, 61 2 ; for G. or d. of time, 130, 4; as object, 130, 1, 143,2; with adjectives, see miibe, 24, 4; with prepositions, 19 2 , 88, 90, 128,5 address, persons in, 6,2, 168, 169,2-4 adjectives, 141, 7-9, 149, 3; Class I, 46,164!; 11,48; III, 50; compari- son, 52, 167, 3, 4; irregular, 54; from proper names, 48, 4, 54, 5 ; as nouns, 54, 2, 3; with G., 126, 2; D., 128, 1; a., see miibe, 24, 4; with personal pronouns, 54, 4; posses- sive, 20; after alte and feine, 68,3; after eintije, etc., 71,1; with mand), 70, 1 ; fold), 64, 4 ; toeld), 66, 3 adverbial genitive, 126, 4 adverbs, 52, 1, 56, 149, 3, 167, 4; for pronouns, 87, 1, 170, 3; from geni- tive, 126, 4; in =en§, 56, 3, 60,3; order of, 120, 3 affirmation, mild, 98, 3 agent, 106, I agreement of verb with subject, 82, 3, 141,3, 168,3-5, 169,4 ■ alletn', 1 00, 1 aU(er), 68, 1, 3, 4 alter ttebft', 55 4 alS, as, than, 53, 1, 105, 1 ; as if, 104, 1; when, 102, 1, 2, 104, 2; al§ al§, 105 1 ; al§ ob, aU tretm, or aU, 104, 1 ; 17°.3 2; am = an bent, 10, 2, 52, 4, 167, 3 ; am Itebften, 56, 1, 57, 1 an, 90, 1, 3, 91, 1, 128, 5 anberS, 70, 3 anbrer, 70, 1-3, 71, 1 Stn'fang, 130, 4 another. See anbrer, 70, 1 an'ftatt or jtatt, 84, 1, 4 apostrophe, 44, 3 [ ID 3> 2 apposition, 47, 1, 82, 3, 126, 3, 149, 3, article, definite, 10 ; contracted, 10, 2 ; uncontracted, 39, 1 ; distributive, 132, 1, 171, 1 ; generic, 132, 1 ; with proper names, 49 \ 171, 2, 3; pecu- liar uses of, 132, 1, 171, 1 ; repeated, 171, 3 article, indefinite, 20; omitted, 133, 1 ; repeated, 171, 3 as, than, case after, 104 1 [54, 2 attributive, 46, 1, 48, 1, 49, 1, 2, 52, 3, and). See obgletd/, 104, 1 auf, 90, 1-3, 128, 5; auf£, 52, 4 au§, 86, 1 aufeer, 86, 1, 2 au'Berfialb, 84, 3 auxiliary, 144, 1, 146, 5; fiaben, 26, 2, 78, 4 ; fein, 30, 1 ; merben, 32, 1 ; order of, 80, 3, 124, 2; omitted, 124, 4; of moods, 78, 80, 186, 200 B bet, 86, 1 betbe§, 68, 1 feebor/, 102, 1, 2 bin gebo'ren, 61 1 binnen, 86, 2 bf§, conj., 102, 1; prep., 88, 1 btfsc&en, mtt ein flein, 70, 1 bleiben, 30, 1; with infin., 112 238 brennen, 82 bringcn, 82, capitals, 48, 4, 54, 2, 3, 5, 141, 1, 169, 2, 3, JJ 1 ^ cardinals, 58, 166, 167; do not affect the endings of adjectives, 47, 2, sentence 7 (but see 58, 2, 3) ; adjec- tives and adverbs -from, 58, 6 cases, 8; G., 126; D., 128; a., 130 catise, ba, irtbem 7 , toeil, 104, 1 cf. (= Latin c°nfer), compare Christian (given) names, 44, 1, 3, 163 clauses, 149, 1, 3, 6, 8; of cause, ba, ittbem', toeil, 104, 1; mild command, 98, 3; concession, 98, 3, 105 2 ; con- dition, 150, 151; manner, 170, 3; mild affirmatiott, 98, 3 ; purpose, 98, 3, bamit', 104, 1; time, 104, 2; de- pendent, 12, 3, 149, 1 ; indep., 149, 1 collective nouns, 82, 3, 141, 3 comma, 12, 3, 93, 1, 171, 5 command, mild (imperative subjv.), 98,3 comparison, adj., partic, adv., 52, 167, 3, 4; irregular, 54, 56 comparative, 52, 1 compound words, 136 ; accent of, 136, 1 ; repetition of consonants in, 136, 2; gender and inflection of, 136, 3; how formed, 136,4; suffixes in, 136 1 concession, 98, 3, 105 2 conditional mood, 76, 2, 77, 1 conditional sentences, 77, 1, 150, 151 ; simple, 150, 2, 151, 1 ; viore vivid future, 150, 3, 151, 2; less vivid future, 150, 4, 151, 3; contrary to fact, 150, 5, 151, 4 conjunctions, coordinating, 100; sub- ordinating, 102, 104 consonants, 4, 136, 2 contrary to fact, 150, 5, 151, 4 countries and towns, 44, 5, 128, 5 A GERMAN GRAMMAR ba, conj., 104, 1, 170, 3 bamit', 104, 1 bfr§, introductory, 63, 1, 65, 1 bafy, 104, 1; omitted, 12 1 , 121, 1 dates, 61 dative, 8, 128, 143, 2; of the indirect object (person affected, person inter- ested, possessor), 20, 2, 91, 1, 128, 2 ; with or without 3U, 75, 1, 143, 2; with verbs meaning tnake, etc., 130, 2; with in trans, verbs, 128, 3; with prepositions, 86, 90 ; of separation, 29, 1 ; of the time at which, 128, 4; of past time, 61 2 days, 60, 5, 61 definite article, 10; for poss. adj., 20, 2 ; with proper names, 171, 2, 3 ; peculiar uses of, 132, 1, 171, 1 bein, 20, 63, 1, 169, 2 beiner, 62, 63, 1 demonstrative pronouns, 64, 65, 1, 67, 1, 170, 1 benfen, 82, 2 benn, for, then, 100, 1, 3; than, 105 1 dependent clauses, 12, 3, 124, 1, 149, 1 ber, article, 10 ; demon, pron., 64, 1-3 ; rel. pron., 66, 1, 6, 67, 1, 170, 2 berer, 170, 1 derivation, 134, 136 beVjenige, 64, 1, 170, 2 berfeFbe, 64, 1 biefer, 8, 2, 3, 64; Me§, 63, 1, 65, 1; biefer-words, 10 1 (cf. 20 x ) bie3'feit(§), 84, 1 diminutive nouns, 34, 1, 134, 2 diphthongs, 3 distributive use of ber, 132, 1 division into syllables, 4, 2 bod), nevertheless, 33, 1, 122, 6 brei, 58, 2 bit, 18; £>u, 169, 2 bittd), 88, 1,2 biirfen, 78, 80, 186, 200 INDEX 239 E e dropped from ending or stem, 20 2 ; in g. and D., 152 1 , 152 2 ; in verbs, 12, 2, 72, 1, 74, 1, 2, 4; changed to i or ie, 72, 3; in com- pounds, 136 1 e'lje, 102, 1, 2 ein, 20, 64, 4, 133, 1 ; num. adj., 58, 3 einctn'ber, 18, 2 einer, 68, 1. See man, 68, 1 ei'ntger, 70, 1, 71, 1 ein paar, 70, 1 etn§, 58, 3 ein fo or fo ein, 65 1 emphasis, by position, 120 1 ; by spacing, 58, 3 emphatic verb phrases, 146 1 Snbe, 130, 4 enblidj, at last, 122,6 English related to German, 1, 204 entge'gen, 86, 1 ent'roeber . . . ober, 100, 1, 2 er, 18; ¥r, 169,3 Grben, 41 1 erft, adj., 60, 2, 167, 1 ; adv., 56, 2, 4 e§, 16, 17, 1, 63, 1 ; omitted, 17 1 , 106,3; U gt&t, 7^, 1 et 7 n)5§ or tofi§, 70, 1 euer, 20, 63, 1, 169, 2, 3 euphony, 12, 2, 20 2 , 98, 5, 152 1 , 152 2 eurer 62, 63, 1 Qtv. (= (Suer or (Snre), 169, 4 exclamation point, 74, 4, 171,6 exclamatory sentence in inverted or- der, 122, 1 ; in transposed order, 124, 1 ; with infin. or partic, 132,2 existence, e§ gi6t, 73, 1 expletive, B, 17, 1 F factitive (or second) object, 130, 1 (sentence 2), 130, 2, 143, 4 fafiren with fpaate'ren, 132,3 feminine nouns, unchanged in singu- lar, 152, 1 ; with =(e)n in g., d., or A. sing., 41 1 ; with =§ in G. sing., 126,4, 136,4 finben with infin., 112 for, 130,7 . [44,3 foreign nouns, 36, 1, 40, 1, 42, 1, 3, fractions, 60, 3, 4 fuftlen, 80,2; with infin., 112 fur, 88, 1 ; to3§ fur (ein), 66, 4 future and fut. pf., 32, 33, 1, 124, 3; ill G gona, 51,1,68, 1 (seealler) [106,1,172 s ge=> 26, 28, 92, 3, 94 ; omitted, 95, 1, geben, 72, 4, y^> * gegen, 88, 1, 4 gegenu'ber, 86, 1 gef)(e)n, impers., 22,4; with infin., 132,3; with partic, 132,6 gemaV, 86, 2 [152 4 , 169, 1 gender, 8,2, 141,6, 142,4, 152,2-4, generic (general) use of ber, 132, 1 ; of ein, 163,2 genitive, 8, 44,4, 126; adjectives with, 126, 2 (sentence 4); of adjec- tives, 46, 1 ; of proper names, 44,3, 4, 163; adverbial, 126,4; °f the time within ivhich, 126, 4; posi- tion of, 126,1; prepositions with, 84; verbs with, 19, 1, 127 (sent. 12) genug 7 , 70, 1 gern(e), 56, 1, 57, 1 German related to English, 1, 204 gerundive, 49, 2 flibt, 73, 1 given (Christian) names, 44, 1, 3, 163 Gothic, 1 Grimm's Law, 204 fia&en, auxiliary, 26, 2, 28, 2, 78, 4, 80, 3, 124, 2, 4; infi., 174; with infin., 112 240 A GERMAN GRAMMAR fjato, 51, i, 58, 7, 60,4, 84,3 liallien, fjaloer, 84, 1, 2 l)cir,cn, 80, 2 Tjelfen, 80, 2 §err, 40 3 &erg, 34 2 High German, I I) inter, 90, 1 I)Bren, 80, 2; with infin., 112 hour, 58, 5, 7, 59, 2. See SSiertel, 224 ^unbert, 58,4 hyphen, 4, 2, 136, 2 id), 18, 168,3, 5; sometimes omitted, see ottte (207), bemfert (208) identity, ctl§, 105, 1 =te / ren, verbs in, 172 3 iftr, pers., 16, 1, 169, 2, 3; omitted, _ 74, 4; poss., 20, 63, 1, 169, 2, 3 S*)r, 20, 63, 1, 169, 2-4 tfjrer, ISfyxex, 62, 63, 1 ^fjro, 169,4 immer with comparative, 55 s imperative, 74; infin. or partic. for, 132, 2; vowel change in, 74, 2 (see 72,3) impersonal verbs, 16,5, 106,3, I 44> 2 > H omitted, 17 1 , 106,3, I 3°>3 tit, preposition, 90, 1, 128,5 indefinite pronouns, 68, 70, 170,4; indef. rel. (fter), 66, 1, 5, 170, 2 inbem', 102, 1, 104, 1 indicative, 144,3,145,3-9; pres.,6, 12, 13, 1 (=Eng. perf.), 22, 24, 72, 78, 2; past, 6, 14, 15, 1 (= Eng. plupf.), 22, 24, 82, 1 ; perf.', 26, 28, 30, 78, 4, 80, 1 ; plupf., 26, 28, 30, 78, 4, 80, 1 ; fut. and fut. perf., 32; pass., 106; in indirect discourse, 100, 4, 101, 1, 101 1 , 101' 2 indirect discourse, subjv. in, 98, 4,5, 99,1, 100,4, 101 1 , 101 2 ; indie, in, 100, 4, 101, 1, 101 \ IOI 2 indirect object, 91, 1, 128, 1 indirect question, 98, 4, 5, 101 3 infinitive, 79. 1, 80, 2, 124, 2; position, 120, 1 ; with JU, 79, 1 ; with urn . . . hVi, 88, 1 (see tint); without 511, 79, 1, 80, 2 ; as noun, 34, 1, 141, 1 ; in -ing (often called verbal noun and some- times gerund), 1 12, 132, 3, 5, 6, 141, 5; phrase, 93, 1; for impv., 132, 2 in / nerl)al6, 84, 3 interrogation point, 171,6 interrogative adverbs, 124,1; pro- nouns, 65, 1, 66, 124, 1, 142, 5 ; sen- tence, 11, 1, 122, 1 intransitive verbs, 143,5; with fetn, 30, 1 ; as pass., 106, 3 ; with D., 128,3 inverted order, 11, 1, 100,2, 122 tr / genb(etner), ir'genbtoelcber, 170,4 irregular weak verbs, 82 je . . . , beft'o (or urn fo), 102, 1, 3; je . . . , je, 102,3; je ttadjbent', 102,1 jeber, 8, 2, 3, io 1 , 68, 1 ; plural of, 68, 1 (see atter) je'bermann, 68, 1 jebocf/, however, 122,6 je'manb, 68, 1 letter, 8, 2, 3, 10 1 ; jetted, 63, 1, 65, 1 jeVfeit^), 84, 1 3efu§ GfjriftuS, g. Sefu Gfjrtfti, d. ^efu Gfirtfto, a. ^efttm Gnnftum, vocative (case of address) ^efu Gljrtfte ; but often uninflected in all cases (171, 2) K fern, 20, 64, 4, 68,3; fetn fo, 65 1 ; fetner, 68, 1 ; fein-words, 20 1 fennen, 82, 1 key to the classes of nouns, 154 fonttnen, with partic, 132,6 fontten, 78, 80, 186, 200 241 Iang§, 84, 1 laffett, 80, 2, 106, 4, 202, 3 laufett with fpaate'ren, 132,3 lefjrett, 80, 2, 1 30, 1 Iernett, 80, 2 less vivid ftiture, 77,1, 150,4, 151,3 Iteber, 56, 1, 57, 1 liking, preference, choice, 57, x liquid stems, 20 2 , 72,2, 74, I Low German, I M madjerr, 80,2, 130, 2 man, eine£, etc., 68, 106, 4 martd)(er) f 70, 1, 71, 1 material weighed or measured, 59, I measure or weight, 59, 1 mef)t, 54, 1, 56, 1, 70, 1; in compari- son, 167, 4 mef/rere, 54, 1, 70, 1, 71, x mem, 20, 63, 1 metner, 62, 1, 63, 1 mit, 86, 1 SDfttte, 130,4 mixed adjectives, 50; nouns, 42 ; pre- fixes, 96; verbs, 82 modal (mood) auxiliaries, 78, 80, 186, 200; infinitive omitted with, 79, 1; two past participles of, 80, 1 (cf. 80,2) modification (Umlaut), 3,2; in nouns, 34, 2, 36, 2, 38, 2; in verbs, 72,3 moijett, 78, 80, 186, 200 monosyllabic nouns, 154; omitted in, 95, 1, 96, 3, 172 3 ; attributive, 46, 48, 49, 1, 2, 50; compared, 52; as noun, 54,2; for imperative, 132, 2; posi- tion of, 27, 1, 120, 1, 124, 1 passive voice, 106, 124, 3, 182 ; avoid- ed, 106, 4 past contrary to /act, fj, 1, 150, 5, I5I.4 peculiar verbs, 72 person, 66, 6, 142, 2-4 personal pronouns, 16, 17, 168, 169, 1-3 ; demonstrative for, 64, 3 ; agreement of, 66, 6, 168, 4, 169, 1 ; order of, 168, 3 phrases, 49, 1, 149, 2, 3, 9 possession, 20, 1, 2, 63. 1, 64, 3, 128, 2 possessive adjectives, 20; def. article for, 20, 2 ; dative of pers. pron. for, 20, 2, 128, 2 possessive pronouns, 62, 63, 1, 169, 1, 4 ; demonstrative for, 64, 3 possessor, 20, 2, 64, 3, 128, 2 potential verb phrases, 148 predicate adjectives not inflected except in superlative, 52, 1, 4, 167, 3, 4 predicate nominative, 143, 1; geni- tive, 126,2 (sent. 2); object, 143, 4 prefixes, separable, 92 ; inseparable, 94, 95, 1 ; doubtful, 96 ; two or more, 96, 3 prepositions with G., 84; with D., 86, 87, 1 ; with a., 88, 87, 1 ; with d. or 1 A., 90, 87, 1 ; with def. artic, 10, 2, 39, 1 ; with ba(r)-, too(r)-, 87, 1 ; instead of genitive, 44, 4, 126, 2 ; in verse, 203 [ I 5 I » 4 present contrary to fact, 77, 1, 150, 5, present indicative of peculiar verbs, 72; of strong verbs, 22, 72, 1-4; of weak verbs, 14, 72, 1 ; n 1 probability, 33, 1 progressive verb phrases, 147, 6 pronouns, demon., 64, 66, 5, 67, 1, 170, 1; indef., 68, 70, 71, 1, 170, 4; intens., 16, 3, 168, 2; interrog., 66, 1-4, 124, 1, 142, 5; pers., 16, 54, 4, 66, 6, 142, 168, 169, 1-3; poss., 62, 63, 1, 169, 1-4; recip., 18,2; reflex., 18, 143, 6; rel., 66, 67, 1, 2, 142, 4, 169, 1, 170, 2, 3 pronunciation, 2-5 proper names, 44, 45 1 ,49 1 , 126, 3, 141, 2,163,171,2,3; plural of, 44, 1,44 x punctuation, comma in, 12, 3, 93, 1, 171, 5 ; ex clam, point in, 74, 4, 171, 6; interrog. point in, 171, 6 purpose, 98, 3. See bctmft', baft (104, 1), iim. . . 33 (88, 1) question (interrogation) point, 171, 6 questions, direct, 11, 1, 122, 1, 146, 4, 5, 147, 5; indirect, 101 3 , 124, 1 reciprocal pronoun, 18,2 reflex, pronouns, 18, 143, 6; verbs, 18, 3, 106, 4, 143, 6 teiten with fpaaie'ren, 132, 3 relative adverbs, 87, 1, 124, 1 ; pro- nouns, 66, 67, 1, 2, 142, 4, 169, 1, 170, 2, 3 rennen, 82, 1 INDEX 243 repetition of attributive words before nouns of different genders (but often neglected in conversation and in poetry, as in English), 171, 3; auxil. verbs not generally repeated and often omitted, 124, 4; subject repeated when order becomes in- verted, 171, 5 =3, plural in, 44, 1, 44 1 '§ often for e§, it fdion, with pres. or past, 13, 1, 15, 1 script, 138-140 ©e., ©r., in titles, 169, 4 seasons, 60, 5, 171, 3 fefjen, 80, 2; with infin., 112 fein, be, 6, 174; as auxil., 30, 1; in- stead of toerben, 106, 2; with predi- cate genitive, 126, 2 (sentence 2); with infin., 132, 4; omitted, 124,4 feilt, his, its, 20, 63, I fetner, 62, 63, 1 feit, conj., 102, 1; prep., 86, 1, 2 fettbem', 102, 1 felbft (or fel&er), 16, 3, 168, 2 fenben, 82, 1 separation, dative of, 2Q, 1, 128, I ftcf), 18 fie, ©te, 16 similarity, tote, 105, I fo> 32, 3, 151 ; (= fold),) 6s 1 ; fo et'tofis (= foIdje§), 70, 1 (see et'rociS) ; fo lange . . ., 6t§, 102, 1 fo&aiy, 102, 1 fofang^e), 102, 1 fo(ct)(er), 64, 1,4, 71, 1; avoided by using em fo, fo ein, tern fo (65 *) or fo et'w&S (70, 1) fort b era, 100, 1 space, extent of , 37, 1, 130, 4 fpasie'ren, 132, 3 ©r., ©e., in titles, 169, 4 state, 106, 2 fratt, att'ftatt, 84, 1, 4 strong adjs., 46; nouns, 34-39; verbs, 22 (pres., past), 28 (perf., plupf.), 32 (fut., fut. pf.), 72 (pres.), 74, 2, 4 (impv.), 108-119 (classes), 172, 3, 5 subject, agreement of verb with, 168, 3-5, 169, 4; omitted, 17 1 , 106, 3, 130, 3; repeated, 171,5 (sentence 2) ; separated from verb or conjunc- tion, 122,5, I2 4, 5 subjunctive, past, plupf., 76, 1, 77, 1 ; mood, 98, 144, 3, 145, 1 ; in ind. dis- course, 98, 4, 5, 99, 1, 100, 4, 1 01 !, ioi 2 , 101 3 ; in a wish (optative subjv.), a mild command, ptirpose (see batntt', bafj, 104, 1), concession, mild affirmation (potential, diplo- matic, dubitative subjv.), condition (151,3,4), 98, 3 subordinate clause, 12, 3, 80, 3, 98, 4, 101, 1, 102, 2, 124, 1 subordinating conjunctions, 102, 104 such a, 64, 4, 65 1 suffixes, 134, 136 1 superlative, 52, 54, 56; superl. corn- par., superl. eminence, 52,4, 167, 3 supposition, 33, 1 syllables, 4, 2 Scmfertb, 58, 4 tense auxiliary, 26, 2, 28, 2, 30, 1, 80,3; omitted, 124,4 tenses, 145, 3-9 than, case after, 104 1 the . , . the, 102, 1 (see je . . . , beft'o) time of day, 58, 5 ; of week or of month, 61, 1 ; within which, 126, 4 ; at which, 128,4; extent of , 130,4 titles, 163, 1, 3, 169, 4 to, 128, 5 ; toward, 86, 3, 88, 4, 128, 5 towns and countries, 44, 5, 128, 5 transposed order, 12,3, 124 trofc, 84, 1 244 A GERMAN GRAMMAR . mitten, 84, 1, 2; u6er, 90, 1, 91 1 inn, 88, 1 ; vim dm . . . ju, 88, x Umlaut, vowel modification, 3, 2 unb, 100, 1, 171, 5 unfer, 20, 63, 1 unfrer, 62, 63, 1 unter, 90, 1 un'terrjalo, 84, 3 verbal noun, 141, 5 verbs, 143-151, 172-202; stem, 172, 1 ; vowel change, 108, 192 ; prin. parts, 172, 2-5; tenses, 145, 3-9; endings, 173; infl. with fjaben, 26, 2, 28, 2, 78, 4, 80, 3, 1 24, 4 ; with fetn, 30, 1, 124, 4; separable, 92, 2, 3, 96, 3, 188; insep., 95, 1, 96, 3, 189; strong, 22 (pres., past), 28, 30 (perf., plupf.), 32 (fut., fut. pf.), 72 (pres.), 74, 2-4 (impv.), 76, 98 (subjv.), 108- 119 (classes); weak, 12 (pres..), 14 (past), 26, 30 (perf., plupf.), 32 (fut., fut. pf.), 72 (pres.), 74, 1, 3, 4 (impv.), 82 (irreg.), 76, 98 (subjv.); mood auxil., 78, 80, 186, 200; pass, voice, 106, 182 ; impers., 17 1 , 106,3, 144,2, 189, 6-8; reflex., 18, 3, 106, 4, 143, 6, 184 btet(er), 70, 1, 71, 1 bon, 44, 4, 86, 1, 91 x , 163, 5 bor, 90, 1 vowels, 3, 72, 3, 108, 192 W mSb/teno, conj., 102, 1, 104, 2; prep., 84, 1 mtfrb, mSrbfr, 24, 3 mas, 66, 67, 2; (= et'mas,) 70, 1 ; ma3 fur (ein), 66, 4 weak adjs., 48; nouns 40; verbs, 12 (pres.), 14 (past), 26, 30 (perf., plupf.), 32 (fut., fut. pf.), 72 (pres.), 74, 1, 3, 4 (impv.), 82 (irreg.), 76, 98 (subjv.), 172, 2-4 meber . . . nocf), 100, 1, 2 megen, 84, 1, 2 weight or measure, 59, I toetl, 104, 1 melcrjer, 8, 2, 3; indef., 70, 1; rel., in- terrog., 66, 1, 3; melajes, 63, 1, 65, 1 menben, 82, 1 me / uig(er), 70, 1, 71, 1 [170, 3 menu, 102, 1, 104, 1, 2, 122, 3, 151 1 , menu . . . aucf). See obgletcf/, 104, 1 mer, 66, 1, 2, 5, 67, 2, 170, 2 merbeu, pres., past, 24; auxil., 32, 76, 2. 80, 3, 106 (pass, voice), 124, 2, 3 when, 104, 2 mtber, 88, 1 mie, as, like, 53, 1, 105, 1 ; however, rote . . . aurf), 105,2, sentence 3; true al§, 105 1 ; of manner, 170, 3 mteber, 92, 1, 96, 1 mtr, 16, 168, 3-5 wish, 98, 3 miff en, 82,2 mo, 170,3; mo(r)=, 87,1 morjl, 33, 1 morben, 172 3 ttmrbe or mar gebo^en, 61 x gu, 86, 1, 3; with d., 75, 1, 91, 1 ; with infin. (repeated before each infin.), 79,1, 92,3; omitted, 79,1, 80,2, 132, 2; with pres. par tic, 49, 2 jum^ber, 86, 2 §roet, 58, 2 amifdjen, 90, 1 LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 111 Hill 11 '111 fl III 1 !,r " llllllllUilllilllllIliililll^li^iii 003 224 982 6 #